← Volver a la ficha del textoGoogle
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world’s books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non- commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at jhttp : //books . qooqle . com/
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by
Googl
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
rb A A i A & > A'±* b Jb rb b X > At £ T *
> A 8 b b d A At JL 0- X f 1 " b i»‘ rb A J X b X
I I
+ A -J b X H A° □ b° I" 1 * H° A"* JL f X 1 r 6
I
i A~ b A rb H° A JL + rb rb 8° A~ T £'£
rb A A "> A i b X At b X > rb i T =fi
"> d J + J <b + A' 8 I rb d + J <b"d b rb d + & d
O I I
LrbDld£l J 81 tbA'ldbX
I
b A 1 AA AA i( UHril id
T G b A 1 d
8 d'l d b Jl d JL. A Jl A ±',£ rb A A
G- r b A i d T G b A' 1 d
LO b L G d T*1 b A A i d T b b A 1
i i
b i"* sf A" JL b rb 8 1 rb ±
A
PALI GRAMMAR
OlC THE BASIS OF KACflCHAYANO.
H i > 6 £ a A 1 H £ 8 I* "8 1 H £ 6 ^ 1 1
with
CHRESTOMATHY & VOCABULARY.
BY
Francis Mason, D. D.
MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,
and American Oriental Society,
’’Priests, from among my clerical disciples who are able to
amplify ia detail that which is spoken in epitome, the most eminent
is the Great Kachchayano.” Gautama.
TOrXGOO :
Institute press, printed by sau kada,
180 $.
Digitized by L-ooQle
In a Prospectus of the Pali Grammar, printed in September
1864, it was stated : “The manuscript has been examined by a
Committee of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and approved for
publication, in their Bibliotheca Indica. The Society will pay
for printing the edition at the ordinary rates, and give the Au-
thor one hundred copies ; but to execute the work satisfactorily
to himself, he wishes to procure a font of Sanscrit type, for oc-
casional comparison of words, and several other fonts that will be
of no use to him, except in this work. To meet these extra
expences, he proposes to sell a part of his copies to subscribers
at ten rupees per copy.”
How liberally this appeal has been met, will appear from •
the following list of subscribers, to whom the Author’s best
thanks are here tendered. As the demand is greater than
the supply, for the Author can furnish only one hundred copies,
subscribers, who cannot be provided, will be referred to the
Asiatic Society of Bengal.
THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIA 50 COpieS.
CoL Sir Arthur P. Phayre K. C. S. I. and C. B. 2
Col. A. Fytch, Chief Commissioner 2
CoL J. F. J. Stevenson, Commissioner 1
Col. R. S. Tick ell, Commissioner 1
Capt. E. B. Sladen, Agent to Chief Commissioner
at Mandalay 1
M^jor. H. T. Duncan, Inspector General of Police 2
E. O. Riley Esqr, Deputy Commissioner 1
Capt. M. B. S. Lloyd, Deputy Commissioner 1
Major A. R. Me. Mahon, Deputy Commissioner 1
Capt. C. E. Watson, Deputy Commissioner 1
Capt. G. E. Fryer, Assist. Sec. to Chief Commissioner 1
J. Treacy Esq, Assistant Commissioner 1
1
Digitized by
Google
Col. R. D. Ardagh, Commissioner
Lieut. H. A. Gower, Assistant Commissioner 2 copies
Lieut. R. St. A. St. Iohn, Assistant Commissioner 1
Charles Duke Esqr. Assistant Commissioner 1
T. W. Hunt Esqr. Extra Assistant Commissioner 1
R. S. Edwards Esqr. Collector of Customs 1
Peter Martyr Esqr. Post Master 1
Col. L. Graham H. M. 18th. Regmt. 1
Col. H. W. Blake. M. D. 3 ...
Capt. Babington 1
Dr. C. Williams M. D. 1
W. Theobald Esq. Geological Survey 5
D. D. Brandis Esqr. Chief Conservator of Forests 1
H. Leeds Esqr. Conservator of Forests 1
Capt. Seaton, Conservator of Forests 1
Lieut W. Stenhouse, Deputy Conservator of Forests 1
James Barker Esqr. Deputy Conservator of Forests 1
Dr. Schlich, Assistant Conservator of Forests 1
Right Revd. Bishop Bigandet 3 ...
Rev. E. Marks 1
Rev. C B. Lewis 1
* Rev. G. De Cruz 2
A. Watson Esqr. 1
James Black Esqr. * 1 ...
G. E. Barr Esqr. 1 ...
Dr. John Dawson M. D. 1
J. H. S. Bronson Esqr. 1
John De Silva Esqr. 1
Alexander George Esqr. I
Chr. Dectjon Esqr. 1
G. C. Barlew Esqr. 1
Edmund Jones &. Co. 1
Triibner & Co. 60, Paternoster Row (Conditional) 60
Rev* J. F. Norris
2
Digitized by AjOOQle
~The declensions and -conjugations in Pali are very pimple,
•and may *be more readily acquired than either the 'Latin or the
‘Greek. The principal difficulty, in reading Pali, is j found in
the numerous changes that are made in the roots, in the form-
ation of new bases for declension and conjugation, in adding
many and various particles to form derivative words, and in
the permutation of words when combined into sentences.
The roots consist of one or two consonants, but -the second
is most frequently lost in the changes that occur, and occasion-
ally the first also, so that not a vestige of the original root
appears in the derivative, §946.
These changes are sometimes greater in Pali than oven in
Sanskrit. Take for instance, the word nigban , which hatf
t^een adopted into Burmese. The root is va> to go, tO/Blow,
and ' ^ ni, is prefixed in the signification of out, the word thus
Signifying to go out, .as, a* fire or light. . na ia affixed to . n^ake tb,e
v erb a noun, § 256, and n is added to put it in the neuter
gender, § 90.
When ^ m is prefixed, the following consonant, v, is requi-
red to be doubled, § 75, but a double w f ,ia changed to a dquble
bb y § 303. Thus the neuter noun from ni and va is ^ wiibdna.
The. Bumese write the second b r p, pronounce the first y, and cut
off the last syllable an, thus making the word nigban. In both
the Pali and the Burmese word, all appearance of the o^igipal root
is lost, but in Sanskrit, when the v is doubled, it ^eraaips uncban-
. ged, and the Sanskrit preposition . cprresponding to m in .Pal?,
is mV, so the Sanskrit word : fo^ed on the . same, base as the
Pali is
Digitized by v^.ooQle
K
It hag been a prominent object in the following pages, to
make these changes readily understood, and thus facilitate the
acquirement of the language. The changes to which letters are
subjected are recapitulated at the commencement of each letter
in the Vocabulary, that the student in looking up a word,
may recognize readily the root from? which it is formed.
The Vocabulary furnishes the definitions of many more words 1
than appear in the list, because on the pages to which refer.,
ence is made, many derivatives will be often found defined.,
And to make it useful to persons imperfectly acquainted with
the grammar, uncommon farms are sometimes introduced with
references to where explanations of them may be found. Many
verbs have two. or more bases, § 210, and while one only would
be given in ordinary dictionaries, all will be usually found in
this Voeabulary.
There is a great need of a full and accurate Dictionary of
{he language, but that is in good hands. Our present Chief
Commissioner, Col. Fytch, announced the preparation of a Pali
Dictionary several years ago, and we have the best authority for-
stating, that so soon as he can obtain leisure, he fully intends to
finish, and publish the work.
This book will not be found free from typographical, and
other errors, though it is believed there are none of a very se-
rious character. While carrying it through the press, the wri-
ter was teaching Biblical Exegesis to a large school, with Land
Purveying and use of instruments in the field, had to correct
Karen Trigonometrical calculations, was writing a work in Bur-
jnese on Materia Medica and Pathology, was printing an A-
rithmetic in two Karen dialects, and writing and printing an ele-
mentary work in three languages, besides the care of seventy
or eighty churches, their schools, and teachers, involving inces-
sant applications, and interruptions. It is not remarkable then,
that oversights occasionally occur, as on pages 119, 120, where
declined is read on the running title instead of conjugated .
In writing a similar book in Sanskrit, the assistance of a
learned pundit could he obtained, to relieve the author of much
of the labor involved, but from Tavoy to Toungoo, and from
*1830, to 1863, not a single native has been found whose as-
sistance in such a work conld be of the least value. Many
of the ^priests can repeat large portions of Kachchayano’a
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Hi
Grammar, and yet of the principles of grammar they seem to
be totally ignorant.
Bishop Bigandet says: “Phongyies are fond of exhibiting
their knowledge of the Pali language, by repeating from memory,
and without stammering or stumbling, long formulas and senten-
ces ; but I have convinced myself that very few among them
understood, even imperfectly, a small part of what they recited.”
It is an interesting fact that the Pali, which has the oldest
alphabet in India, has been printed by Karens whose own lan-
guage is among the last reduced to writing. Some of the
earlier forms show their inexperiance, but the general character
of the work has been commended.
The Deputy Commissioner in his official report to Govern-
ment, dated 23, Oct. 1867, wrote: “The Printing department of
the Institute I consider a great success. Dr. Mason has learned
the printers’ art, and taught three Karens to print. The Pali
Grammar, a copy of which I shall send you with a separate let-
ter, has been printed by these men, and I think reflects great
credit on Dr. Mason and his pupils.”
The Rev. E. B. Cross writes : “I wrote you a hasty note
on Saturday, which did not fully answer my purpose. I ought
first of all to have expressed my admiration of your printing in
all the characters and languages which it represents, for it is
certainly very neatly and beautifully done.”
In omnibus gratias agite.
David rex benedixit Domino coram universa multitudine et
ait, Benedictus es Domine Deus Israel patris nostri ab ®terno in
aeternum.
Tua est Domine magnificentia et potent ia, et gloria, atque vic-
toria, et tibi laus. Cuncta enim quae, in celo sunt et in terra,
j.ua sunt. Tuum Domine regnum, et tu es super omnes principes.
Tuae divitiae et tua est gloria, tu dominaris omnium. In
manu tua virtus et potentia,. in manu tua magnificare et fortifi-
care omnia. Nunc igitur Deus noster confitemur tibi, et
laudamus nomen tuum inclytum.
Quis ego et quis populus mens ut possimus base tibi uni-
versa promitt ere ? Tua sunt omnia, et que de manu tua ac-
cepimus, dedimus tibi.
Peregrini enim sumus coram te et advenae, sicut omnes pa-
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Dies nostri quasi umbra super tenram, ret tnuR*
ires nostri.
est mora.
(Benedictus Dominus Dons Israel, qui fecit mirabilia solus,
Et bene dicta nomon mejestatis ejus in fitevnmn, et in seen-
lam eeculi, et replebitur majeetate ejus omniB terra. Amen,
at a2nen.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER I.
THE ALPHABET.
Origin of the Pali alphabet,
3
Simplicity of the Pali alphabet,
5
Age of the alphabet,
7
Modern alphabet,
8
The Pali language,
10
Derivation of word Pali,
11
Extension of the Pali language,
13
The first Pali grammar.
14
Number of letters,
15
Division of letters,
17
Pronounciation,
17
CHAPTER II.
PERMUTATION.
Permutation — when two vowels meet,
21
KUJHCHAYANO’S RULES,
97
GENERAL RULES,
28
INSERTION OF CONSONANTS,
28
WHEN VOWELS ARE FOLLOWED BY
CONSONANTS, 29
THE *kASAL SYMBOL ANUSWARA,
31
CHAPTER III.
TABLES OF DECLENSION.
•
Nouns,
34
First declension,
34
Second declension,
37
Third declension,
39
Irregular nouns.
42
Adjectives,
43
Participles,
45
Numeral adjectives,
46
Pronouns,
48
Bock cut declension,
53
CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
n
CHAPTER V.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 68
Degrees of Comparison, 69
Numeral Adjectives, 71
Ordinal Numbers, 76
CHAPTER VI.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
Personal pronouns, 77
Possessive pronouns , 78
Reflexive pronouns, 79
Demonstrative pronouns, 79
Relative pronoun, 80
Interrogative pronoun, 80
Indefinite pronouns, 89
CHAPTER VII.
VERBS.
Voice, 81
Mood, 81
Tense, 82
Number, 82
Person, 82
Terminations of verbs , 86
Active Voice, 83
Middle and Passive Voice, 86
Paradigm, 87
Active Voice, 87
Passive Voice, 89
MUTATIONS OF Y, 91
Conjugation, 93
REGULAR VERBS,, 93
SECOND CONJUGATION, 93
THIRD CONJUGATION, 93
FOURTH CONJUGATION, 97
FIFTH CONJUGATION, 97
SIXTH CONJUGATION, f'8
SEVENTH CONJUGATION, 99
EIGHTH CONJUGATION, 102
Verbs of several conjugations, 103
Causal verbs, 105
Desiderative verbs, 107
Digitized by v^.ooQle
in
Intensive, of Frequentive verbs, 108
Denominative verbs, no
Reduplicated verbs, 112
Anomalous verbs, 115
Asa to bi, 315
Bhu to be, 117
Su to BE, 121
Gamu to go, 124
Disa , or Dakhha to see, 125
JNyd to know, 325
Bru to SPEAK, 125
Vaclia to speak, 2 26
Vada to speak, i26
Jara to grow old, 12 g
Mara to die, 126
Isu to wish, 127
Yamu , to restrain, 127
Bd to give, “* 127
MISCELLANEOUS ANOMALIES, 127
Participles, 128
Active Voice, 12 g
PRESENT PARTICIPLE, 12g
FUTURE PARTICIPLE, 12 g
PERFECT PARTICIPLE, 12 g
Middle and Passive Voices, 128
PRESENT PARTICIPLE, 12g
PAST PARTICIPLE, 12g
Con tinuatiye participle, 132
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE, 133
Infinitive Mood, 134
CHAPTER VIII.
INDECLINABLE WORDS.
Adverbs, 135
CORBEL LATIVE ADVEBBS, 135
MISCELLANEOUS ADVERBS, 136
Prepositions, 137
Conjunctions, 138
Interjections, 138
Digitized by v^.ooQle
TV
CHAPTER IX.
DERIVATIVE WORDS.
Ka , ycika , 143
Ta , tfa, Zfa, Zra, iZfa, /^a, 144
ft, yana , ma, ^’tna, ya, 145
Ya, maya, eya, eyya, 146
.Kara, wa, era, fa, Zfa, ifa, va, 147
Sa, ssa, d, ta, va, ti, 148
Di, t, vt, u, tu, dhu, nn, nu, 149
Mma, iya , hkhatthu, dhd , 150
CHAPTER X.
COMPOUND WORDS,
Governing Determinate Compounds, 15 1
Appositionai Determinate Compounds, 152
Numeral Determinate Compounds, 153
Collective Compounds, 153
Possessive Compounds, 154
Adverbial Compounds, 154
CHAPTER XI,
SYNTAX, AND CHRESTOMATIIY.
ARTICLES, 15*
Indefinite Article, 155
Definite Article, 156
NOUNS, 157
Nominative case, 157
Accusative case, 158
Instrumentive case, 159
Dative case, 162
Genitive case, 163-
Ablative case, 164
Locative case, 165
personal pronouns, 166
Relative pronoun, 167
Verbs and Participles, 168
Ancient inscription on a gold scroll, 169
The longest Pali word, 171
Gaudama’s Famous Sermon, 173
Asoka and Antiochus, 179
Digitized by v^.ooQle
INTRODUCTION
“The Buddhist traditions in Ceylon/* wrote Prof. Cowel. “all
agree in calling the author of the earliest Pali grammar Kachchaya.
no, and although this is said to have perished** — “The Hon*ble G.
Tumour, late Colonial Secretary of Ceylon,** says Mr. Alwis, “drew
attention to some of the Pali works formerly extant in Ceylon, and
amongst them, to Kachchayana’s grammar, which he then regard-
ed as extinct.* — The Rev. F: Mason says: ‘The grammar reputed to
have been written by Kachchayana, still exists. I had a copy made
from tha palm -leaf, on small quarto paper, and the Pali text occu*
pies between two and three hundred pages, while the Burmese
interpretation covers more than two thousand. I made a compend-
ium of the whole, Pali and English, a few years ago, on the model of
European grammars, which might be printed in one or two hundred
pages, and convey all the information contained in the two or
three thousand in manuscript.”*
This “compendium** was submitted to a committee of the Ben-
gal Asiatic Society, and approved for publication in 1854, and Mr,
Alwis writes that he obtained a copy in Ceylon in 1855. The exis-
tence then of Kachchayano’s work was first brought to notice from
Burmah.
Many will ask: “Who was Kachchayano?” The commenta-
tors on his grammar say he was one of Gaudama’s disciples, select-
ed by him to write a grammar of his discourses ; not a grammar of
the entire language, but of that part of it used by Gaudama, bear-
ing the same relation to the whole language that Winer’s Greek
Grammar of the New Testament writers, does to the whole of the
Greek language.
From Sanskrit sources we learn that there was a Kachchaya-
no, or Kakatayana, who composed a Sanskrit grammar about the
age of Gaudama. Dr. E. Buhler has shown from manuscripts re-
cently discovered, that Panani “The father of Sanskrit grammar,**
♦Alwis, page ii a
Digitized by v^.ooQle
11
Introduction .
quotes from Kachchayano as his predeces sor, and has borrowed
from him many of his grammatical terms. This establishes his anti-
quity, and Dr. Bnhler adds: “I believe that Kakatayana was not a
Brahman, and should not be at all astonished, if it were established
by additional evidence that he was a follower of Sakyamnni. ,,#
The name however is not conclusive as to the authorship, for
there are other writers of the same name. There were two Sans-
krit grammarians of the name, and the Chinese pilgrim , Hioun-
thsang who was in India A. D 629 — 645, sojourned in a monastery
founded by Asoka in which a Kachchayano composed a theological
work three hundred years after the death of Gaudama. Still the
fact that the older grammarian was not a Brahmin, goes far to
sustain the Buddhist tradition.
Mr Alwis says there ean be no doubt but this grammar was
written in the days of Kachchayano, but the natives prefer no such
claim. They say it was preserved by oral tradition for 450 years
after the death of Gaudama, when with the sacred books it was
committed to writing A. C. 93 Indeed there appears to have been
no books in India any where in the days of Gautama, though the
people were acquainted with letters.
After Alexander came to India, the Greeks wrote that the In-
dians were illiterate, and though letters were used for inscriptions
on mile stones, yet “Their laws were unwritten, and that they ad-
ministered justice from memory. ”+ There is no good reason then
to suppose that the grammar was committed to writing before A#
C. 93, and if the greatest of poems, the Illiad, has reached us by
oral tradition, for it is now admitted that the Greeks had no letters
in the days of Homer, there is nothing incredible in a small gram-
mar being transmitted in the same way.
The condition of the manuscript accords with the later date of
writing, but with the earlier it would contain anachronisms. Book
II. Part 3rd. Aphorism 17, contains the following example:
og dlcooo d8 og csol^Soo c8ooi>
Java goto si twan devananpiyci tissa
“Tissa, beloved of the Devas, whither art thou going?”
“Now Tissa beloved of the Devas” was the king of Ceylon who
was contempory with Asoka, so the work could not have been
written much before the date assigned by tradition.
♦Journal of A. S. of Bengal, No. It. 1864. fSbiA* No. II 1859.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Introduction.
4i
Kachchayano’s grammar xarriae wilh it internal evidence of
°having*been composed with fecial reference to being committed to
memory. It is first* written in brief aphorisms which contain the
kernel of the work, and though they occupy but twenty pages of
manuscript, ^hey contain all the grammatical principles in the book*
These apfabrisms are nex ^written in paraphrase to make them more
easily understood, filling fifty pag^s, and -following this stra"
turn is a third consisting of examples, of somewhere about one
hundred pages, and outside of this again are exceptions with occa-
sional annotations. Here the commentator steps up with a para-
phrase on Kachchayano’s last remarks, to make all things plain.
In fact Kachchayano built his grammar precisely like the edi-
fice of the Paris exhibition. He laid down the germ of his gram-
mar in the centre, and then described around it severed concentric
circles, each containing all the things of a kind, and then struck
out some seven hundred radii, crossing these circles, from the centra
to the circumference, on each of which may be found every variety
in the book, aphorism, paraphrase, example, exception or annotation,
and commentary. The following is an example from B. 6, P. 4. A.3
Aphorism.
Ghatddincm vd
“Sometimes of Gat a et cetera.”
Paraphrase.
oo<£o§$oooq$ saoocoooo^o^OL gcooocBol ooo^coo
ghafadinart dhatwnan asatfiyoganidnan wtMhi hoti vd Jcdrite
“On account of a causal affix, when not ending in a com-
pound consonant, the vowel of the root ghata et cetera is some-
times lengthened.”
Examples.
cocs>e8 odd^oocB eo^ooeB ooos>oco<8
ghdfeti ghafeti ghat ay a ti ghafdyati ghdtapete
aogDcocB ©oog>ooooc8 oo^dooocB
ghatapeti gkdtapayati ghafapayati
“He causes to unite,”
Exceptions
eo^5§}8c8 c8ogg° oolce^cB
ghatddtnamiti himatthan JcdreH
“Why ghata et cetera?” “He causes to go.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
iv
Introduction .
Commentary.
COO C> 3230^00 00^0 fScB 08 c8«gg «lo^COO^ 0[QQ°
bho dchariya ghatanamiti padan kimuttan dchariyena vv
cooo c8oco ooocqcB goc£ 92o§oq gsloo<^cc«ooq
bho sissa kdreti iti adisu udaharcuhesu
C0cB3 OOO^COO 9200 cooo oc^ooo oooq§ COO^oS^
satipi karite asanyogantessa dhatuhmi gha{ddonan
920000 goS^D OqCQQ^» 0 |[ g ^ cooocS
abhava imina suttena vuddhi nahoti
“O Teacher ! why was the aphorism ‘ghajddtnan, et cetera/
spoken by the teacher?
“0 Pupil ! Ghat a et cetera , though of roots not ending in
compound consonants, [lengthening the vowel] on account of a
causative affix, yet by this aphorism no lengthening may take
place/’ “He causes to do’ et cetera are also among the examples.”
The language of the commentary indicates a spoken rather th m
a written work, and it is note worthy that while the grammar is a uni-
ty as a whole, it contains three small grammars, each complete in
itself. (1.) The aphorisms, which are sometimes written together
in a separate volume. (2.) The paraphrases, which might be wri-
ten out alone, when they would form a grammar by themselves, in-
dependant of the parts that precede and follow, and (3.) The exam-
ples, which written out consecutively, would form a mass of mate-
rial, from which all the grammaticle principles might be deduced
in the previous parts. Nothing could be better adapted for a me-
moriter work than Kachchayano’s grammar.
But on the other hand it may be said there is internal evidence
that the book was originally written. When two short vowels meet
they are combined into one long vowel ; and Kachchayano’s lan-
guage, with the following example is:
Cog 53 oq a V an
“There this.”
“Separate the consonant from
its vowel.”
“In the place of the consonant
put the vowel.”
“Put the separated consonant
below.”
00 O CJO
00 O O CO
CO
O CJQ
Digitized by v^-ooQle
Introduction .
'Y
“Erase the first vowel.”
oo o 06
“Lengthen the last vowel.” 00
1 00
“U nite the consonant with
the vowel.”
In* folio wing out these instructions in the Kyoungs, the exam-
ple is written over six times, as exhibited step by step above in the
Burmese character. Kachchayano’s pupils must have used, the sty-
is, but it does not necessarily follow that the whole grammar was
written out.
The work is also divided into eight books treating on different
subjects, as below:
Book I.
... IT.
III.
IV.
Y.
... VI.
... YII.
... VIII.
The alphabet, permutation, and combination.
Declension-nouns, adjectives, and pronouns.
Government
Compound words.
Noun derivatives.
Verbs.
Verbal derivatives.
from Uhnddi affixes.
Each book is divided into several Sections, each containing
from twenty to fifty aphorisms. The copy found in Ceylon by Mr.
Alwis sets down the whole of the aphorisms at 687, but the copies
in Burmah say there are 710.
It is probable that we have substantially the work that was
composed by Kachchayano, but if books that haye been watched o-
ver like the manuscripts of the New Testament, have their alter-
atians, and interpolations, it would be marvellous if Kachchayano
Jiad come down to us intact.
The book is said to have been brought to Burmah A. D. 387, by
Buddhaghosa, and the Burmese translation and commentary are
ascribed to him. Whoever the translator was, he was certainly a San-
skrit scholar, for Sanskrit sounds not in Pali are sometimes repres-
ented. Thus: “he crosses,” in the text is tarati taraiti
in the commentary, from the Sanskrit root tri
Digitized by v^.ooQle
n
Introduction,
A Pali grammar was published in Ceylon in 1624 byihe Bdr.
Benjamin Clough of the Wesleyan Mission, but the writer sketched
out the present work before he knew of its existance, and he did not
see a copy till he obtained the loan of one while in London through
the kind efforts of Dr. Hoyle, Secretary of the Wesleyan Missiona-
ry Society ; which was in 1854, after his manuscript had been ap-
proved for publication by the Bengal Asiatic Society.
It appeared however on examination that Mr. Clough’s gram*
mar was not Kachchayano’s, but a translation of Mogallano’ s, a
writer who lived A. D, 1158—1186.* Still it contains the substance
of Kachchayano, and Mr. Clough’s was accompanied with a large
vocabulary by the same author. Mr. Clough’s book is very accurate,
and its value is proven by a new edition of his Vocabulary, with in-
considerable alterations, being printed in Ceylon in 1865 with
all his English definitions, but without one word of credit to Mr.
Clough!
In 1863 there was published “An Introduction to Kachchaya-
no’s Grammar — by James D’Alvis.” This is an exhaustive work
on the subject, and is indispensible to every Pali scholar. It con-
tains also a literal translation of Kachchayano’s Book on verbs.
This work differs essentially from both of those named.
(1.) It takes the facts of Kachchayano’s grammar, and re-ar-
ranges them in the order of of European grammars, incorporating
such additions from the author’s Pali readings as seem apposite-
Kachchayano’s grammar is herein written like Asoka’s rock-cut
document:
M^>Arb°n J Al 81*81
Co ooScoo} »g8 8coogg^
asti fiva sa/nkitena asti majhamena asti vistatena
“By epitome, by amplitude, and by a middle course.”
(2.J The differences and resemblances between Pali and San-
skrit are indicated, which will be appieciated by an increasing
class of readers.
(8.) To make the work as easy as possible for students, the in-
troduction of new grammatical terms, which so often encumber
Sanskrit grammars, has been carefully avoided.
(4.) To make the book intelligible to European scholars, it is
printed in the Roman character throughout. ,
*Alwis, page xii.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Introduction. T *ii
(%.) To facilitate the study of thfe lakgnfcge in Burrtah,tato Pali
is* written also in the Burtnese alphabet.
In Burniah Pali is interwoven With the vernacular much more
than Latin is in English. In the Kyonngs a boy has to learn the
multiplication table in Pali, and his first reading lessons are half
Pali and half Burmese. Dr. J ndsou studiously avoided the use of
Pali words, unless absolutely necessary, yet were the Pali words
in the Burmese Bible printed in colored letters, every page would
be a piece of mosaic.
On opening the Bible at random, there were counted in the first
paragraph read, I Cor. 18: 1-8, nineteen Pah words in eight verses.
Borne of these are repetitions, but there are ten different words.
To exhibit this to the eye, the passage is here reprinted in English
with the words that are, whole or in part, Pali in the Burmese Bi-
ble printed in Antique:
“Though I speak with the tOUgUOS of men and of angels*
and have not charity, I am become as sounding brass, or a tink-
ling cymbal. And though I have the gift of prophecy, and un-
derstand all mysteries, and all kUOWiedgO: and though I have,
all faith, so that I could remove mountains, and have not Chari-
ty, I am nothing. And though I bestow all my gobds to feed the
pDor, and though I give my DOdy to be burned, and have not
charity, it profiteth me nothing. Charity suffereth long,
and is kind: Charity envieth not; Charity VaUnteth not it-
self, is not puffed Up, doth not behave itself unseemly: seeketh
not her own, is not easily provoked; thinketh no evil; rejoiceth
not in iniqnity but rejoiceth in the truth ; beareth all things, be-
lieveth all things, hopeth all things, endnreth all things. Chari-
ty never faileth; but whether there be prophecies, they shall
fail, whether there be tOUgU68, they shall Cease; whether there
be knowledge, it shall vanish away.”
To those then who ask Cui honi ? We reply: it is hoped that,
(1.) The work will be nsefol in the study af Burmese books.
A gentleman recently called on the author with a chapter of inextri-
cable difficulties in one of the books used in passing examination,
and nearly all arose from unexplained Pali words and phrases.
(2.) It will be useful in translating Burmese books. Burmese
books have been translated into English by competent Burmese
scholars, but which are inaccurate in the Pali extracts. See for
example page 165, and Gaudama’s sermon.
Digitized by v^,ooQle
viii
Introduction.
(3.) It will be useful in translating English books into Bur-
mese. The Barmans are jet to have a European literature, and
those who furnish it must know how to use the Burmese language
with its admixture of Pali accuratelj.
(4.) It will be useful to all who wish to know what the
founder of Buddhism actually taught. The religious books of
more than three hundred millions of people, a third of the human
race, written in a highly finished language, rivaling Latin and
Greek, cannot be a matter of indifference to us, and to under-
stand them, a Pali grammar is a necessity.
It can scarsely be said there is no Pali literature in the face
of the king of Burmah’s Pali Bible at Mandalay, written on both
sides of 729 marble slabs, containing, it is said, 131,220 lines,
and 15,090,300 letters. Moreover the king ofBurmah has only
about half the Betegat, as it exists in Ceylon, where it is estimated
to contain 29,368,000 letters, or about ten times as many as
are in the English Bible. And this is only a single book !
Nor is a knowledge of Sanscrit sufficient. Take a small spe-
cimen, for instance, from Asoka’s Pali inscriptions :
r/*A D8 U-JJjJL_L / c£ 8 "FA Dlr^F rf T 0
I
d r/lll d
“Sirs,
I desire instruments of the Law, how many soever there
may be, those who are mendicant priests and those who are men-
dicant priestesses.”
Wholly misunderstanding its purport, the most distinguished
Sanskrit scholar of his age rendered the clause:
“I desire them to be regarded as the precepts of the law
and that as many as there may be, male and female mendicants
may hear and observe them.”
And finally, a Burmese scholar of repute writes the Author:
“I feel extremely obliged to you for the portion of your invaluable
Pali grammar. Irrespectively of creed or persuasion, when
the woyk has been published, you will have no doubt conferred
a great boon upon all that would enter the arena with the
Puddhists.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
PALI GRAMMAR
CHAPTER I.
THE ALPHABET.
When Europeans first came to India, they noticed several
remarkable stone pillars, scattered in different parts of the coun-
try with inscriptions cut on them. In some instances, inscrip-
tions were found in three various characters. In the process of time,
the languages of two were discovered, but the most ancient
characters defied every attempt to decypher them.
Five centuries ago, a Mahometan sovereign assembled a num-
ber of learned Brahmins to decypher the inscription on the pil-
lar at Delhi, but their efforts were fruitless ; and a native histo-
rian wrote of it : * ‘Round it have been engraved literal characters
which the most intelligent of all religions have been unable to
explain.”*
Early ignorant European travellers reported the pillar at Del-
hi to have been erected by Alexander the Great, and the writing
on it to be Greek.*
From the days of Sir William Jones, the eyes of all anti-
quarians ip India had been directed to these inscriptions, but
they w r ere directed in vain. As late as 1833, one savan wrote
of the characters : 4 4 They may be of a numerical or astronomi-
cal character, as hidden to our knowledge, as are the Egyptian
hiero glyph ics, for the square, triangle, circle, and Mercury are
to be frequently met. ”
The first attempt to render any part of these inscriptions
was made by a Bombay scholar, who, in 1834, translated the
first thirteen letters :*
* Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, July, 1837 ; Supple-
ment 1864; October 1834 ; and March 1838.
1
Digitized by AjOOQle
2
Alphabet.
^iXUJLUJj^rb-JElriHlr
ti In the two ways (of wisdom and ivories ?) with all speed dv lap -
p roach the resplendent receptacle of the ever-m/ooing luminous radiance ”
In 1837, James Prinsep walked up to the inscriptions, and
read them off to a wondering w r orld, with as much apparent ease
as Daniel did Mene, mene, tekel, upharsin, to the bewildered
Babylonian monarch. Then we learned, that the first fifteen let*
ters, so sublimely rendered above, read ;
“Thus said King Devanampiya Piyadasi.”
Prinsep deciphered the alphabet as follows:
+ m i; d j, h o k ia 0
OO O O 00 C O SO <?i €}) £0 S? gJJOOOOOOQ
k kh g gh ng ch chh j jh ny { fh d dh n t th
> D 1 b t □ r/ 8 Jj I -J <b rb £ •
SO oo ooooooqcoo OO OO °
d dh n p ph b bh m y r l vs h an or am .
. H :• L > H
S5
a i u e o
Combined with consonants the vowels were found more ful-
ly developed, as:
+ + + + + + + +H-°
' n
OO OOD c8 c8 Oq Oq COO COOD OO
lea kd ki lei ku ku he ko kan
In his remarks on the alphabet, he says : “There is a primi-
tive simplicity in the form of every letter, which stamps it at
once as the original type whereon the more complicated structure
cf the Sanskrit has been founded. If carefully analyzed, each
member of the alphabet will be found to contain the elements of
the corresponding member, not only of the Deva-nagari, but of
the Canouj, the Pali, the Tibetan, the Hala Canara, and of all
the derivatives from the Sanskrit stock.”* And he says,
what has never been controverted, “ I consider it the primeval
alphabet of the Indian languages.”*
♦Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, June, 1837.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Origin of Alphabet.
ORIGIN OF THE PALI ALPHABET.
i
All the ancient alphabets west of the Indus have been satis-
factorily traced to the Phoenician, and all east of the Indus, as
shown by Prin3ep above, have been derived from the Pali.
The Phoenician characters were orginally hieroglyphics, and were
probably formed on an Egyptian basis. The origin of the
Pali is not so clear. Prinsep says, that all the consonant cha-
racters may be reduced to the following element s:
+ d ( / 1 b 8 J A (b
The question next arises, whence did these elements origi-
nate? If we turn to the Rosetta stone, we find every one of
these characters in the Enchorial, or Pemotic portion of the in-
scription.
There are twenty eight lines in the Enchorial character, and
a careful examination of a fac-simile has shown, that the Pali
characters are found in the different lines as noted below :
h in line 2, 24, 27.
d ch ... 4, 5, 28.
C t ... 1,2,4,9,11,14,15,27.
} 4 ... 5, 8, 14.
JL n ... 2, 3, 7, 8, 15, 26, 28.
U p ... 9, 21, 24, 29.
B m ... 11.
| r ... 1. and often.
4 « ... 2.
A) s ... 2.
Besides the above ten elementary characters, twelve others
are found on the stone :
*1 Jch in line 1, 9, 16, 25.
A 9 - 1. 21, 24.
ng ... 2, 25.
£ j ... 2,5,6,12,16,22.
F jh ... 13, 17, 20, 24, 25.
0 th ... 1, 2, 3, 5, 27.
A t ... 5, 10, 13, 18.
!> d ... 26.
(, pk ... 11, 24.
X V ••• 12, 14, 15, 16, 21.
J l ... 1, 3, 15, 16, 20, 25.
lr h ... 2, 8.
Digitized by LnOOQLe
4
Of Egyptian Origin .
The characters are not always erect on the stone, as in the
Pali alphabet, and they may have represented different soundsi
for when new alphabets are formed from old materials, a new
power is often given to an old character. The Pali 0 th furnishes
an example, for in the Talaing alphabet it is used for 6, and
when the Red Karen language was reduced to writing, it was
made to represent v ; as in Etruscan, a sound not found in Bur-
mese, Talaing, or the written Karen. There are points of re-
semblance between this alphabet and the Bactrian, but the forms
represent different sounds. Thus £ j, is read n ; and /\ g is read
j ; and rt, of the same alphabet, has almost the identical form of
Jet in a Pali inscription found in the Malayan Peninsula.*
So in a published alphabet of Hieroglyphic Inscriptions, se-
veral have the same, or nearly allied forms, as the Pali letters, 6ut
they often represent different powers, and occasionally have the
the same form in a different position. Thus:
Ji in the Hieroglyphics represents k r but in Pali d.
... ... n ... d.
cb ... ... Tc ... chh .
L; l is nearly identical with the Pali -J Z, and
X k is the same figure as he Pali + k but in a differ-
ent position.
It is impossible for two sets of characters, so nearly alike,
to have originated independently of each other, impossible because
there is no parallel in history. They must have had a common
origin, and since the Enchorial character is Egyptian, we are
shut up to the conclusion, that the Pali letters have had an
Egyptian origin.
The fact seems improbable, but it is not so improbable as
it at first appears. It is no more improbable that one portion of
the Pali speaking people should use an alphabet derived from
Egypt, than that another part should use one derived from Phoe-
nicia ; but the nineteenth century has disinterred an abundance
of monuments and coins, which prove that the inhabitants of
Bactria and the Cabul valley wrote Pali anterior to the Christian
era, in an alphabet formed on a Phoenician basis.
Under the name of “The cave character ,, , Dr. Wilson writes
of Asoka’s alphabet: “We now see clearly that the great trouble
taken with the adjustment of the cave character would have been
♦Compare Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, July 1848,
Plate IV ; with Journal Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. XX,Plate IV
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Simplicity of Alphabet. 5
Unnecessary, if we had noticed sufficiently early its correspondence
with the Phoenician and Greek alphabets, from a combination of
which it is manifestly derived.”
An Egyptian race is supposed to have had rule in Nineveh
at a period anterior to authentic history. Mr. Thomas, the dis-
tingu ished archaeologist, wrote of certain Assyrian inscriptions :
“These inscriptions afford at any rate monumental evidence of
the contact of an Egyptianized race, far beyond the confines of
the mother-country, with foreign nations, whose habitat lay, in
one case certainly, eastward. — We have now to note what were
the people who, as Sir Gardner Wilkinson says, ‘at a very re-
mote period’ occupied India in connection with the ancient inha-
bitants of the Nile valley.”
That Egypt was nut unknown to India, even in the days of A-
soka, we have indications fi om his inscriptions containing the name
of Ptolomy king of Egypt, and Magus, son-in-law of Ptolomy Soter.
A_l 8' £ d 8 A' d
cq^oDcoolo oo 1 o
Turamdyo elm Maya cha
SIMPLICITY OF THE PALI ALPHABET.
The Pali alphabet is perhaps the simplest of all known al-
phabets, ancient or modem. Professor Williams gives, in his
Grammar, “the elements of the Pevanagari character,” and writes
down forty. All the Pali characters are formed from
A straight line | r, A triangle ^ e,
A rectangle Q &, A circle 0 ^ >
A dot o which may be regarded as a small
circle ; or some parts of them, or some combination of their parts.
Thus we
have formed of right lines :
1 **
L u ~"L ^ + &
i;
ny
I s
□ f> > o A g
A
t
i 1 4
F jh Ti n 'J d hh
!>
d
JL n. And all the vowels when following consonants.
From the circle, great and small, there are made ;
O th
:• i
© th ( t 8 m
o a final n cr w.
8
j
1. a
Digitized by v^.ooQle
«
Perfection uj Alphabet.
A right line with a circle, or its parts, forms,
4 v <b cch d ch D dh )\ a
A perpendicular with a curve furnishf 3 ;
T w 0 P- JL y tb » lu gh
The same figure with the termination capped by a horizon-
tal line, or a curve, affords ; -J l \j h (3 ph
More than forty alphabets may be seen, placed for compa-
rison on a single sheet, all taken from ancient inscriptions ; and
*f the inventor of the Pali alphabet were acquainted with the
whole, he must have been a giant in intellect compared with his
foi 'ey predecessors, if they did precede him, to form, from such
a chaos of material, a system of such order and symmetry, as
the PaH alphabet developer
But the skill of the inventor is seen less in the forms adopt-
ed, than in the system that prevails throughout the alphabet*
The letters were manifestly formed with regard to the organs
that enunciated them. Hence the cerebals and dentals appear to
have been made to correspond with each other. Thus:
O Ah was the cerebal : © th, the dental
,1 d ... > d
ftj dh ... P dh
X ? ... 1 n
The nasal n, is varied from a common form thus :
The gutteral was £ ng The palatal ^ ny
The cerebal n The dental n
Prlnsep remarked ; “There is a remarkable analogy of form
in the semivowels r l y | -J JL# which tends to prove their hav-
ing been formed on a consistent principle. The h Lr is but the
l J reversed.”* He observes again, that the aspirates and the
smooth mutes have been mainly formed from .each other ; and it
is worthy of remark, that the aspirate, when formed from the
unaspirated letter, always take an addition, Thus :
J cli takes an additional half circle to form chh. So also
( t ... ... 0 th. And
p p takes a turn at its extremity to make (j ph. From
T I'll appears to have been made irregularly ^ gh .
* Journal of Asiatic Society of Benga 1 , June, 1857.
Digitized by v^-ooQle
Age of Alphabet .
7
The mode of denoting vowels, when following consonants, was
incomparably more simple and definite, than the mode adopted
in any of the westren alphabets. A consonant alone, had a short
g understood. To make a long d, a line was drawn to the right,
As: T* hhd £ (a
To mark e, the line was drawn to the left,
As: ‘A ge < fe
Both lines were used to denote o,
As: “t, gho X V°
A perpendicular line was drawn on the top of the letter to
make short and two for long i, As :
• j jj jj
O E P | ri (J) ri
U and ti were formed in a similar manner by lines drawn
at the bottom of the letter, as :
\j pu (j phu [] bu J,
in in
Occasionally w was made by drawing the line horizontally,
instead of perpendicularly ; and both modes may be sometimes
seen in the same line, as : ^ tv, }j du
AGE OF THE ALPHABET.
Nothing is known of the time when the alphabet was invent-
ed, but it is certain from all tradition that it was in use before the
days of Gaudama. On the other hand, it appears probable that
it was formed after letters were in use in Assyria, for the inventor
seems to have been acquainted with a square or rectangular al-
phabet that has been called the “Nimroud Enchorial’’, of which
Mr, Thomas published an inscription* ; for the general appear-
ance of the character is much more like Pali, than any other
anterior to Asoka’s edicts. The following specimens are identical :
Tolx+irin
But other forms show a decided affinity with the cuneiform cha-
racter, so the Pali alphabet must have originated after the form-
at ion of the cuneiform character, but not later than the sixth cen-
tury before the Christian era.
* Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, January, 1850.
Digitized by AjOOQle
8
Modem Alphabet
MODERN ALPHABET.
Like the Phoenician, the Pali letters seem to have been soon
subjected to change ; but the changes are few of them improve-
ments. Prinsep has given an instructive plate, showing the changes
that had been made in the character at different periods, from the
alphabet of Asoka* s edicts to the modern Sanskrit, and square Pa-
li of Burmah.*
The oldest form of the alphabet that has been found on th8
eastern side of the Bay of Bengal, is in an inscription on a rock
at the mouth of the river at Singapore, but it is so illegible that
nothing can be made out of it beyond a few letters, and that the
letters are not more modern, than the forms in use in the second
century of the Christian era.
The oldest legible inscriptions were found by Col. Low : one
pi the northern part of Province Wellesley, and the other south of
this, east of Penang, f Prinsep wrote : J “The style of the letter is
nearly that of the Allahabad No. 2.” It seems to be of the
same age as that of the Amravati inscription^ Both are charac-
terized by a small curve over the letter, which appears to have been
soon changed into a straight line, as in the Allahabad No. 2.
Thi s may be regarded as the character in which the Buddhist
literature was introduced to the Eastren ooast ; and is the origin
of the present Burmese and Talaing alphabets. It was in use, ac-
cording to Prinsep, in the fifth century, anterior to a new form
wh ich prevailed in the seventh century ; and which was carried
with Buddhism into Tibet.
Buddhaghosa, according to Burmese authorities, brought the Pa-
li books to Pegu in the fifth century, at the time this alphabet was
used in India, and having been found actually engraven on rocks
near the borders of southern Burmah ; the evidence harmonizes.
The forms of the Burman and Talaing characters afford further
testimony to the fact, for they are more easily traced to the alpha-
bet of that age than to any other. At the time the Amra-
vati inscription was made, the short i, when following a consonant,
had been changed from a straight line to a circle ; and the long i
♦Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, March 1838, Plate XIII
flbid, July 1848 plate IV; and Yol. IV, plate III. Jlbid, July 1843
§Ibid, March 1837, plateXI.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Burmese Alphabet. 9
Ww ^3 designated by a circle with a dot in it; loth of which have been
retained in the Burmese and Talaing to the present d iv, while they
ceased to be used in the Sanskrit before the seventh century. In
like manner, the e, the d, and the o, were changed to curves
down the side of of the letter; the way they are now written in
the alphabets on the Eastern coast.
In the modem Sanskrit, an oblique straight line is drawn un-
der a consonant, to indicate that the inherent vowel is destroyed 1 ,
and the consonant is final. At the time the Amravati inecriptio 33
was made, the same thing was denoted by a slightly curved stroke
above the letter, turning to the right ; and this is precisely the pro.
sent Brvneso mode of that'nj, or killing, the vowel of a fi-
nal consonant. So also the symbols representing r and r whoa
combined with a preceding consonant, were nearly the came in
Amravati that they are now in Borman.
In the Amravati, the long arms of several of the letters were
cut off so as to bring them very near the corresponding Burmese
character. Thus :
k became w |j became \j (5 became <9 Jj become ^ £ became $
VO O O OO O
Several other Burman letters are merely the^rounded or other,
wise slightly varied forms of Asoka’s characters, as:
. A g C ng <b chh £ j & dh }> d \) dh b \ r foe
O C 30 (h Z) 3 © O G[ CO
It may be affirmed then without fear of contradiction, that theie
is no modern alphabet which approaches the old Pali character so
nearly as the Burmese, and that there is therefore no character in
which Pali is now written, so well entitled to be called the Pali
character, as the square Pali of Barmah.
The age of the Amravati i ascription has not been ascertained,
but the letters bear a strong, resemblance to the character on cop-
per plate grants dated at the close of A. D. 400* Prof. Dowson
on these grants,* and Mr. Thomas on the coins of Krauander,+
have both shown that different forms of writing existed contempo-
raneously, but since this date synchronizes nearly with the date of
the introfuctfcn of Budhism into Burmah, they co nfiim eseh other
# Jcur. Royal Asiatic Society: N. S. Vol. I. page 247. jllid 44*7
2
k
Digitized by v^.ooQle
w
Tull and IfajaJAa.
THE PALI LANGUAGE.
Ac:ofd’n * t3 sms of the Pali books, the Magadha langtaige i*
tbs language spoke a by ths pe >ple of Magadha, the Sakata* by the
people of Saketvf*, or Ouda, defined by native interpreters ft3 San-
skrit, while Pali is not the language of any tribe of men but th e
language of the Buddhas.
As the last Buddha wa3 a native of Mrgadho, Pali and Maga-
dha are usually regarded as the same language, and it is offce^ ^cal-
led Pali-3Iagadha; J but some of the books make a very marked dis-
tinction, representing Pali as the original language of tho Grods, or
Buddhas, and Magadha as the original language of men.
In one b.ook||* Gaudama goes back to the orig*n of the universe
before the first Buddha had appeared, and he represents the crea-
tor as a female, who, after she had created animals, and appointed
them their several abodes, gave them namei. Nina of those
names are given, which are all Pali, and it is a ided that this lan-
guage, without giving it any name, was the first language spoken*
and when Buddhas subsequently appeared, they every one in suc-
cession preaehed in it.
After animals were created, this divine personage, or Goddess
created throe human beings, a male, a female, and a neuter. Tho .
neuter was neglected, and it killed its brother , the male, through
■envy; but three children were left behind, and to these three were
bora seven sons and six daughters. The parents brought different
animals to their children to play with, and the several words that
the children uttered on beholding them, became the names of those
animals, and they are, Gaudama sajs, in the present Magadha lan-
guage, the words in common use to designate those animals . The
fbllowing are specimens:
Pali.
Magadha.
Pali
Magadhf
i.
Basa
Mo
a hare. Asia
BangA
a horse *
0000
COO
« 000
00 ci
Supava
Ban
a monkey Buna
Bach
a dog
oqoo
oo$
oq<r»
000
Kuku
Bo
a fowl, Byakkho
Yi
a tiger.
ccp
qjQOgO
c8
*3Q»0{£
*00200 s£ +olc 8 ooo
I!<£Co^c8
Digitized by v^.ooQle
n
Perk alien cf Pali .
In harmony with the above representation, Jlna-vazhana, “the
language of the Jin.” cr Ettldha, ia eveiy v*he e found in the Pa-
li texts, for what is denominated by the interpreters Pali . Pali
Is never loutid in the old texts, bat is Used like a vernacular word
to define Jina-vachana, whenever it occurs in the texts.
DEPvIVATION OF THE WORD PALL
The derivation and signification of the word PaH has been a
matter of no little controversy, since it wtu first brought to Eu*
rope by Laloubre, who was Envoy to Siam for Loui3 XIV. in
1687 and 163*.*
A class of writers, following the sound, have referred the word*
tj Pelasa, an ancient Sanskrit name of Behar or Mftgadha, to
Falli a village, to Pali a tower or fort, to Palestine, to the Pala-
tine lulls, end to Pehlve. The best modern Pali scholars reject
all these derivations, but they differ among themselves ft 3 to the
true one.
Tumour defined Pall by “Original text, regularity.” Alvvis
controveits this statement, and says: “Nor does it mean root or
original. — T3.e word Pali o igina’ly signified aline, row, range.”
The two definitions are not incompatible' with each other. Both
may be true. ,
Tumour wes undoubtedly well aware that the etymology of the
word was line ; but etymology doc3 not always give the significa-
tion of a word, or the meaning of tragedy would be “a song of a
goat” ; that i3 determined by the usage.
Judson in his Burmese Dictionary, defines pdf f, Pali pdfhal %
“An 03 iginal text or reading” ; and the translator of a Pali book
said to be Baddhaghosa, defines pdf ha by Pali. When a word is
repeated in the Pali text, he says: “It is ia the pd{hz or Pali”. Al^.
though the word is undoubtedly Pali in modern usage, yet it would
not be Pali in the uiage of the writer, unless it were found in the
pdf ha, or original text. Tumour then is well sustained in hi?
fcition by Buddhaghosa, and Dr. Judson.
Pali, in its present usage, appears to havo originated with
the Buddhist interpreters, after the original writings were t. rankly?-.
e;l into the vernaculars; and was made to donate the origin »1 mad.
*rieT^ : ESSAI bUIt LE PALI, par E? Dorn- mi f et— Page ft
hT>§ ' tolg
Digitized by v^.ooQle
12
A tfeiv Definition .
just as cxoge ileal writer* in English, me “ Origin*?' and Origin'll
Language in their notes, when referring to the Greek and Hebrew*
Scriptures. A somewhat parallel case is found in the word Pee Id to
which etymologically signifies simple, but which is constantly used
i n the signification of the Syriac language.
It may be otyocted to the modern origin of this usage of Pali
that tho word is found in As oka’s inscriptions. Alwis writes: ‘TIe-
VAN CHA HE VAN CUA ME PAUTO VADETHA. “Thus, tliU3, shall
ye cause to be read my Paliyo or edicts.”*
This however is not the reading of Ascka’s inscription, but
the reading of Spiegel’s Sanskrit transcript .f There is no me or
my in the text, no long d after tho p, or r, the vowel after d is not
c but d, and it is altogether uncertain about the character -J be-
ing l. It may be r. The tentence is from the inscription a-
round the shaft ofFeroz’s Lat and, reads:
“b- l d "b- A d U -0 £ A > 0
Sevan cha he: an cha pariyovaddtha*
And thus, and thus, instruct [ to ] the end.
Pariya, in Pali, signifies the end or teiminaticn.
T r oda, is the verb to speak, here in the third person plural, but
with the preposition ava. changed to o in composition, it signifies
to teach. The two written in full, would be pariya ovaddtJui \ , but
by the rule3 of Permutation the initial vowel of the second word is
combined w ith the last of the first word, and the whole is written:
pari yovaddtha. §
The rendering given above is substantially the same as that
first given by Prime p: “In such wise do ye address on all sides the
people united in religion.”||
It remains to be noted, what seems to have escaped the atten-
tion of previous waiters, that the native lexicographers trace the
etymology of the Word Pali back of the derivative noun pdli ‘a
3 ine\ to the verbal root pa ‘to preserve, take care of 5 , and say that
this is the signification of the word Pali , and is applied to the Pali
♦Ahvis’ Pali Grammar page IV.
* + ^ w % infos!
L her de cfhciis Sacerdotum Buddhicorum, page V.
c ^oO^osloo 'O^QOODOSloO.
[ Icmiim:)} of Asiatic -Society of Bengal, July, 1837.
Digitized by v^-ooQle
PaV-Sansirih
13
language, because in it are preserve! the discv.ir.;63 of the Bud-
dhas. They write :
Atthan pdti rdkkhuti iti tasm.i pal'.
93Q5<51cBc\ogcB c^cBooc^cdg
«*TIi 3 signification, it gurd* preserves, so on this account Pali.”
EXTENSION OF THE PALI LANGUAGE.
At present Pali is a dead language fjunl only in Bud Jliist books
Jn Ceylon, Farther India, and China ; but inscriptions in dialects
of Pa-i, dating back to the third century before the Christian era
h ive been found in Orissa, Bshar, Allahabad, Delhi, the Punjab,
Guzerat, and Afghanistan ; and the kings of Bactria used it on one
aide of their coins, while they inscribed Greek on the other.
In north-western India the language was written contempora-
neously in two widely different alphabets, cne Aryan and the other
Shemitic. Ike coins of Kran&nda, who reigned in Palibrotfca, at
the time, it 1*3 supposed, that Alexander came to India, are found
in great numbers w ith Indian Pali on one side, and Shcmitic Pali
on the other in a character nearly allied to the Phoenician found cn
bricks from Nineveh. Thus it is certain that some two thousand
years ago, Pali w as used from Calcutta to Cabul, written side by
side now with Greek, and anon with Phoenician.
The inference has hence been drawn, that Pali was once the
vernacular dialect of all northern India, from the B ay of Bengal to
the Gulph of Cutch; and from Cuttack to Cabul. But this is
quite incredible, for that wide region, from the earliest histori c
times, has beeu inhabited by many different tribes, speaking widely
different dialects.
We must resort to some other hypothesis to account for the
extensive use of Pali in official documents intended to be read by
the people. Fcr the lack of more trustworthy materials, we nlay
take, as having a probable foundation in truth, a myth related in
the Biddhist^ books. Gaudama found the truth of the adage, that
a prophet has no honor in his own country. Whon h^* first preach*
ei to b:s relatives in their vernacular language, th-jy derided him,
and said the preceding Buddhas had always preached in Pali,
while he could speak to them only in the vulgar tongue; f.om which
tht^y drew the inference that h€ was no Budcha.
Digitized by AjOOQle
14
Pirel pull Qr.im:friA
“Then Gaudama thought again, and sa d ‘Taking attha samaJcild
paldrand* the lcarred Sanskrit lo. k or writlugs, to ta'.e them
of no account, I nv ill touch iu the lang. age of antiqui.y, ll at is to
lay in attha pall sansalcita pakarand^ \ he langur ge of the learned
Pali-Sanskrit botkf — Tims hiving determined, he {.reached ia the
language of the Sanskrit be ok or b^cks, t\wsakita pcikdraud. But
those who heard fhund it very difficult to understand.”
According- to this tradition, Pali-Sanskrit wss an old, or dead
language, in Use d cya of ama ; and if Guild, ma used a lan*
guage imperfectly understood by the people, bat popular with the
mnhicu Ic because a lcamed kegirnge, why may net Asika hate
done the same tLing? The difference between the language cf the
Inscriptions and that of the Pali book 3 mav he car cessions to the
dialects then spoken in different localities, while the Learned Pali
Sansakita was substantially retained. The u c of the monkish
Latin in the Middle A go 3 is something parallel.
THE FIRST PALI GRAMMAR.
The difficulty that Gaudam&’s hearers found in understanding
the Pdli-Sansakiia in which he preaehed, is represented as tlio
occasion of the formation of the first Pali Grammar. When tho
people complained of not understanding the signification of Gau*
dama’s discourses, Kachchayano one of his favoiite disciples, alter
meditating on the subject, came before his associates with the p: o*
position, that subsequently became the first Aphorism of his Gram*
mar:
Attho akkhard sanyato .
SDC^O3OOgqOOi0OCCOD
“The signification is known by letters.”
Gaudama finally appointed him the Pali Grammarian, earing
to th£ assembly :
“Priests, from among my clerical disciples, who nr-? able *o
amplify in detail that which is spoken in opitom?, th? m ^ emi-
nent is the Great Kachchayano.”
*«»ggoooocBooooo^ctoo
t‘»^'jlc835oo~Boo , jr/DDr or/:.
Digitized by
Google
15
Kmiib:r of letters.
NU3IBER OF LETTERS
§ 1. After sa/ing that the signification is known by letters,
Kochchxyano proceeds to state that the number of the letters is
forty one ; thirty three c:nsonants au;l eight vo xels, which ho
gives as below:
ooo o to c o so g> qj £0 q g q e> coo co 00
m *r ^ vr w 5f u s w w w
k kh g gh ng ch chh j jh rty ( fh d dh n t th
3 O O OOCDOCX)C|COO OOOO g '
^ q W tf tff * H U H x ^ *T X
d dh n p ph b bh m y r l vs h l an
® d e ’§ c ©
x i Si V %T
adit u u e o
§ 2. There are no dipththongs in Pali, and no representatives
of the Smskrit letters:
ai au ri rl Ifi Iri q sh
§ 5. The Bjetrian Pali with the Phoenician alphabet, has three
slbilents, as in Sanskrit ; an 1 they havo representatives in the Bur-
mese Square Alphabet, but they are modern additions, and have
no place in the bocks.
§ 4. On the other hand, there is an additional l in Pali not
found in common Sanskrit writings ; nor met in Asoka’s inscrip-
tions. It appears to correspond to the Vedic l which Benfey says
£3 U3©I for 4 some Vedic works. In some instances, the Pali
i corresponds to d in Sanskrit; as in the numeral solasa* ‘sixteen*,
which in Sanskrit is shoda$in f. This is confirmed by the form cf
the letter, nearly that of a reversed d. A distinguished Sanskrit
Scholar writes : “About the letter l in Sanskrit, strictly speaking
there is only one ; but in Bengalee, and to some extent in Hin-
dee, the palatal 4 i* frequently pronounced somew hat like l
Digitized by AjOOQle
16
Itiferp.
oscillatin'* hct.veoii that anl r.” This is probibl/ the sound re *
pi erected Ty the eecond l in Pali.
§ 5. Clough gives a character, a substrate for r, equivalent to a
ficttl r, ‘p’a^cd on the top ofaemsonant bat pronounce 1 before it’.*
No such character and no such compounds exist in Burmese Pali.
It corresponds to the Sanskrit * and appears to have been intro-
duced from the Sinskrit into Sinhalese Pali, since the Pill boobs
were brought to Burmih in the fi Ih. century. According to
Mcggallayana's Grammar, which Clough translated, f was rv at ten
in the twelfth centuty, seven hundred yea?3 after the Pvi To k *
had been brought to Burmah .
§ 6. The following Sanskrit finals are not fotiid n T>v
^ W TT W 2 n XT 2# 2 7f
vg n n m Je f t p rh rt 1 *c
§ 7. In Pa i no wcid erds in ary final consou? nr c-a:
nasal symbol called niggahttan, and in S mk'-’t *v\;:.
§ 8. The aspirate h, and the semi- vowels //, r } ar.d r. } 'vb.. v.
nited with a preceding consonant, are written by a symb:I.
Kan ho ,1 black. Anyo,§ another.
Prichchhd, J scorpio. • Twarpft thou.
The symbol for h , on the Inscriptions, turns to the right, while
in bocks it turns to the left; as:
Samdjahmi , # * u in an assembly.’!
§ 9. Consonants when compounded with other consonants, vi-
sually retain their normal forms, but d preceded by n, is written
in a peculiar manner under the n ; as dandi, ++ a pilgrim.
5 10. The double s is denoted by a peculiar character, as :
tassa { J to him. The same character, in modern Pali, is made to
represent the Sanskrit sh, g, and shy. In the Asoka Inscription 3
this character is supplied by the sing’e *, and since it is not noti-
ced by Kachchayano, it i3 probable that the character was un-
known in books when his Grammar was written.
♦Clough's Pali Grammar, page 4.
tAlwis’s Pali Grammar, page. Xlfl.
tosicjyo '@gj> ft s<$
Digitized by LnOOQLe
Prcm unciation .
DIVISION OF LETTERS.
17
The first twenty five consonants are divided into five classes
according to th3 organs with which they are pronounced, and the
othor eight, including the anuswara, are unclassified. Three vo-
wels are short and five long, Kachchayano adds : Sakata gavdhssu
*Tn the books of Oade, or in the Sanskrit books, the conso-
nants are divided into surds and sonants, and that divisiou may
b8 appropriately adopted in this.* The two first letters of each class,
with the sibilant s y are surds, while all the. rest arc sonants.
§ II. The following table exhibits ;bese -severe 1 divisions at
one view.
Surda. Sonauta. Surds. Sonants.
Gutturals:
1c
kk
9
3 h
ng
.CO
S)
o
£Q
c
Palatals :
ch
chh
j
jh
mj
©
£G
o>
22.
Cerebals:
t
th
4
dk
n
%
s
9
£>
coo
Dentals:
t
tk
d
dh
n
00
03
3
Q
?
Labials:
P
ph
b
bh
771
9
o
C3
00
o
Unclassified: y t l v 8 h l on OD O 03 OO
Short vowels: a i u
Dong „ d i u e o
PRONUNCIATION.
“The ancient pronunciation of the Greek' can now only ho
inferred, and, in part, with great uncertainty. The pronunciation
of modam echokrs is exceedingly various. Of the different methods
that prevail, the English is probably the farthest removed from the
ancient pronunciation," With the alteration of one. word, those
remarks are true o f the Pali.-The Burmese is probably the forth-
est from tha ancient pro nunciation/
93 . ^ e
8 c g
aiooqocgoq
3
Digitized by v^.ooQle
18
Ce r rials and Dentals.
§ 12. In Bormab the Pali ^ s t is pronounce 1 lik e th in thd
The q y is always pronoanced u\ It was probably pron ounced
w originally, when the last member of a compound c msonant, tut
v in other circumstances. All the cerebals or linguals are pro-
nounced like the dentals ; and the aspirate sonants, or flat mutes
are not cfistingtnshed in sound from their corr:spcn'!ing uir-spirat-
ed letters; and are often used interehangably in writing. The an-
uswara is pronounced n, and the vowel o, an.
8 13. The cerebals and dentals appear to have been used inter—
chaflgably in writing from the earliest period, and could not have
differed much in pronunciation. In tho inscriptions the sam°
word in the same line is occasionly written both ways ; as: ^ rb °
dasan, and f> ^ ° dasan t©H. The same diversity in writing
this numeral ia found in the Pali books.
S 14
and
Bo
natfki.
g (h is interchanged with qq th ; as
not.
8 13. So again ^ n and n are interchanged, as in the
name of the Grammarian, which is written both (VDgCJOC^O
Kv&hayaxc, and OCCW3 Kachckayano.
8 16. The cerebal l is very uncertain in its usage. In many
words where it isi s d in Burma h, the con mon l is found in Cey-
lon. Numerous examples are met in Clough’s Grammar. Thus
ol§
C§D
A similar diversity of usage prevails in the Burmese Pali. Oc-
casionally the same word, has one in the text, and the other in
the commentary.
§ 17. Nothing can be inferred to determin dialects from the
usage of cerebals and dentals. Prinsep says;* ‘The word prati y
a prefix in Sanskrit — In the Pali of Qimwr this is merely altered
j •
to paH U A ^7 ommission of the r. In the language of the pil-
p&i & line, is pdi t,
eU cardamom , dd y
with the small, l in Ceylon.
f
lars the same preposition is always written pafi (j ( with the cere-
bal t • The orthography varies in the written Pali of books, being
in Ceylonese j pafi, in Burmese pati /
♦Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, March, 1838.
Digitized by
Google
&urds dnl S<manb\
19
§ 18. Thi* distinction is based on imperfect c Lte. C!ouph
apelh the word which show3 that b:>th modes exist in Ceylon,
and th>i two fjrnii are common in B it n nh ; as :
O^OODOCp oqcgDocB
Pafi kdro doorkeeper. Padua rnd pati tUStO&d Of & Illy#
§ 19 The sards and sonanls are of:en interchanged with each
other; as:
8
©
CM
O
OOJOX'OOD OUODOCJOD
k with g
kahdpand
gahdprtnd , mOH©y.
§ «. o
o>
8 >$ OOj>
eh
i
jirui vacha.ia
jhVwz vajana, words Of jina
§ 22.
o
$?spoo
t .
.. c ih
mruta •
nirodha hindering.
§ 23 . Qo
o
ox>8
coS
th ..
. dh
pilhxoi
pai'noi, tli 3 earih.
s « 8
o
8*^030
000030
i* -
.. dh
(b.ipstwd
dhapowtd, having placad-
§ 25 . 0
o
ojcoocB
P
. b mahd pati
^©c8
Mra bail
groat Lord.
Lord of men
§ 25 0
00
® 3 l?
oocoq$
ph ...
bh
phajgane
ihjivjuni , a lunar mansion.
§ 27 . 0
o
8d8
800
b ...
v
bi<si
visa, twenty.
The ch\iig03 of surd i and 30 -na 4 ^ was undoubtedly the result
of pronunciation, similar changes occurring in other languages,
and the variation in spelling arij33 lrozn the words sometimes re-
taining their normal forms, and sometimes being written as they
wore pronounced.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
£•)
Tfwti vtf ITi-jif#
^ 23. A double tt appe irs to have been pronounce I sometime
like it | si) i tr.ittcL and tsitrct tllOrO- In
the In 9 L*:iptio:i 3 it is written by a a* nfe /, as : J, \ W]l3r3*
,b A iL A y^, wlnrovor, Hj A A **»*&*» evory
wliara.
§ 23. Thr symbol o: y often iudlc vtes an origin! fo.*m wit; a
do ible letter ; a.?:
siYci aril si’jyx a r 37-lI IM33. sx’li nl u!/i. ai 1^3.7.
co^qj cx >£0 oooqj
coio
OO
§ 33 ¥ o:n a d iT ; ren »e in prmn letitio 1 h , <i t, aril i arefoiol
0’;Hi.>i»lly in ,erch vigi l ; a 3. co'^> coq iha, idhci f
uni i.U. 113^3;
^ 00303
aaiba a id 60, tx, goad.
§ ->l. Y a;-»pexri to hv /3 bj3i pr'jiviul / o icatba '.l’.y, fo.*
the.* 3 kr-ers a-i fora l iatircluapUin th> sum w>rd; as:
06 7005 OD^SO gioxp, a*i >jMxjo, t>X6 gi7^.
§ 32. L a:id r also piss into each other;
OJODOOD^Sp
rnihi 8 j , y 2 an I milix 3 xrx y
a3: 000000 rc^p
grait waaltli.
§ 33. O.i so ne of the In3criptioa8 the aipirate & is inserted be-
£»«*.» a tbw, wo 'd* be 'in ua j w t'\ vo.nh, 4 \Wch,” Prianp 9173 ,
**a* far a* I kaosv, his no parallel i.i an/ of the Grwn natical Prak-
its.” The same usuge however is occasionally, though not otten,
fotinJ in thi Pali. Instances ocrur in the Pitaka. Thus in the
Katha, the fifth book of the Abhidhainma:
COOO^OOOOOQ^OO for CO^aOO0OOg
h'L\in nx ho van vxttabbi ... evxn nx evow vxtLibbz y
‘‘This [or] nit this tiny are net to be sill/’
. — - —
Digitized by AjOOQle
CHAPTER II
PE R AI UT AT; ON.
In G. eek, a votvlI if bl.oit st the erid of a wcr d, is rondures
d.cpj cd when followed by another word beginning with a vcwel ;
and if long, the twm vo»ve!s are occasionally contracted inlo one.
A final n before a cla silled letter is usually changed to a letter cf
that class, and the classifiel letters themselves are subject to cer-
tain changes when united to others. In Pali, when two
Avoids meet similar changes occur, but much more extensively
then in Greek ; and this part of the Grammar Sanskrit gram-
marians denominate “Combination and Permutation”; but it em-
braces only the s tine things that. in Greek Grammars have been
previously named Contraction, Crasis, Elision and Eu-
phonic changes of consonants.
WHEN TWO VOWELS MEET.
§ 34. When one word ends in a vowel, and the next one be-
• {ins with a vcwel,. ore vowel is usually substituted for the tv?<>
nnd attached to the first word.
a followed by a.
§ 35. When a ct the end of one word is followed by a at the
beginning of the next,
( a. ) One is elided ;as:
Trom ^ and 9£)g^ atthi % “is not”
In the jUhauli inscription this compound is written wi& the short
vowel, 1G J nathi as in book Pali.
( b. ) The two short vowels are sometimes changed to lo/Ug a ;
l 8 :
00;^D38<^c8 OcQ 99c8s\cB
tatra oirati from tatra and abirati , “great pleasure there.”
This is the rule in Sanskrit, and in the Girnar and other inscrip-
tions, w’here tl(fc verb takes the Sanskrit form, the Sanskrit rule of
Permutation is followed, and the long vowel is written; a3:
± £ wrf^r nash\ “is not:’*
Digitized by AjOOQle
22
F<rn".{\: /5-x* .4.
a aod a followed by d.
§ 36. When a or a is followed by d, * they bcecxnc d\ sfc:
Cp<?»OcS Cp(?^ OZc3 ra/atfi from raja and ok, M tLou art akhg:*'
OOODpcSc^O OODD^O ttDcS^O
vaghdndlinto liom vayhd/ui and dim to 9 %% & porch, & terrace.**
a fobofrod b / i.
§ 37. When a is followed by j,
(a.) The n is elide 1; as:
ccooc8c§ COOOOO
sotindre from sota and tWra, 44 orgja of hairing.”
( 6. ) The two vowels are changed to long d : i»s:
OC'gCo8|»COOCO'loS OCgD O 8^00 O J^cB
dhammo cha vinayo chdti from dhamvio, cha 9 vii.uya, cha 9 u. ;
4t Both the law and the discipline: Thus” [ he said }
( c. ) The two vowels coalesce into e ; as:
O^pOOOO O$|C00 g^O
bandhuss&va for bandhussa and iva 9 4< as to a relative. ”
This last cose is the rule in Sanskrit, but it is the exception
, in Pali.
d followed by t.
§ 38. When d long is fbllowed by t f the two vowels are chan-
saddkidha viilan jpnrisassa set an
oogl 8gg <£%oooo coog* from saMM *®° vitta *
punsassa set an, “Here [i. e. iu this world] right religious affec-
tions [ or faith ] is the best property of man.”
The Sanskrit rules requ re the combined vowd in this ca3e
to be 8.
a followed by u.
§ 39. When a is followed by
( a ) The a is elided; as:
c8o^3COD c 800 g£OOD
*‘*At the end ot a word** and “at the be^inn:-ng of another,” are
be uudersijod in this and the folio vvinj paragraph n as in §35.
ged to long % ; a3:
od|o 8^^6| ooocos-oog*
Digitized by v^-ooQle
23
Termutailons of 1.
iituclold for sita and vdakd, “white wa tera.”
( b. ) The two vowels coale *ce into long u ; as:
SC^olcqcPipjDGQ 3T^1(51 cC^c8 o goooo
andjdrehich ubayon from a r /utgdrehi 9 cha % 'ulayan
“And with anchorites, with both/’
( c. ) Tho two vowel* are changed to o ; as:
ooSjr^Dccxfi coSj ^ gcocB
sanylchyannojpeti from sznykhyan ua uy>eti t
“Enters not into t^e uumber. ”
This is an exceptionable case in Pali, but it is tho rule in
Sanskrit.
d followed by u.
§ 40. When a Jong d is followed by u 9 the d remains, and thd
u is changed to the semi-rowel v ; as:
mavacha from md and uchd % “Sr.y hot/*
a or a followed by e or o
§ 41. When d or a i.i follo wed by e or o, it is elided; as:
o5«6oocooooc|co o5e5 oocoo (§^o5
sanghan lassorasiw for sengkan tassa orasan* 9
“His own son, the church/*
oocoocBco COCOD CcBod
tathetitan talhd ctitan
“Besides teaching.”
ODCOC SCOiCQolcBoo) OOC0O9X) fo^’ColcBooD
sansedajo papdtikd from sansedajd and upapdtikd,
“Produced by filth, produced by a visible body/*
i followed by t.
§ 42. When t is followed by i f
( a. ) One i is elided; as:
csc£cB csc8
dehiti for dehi and iti, ‘‘Give! Thus” [ he said. ]
(6.) The two coalesce into long t; as:
CXJOD31$SO0Od8c 8 WOOD sl§ 9*0008 g>c8
ma hdddiiandassdmiti from mahd, ddnem, datsdmi, iti.
“I will give the great gift: Thus” [he said.}
cocci CO gel
Digitized by v^.ooQle
24
Pm n 9 3.i T ons »>f T.
This is the rule in Sanskrit, and is followed in the Tnecrip'ions
W^ + C+iAA f~» = : F X ’ 3 ^
*
tukafan kachhatiti . . . snkatan . rfachrhhati iti
“lie attains merit: Thus’* [ he taid. ]*
? followed by a.
§ 43. When i is followel ly a,
( a. ) The i is el ded; as:
ooqo. # ^«jo ogc\e>" $018 tooo
dhunmarajannarndmahan from dhammarajan , namdmi % aJuin;
“I wo: ship the king of the law.”
( b. ) The a is elidt d; a*
OSlSoD OSlQ g^CD ladamilan from raddmi aJian } “Isay.”
( c. ) The i is changed to the pemi-von el y ; as:
o^oo§o^0[oq[coo ^ooogoq o[g§ xooo
pafisandhdraxutyassa from pa[i$andkdra y vuttij assa;
“Ils accurate comment.”
(d . ) The i is cl anged to the semi-vowel y, to which the a
lengthened into d is attached; as:
anlariyydnxjdntaran from aniunyydni and an tar an,
“An. upper garment, clothing.”
The Sanskrit rule requires y in every case.
i followed by rf, or e.
§ 44. When i is followed by d, or e ,
(a.) The i is elided; as:
cBoOOOODCG^uB c8<j 8 TOOOODCqc8
tihakdrehi from tihi, and aldrekv,
“By three tokens.”
c^ozuoco c^ooB COO
nohztai 1 from nohi and etaw^ “Not proper, this.”
(b.) The i is changed to the semi-vowel y, as:
cocXJ }9 co<£ ityddi from iti ddi y “So beginning.”
* Journal of Asiatic Society of Berg&l, July, 1837; where the
passage is rendered: “Shall attain eternal happiness, (or thall be
united with Slgato. )”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
25
Permutations of TT.
CooocsjpooScoo GOO o$ COO o8coo
skapadyelwpad ike from eka, pati , eka, padikc,
“A foot-path, in a foot-path.”
Caso ( 6. ) is the rule in Sanskrit.
i or i followed by u. j
§ 45 When i short, or i long is followed by u 9
(a.) The i or i is elided; as:
coo 8000^00 oo 000 8ooc8 goo 06
tdvisatusabcvn from td, visati , and usahan\
“Twenty tabs [make] a usabah.”
• kosampujjenvyo from ko&i, njjeniyo: “Knouj, Ujjein.”
(h,) lb ei is changed to the semi- vowel y\ as:
GtCO^Oj [s8 <?>C0^8 gs8
j alanidhyudadki from jalaividhi udadlii , “Sea, ocean/’
This is the rule in Sanskrit.
u followed by u.
§ 46. When u i3 followed by v, one u is elided; as:
^cooqc8<^ Cjjco oq gc8<^
mulan tusiran from mulan tu usiran, “A root, khus-khus grass.”
u followed by a.
§ 47. When u ia followed by a,
(a.) The a is elided; as:
cco3rocoooq8ciDoc8 CCOOOO CODOq SoScBXxB
hkahetukhkmmati from loka hetu akhinamati ,
“The cause of the world, possessed of imperishable wisdom.”
( 6 ) The two vow T els coalesce into the semi- vowel v; as;
QOCQ^xo ooa\
dhdtwantassa from dhatu antassa, <c To the end of a root.”
In Sanskrit the combined vowels become v or a.
u followed by d.
§ 48. when u is followed by d ,
(a) The u is elided: as:
ongloooo^ oo£( xoosoop
ehakk hdya tanan from cluxkkhu dycLtanoin “Abode of sight, or eye.”
4
Digitized by LnOOQle
26 Permutations of E.
( l ) The u is changed to the semi- vowel v , and the u U ap-
pended to it; as:
ogDoa 5 oq sdooco
swdgatan from su agatan , “’Well coming.”
Both cases, (a. ) and ( b .), accord with Sanskrit usage,
u followed by t.
§ 49. When u is followed by
( a. ) The i is elided, and the u remain: unchanged; as:
co gL S^§
chakkkundre from chakkhu mare , “The faculty of eight, or eye.”
( b . ) The i is elided, and the u lengthened into u ; as:
ooo^cB ooo<^ go<£
sddhuti from sadhu iti , “Good! [he said.]”
Both (a.) and (b. ) differ from the Sanskrit mlcs, which re- ,
quire the semi-vowel v.
u followed by e.
§ 50. When u is followed by e, it is changed to the semi-
vowel v and the e remains; as:
ocg^gg8c8o5 og§L egg 8c8co
vattwettha vihitem from vattu etiiia zihitan
“Landed possessions are adjudged in this place.”
e followed by e.
§ 51. When e is followed by e, one e is elided; as*.
C^ggfOOOOo C| Cgg ^DOOOO
netthandgatd from ne ettha nag aid,
“They not having arrived at that place.”
This corresponds with Sanskrit usage.
e followed by a.
§ 52. When e is followed by a.
(a.) The e is changed to the semi-vowel y and the a remains
unchanged; as:
o^oooocSaocooo^ coo ssooo oc8p cooo^,
tyassa pahind honti from te ossa pahind hrnti ,
“These things have been rejected of, or by, those persons.”
Digitized by v^-ooQle
I 'enutthiUous of 0. 27*
(5.) The c is changed to y , and the short a is lengthened to
long a ; as:
O^ODSOOCStX^ COO 9COQ CO OQZoq
tyahan evan vadegya from te ahan earn vadeyya*
U I would speak thus to thee/’
o followed by o y a, t\ a, &.
*§ 53. When o is followed any vowel,
( a- ) The other vowel is elided: as:
*303203000 300000 (SqoOO
adhamo maka from adhamo vmaka, fc *Vile. inferior.?*
COOOOO COCO 9300
yohan from yo ahan , “1, who/ "
°38 D7C P-° €< 8P 7C P ^ QO
chuttdrome from chat taro ime, “These four/’
93 000300 c8 93 2033 gOQcB
atkopapati from at ho upapati , “Agaiu, a paramour.”
( 5* ) Before a, it is sometimes changed to the semi-vowel r,
and the a is lengthened into d ; as*.
CgO OD COCO QfOOO
swdhan from so ahan u Th!$ person, I. H
(c. ) Occasionally it is elided; as:
e>[2|p
JhnabaaJMti from Jiua luddko iti, “Jina-Buddha, [ it is said. ]
The preceding do not embrace all possible cases, but they
include all of common occurrence, and many more than are found
in Kaclichayano’s Grammar*
Kachchayano’s rules.
Kachchaya io gives seven rules:
§ 54. ( 1. ) When similar vowels meet, the first is elided.
§ 55* ( 2 ) When dissimilar vowels meet* the last is some-
times elided.
§ 56. (3*) When the first vowel has been elided, e or »
sometimes takes the place of both vowels.
§ 57. ( 4. ) Sometimes when the first vowel has been elided,
tbs second is lengthened.
§ 58. ( 5. ) When the second vo-^el has been elided, the first
is sometimes lengthened.
Digitized by v^-ooQle
28
Insertion of Consonants.
§ 59. ( 6. ) A final e is sometimes change 1 to y.
§ 60. (7.) A final u or o is sometinns changel to v.
Thesa rales are not of much practical value, but no general
rale3 can be forme 1 that are not beset with n anurous exceptions .
GENERAL RULES.
The following deductions from the examples given, may be
found useful for reference.
§ 61. When similar vowels meet, one is elided and the othfer
remains unchanged. See § 55. a. § 86. § 42, a . § 46.
§51. § 53. Exceptions: § 35. b. § 42. h.
§ 62. When i is followed by u or e ; and when i or e is fol-
lowed by a,
( a. ) It is changed to the semi- vowel y. See § 45. b.
§ 44. b. § 43. c. § 52. o.
( b. ) When a or u precedes, this change doe3 not take place.
See § 37. § 41. § 49.
§ 63. When u is followed by a or c, or o is followed by a,
(a. ) the u or o is changed to the semi- vow el v. See § 47. b
§ 50. §53. b.
( b. ) This change does not oceur when a precedes u or o; un-
less a be lengthened to d. See § 39. § 41. § 40.
§ 64. Unless changed to the semi-vowel v , o usually maintains
its position before all other vowels, and is sometimes formed by
the combination of a and u. See § 53. § 39. c.
INSERTION OF CONSONANTS.
When one word ending in a vowel is followed by another be-
ginning with a vowel, a consonant is occasionally inserted between
them, and the vowels remain unchanged. The consonants used
are: t. d. n. m. y. r. 1. v. an.
§ 65. t inserted; as;
OOCgOcBoO OOCgO OOQO
yasmdtiha for yasmd iha y “On which account here.’'
§ 66. d inserted; as:
GS^COD Q 99^000
edantassa for e antas 3 a> “For e fina 1 .”
§ 67. n inserted as:
CocooDpODcB coCOQD SCOOOcB
itundyati from ito dyati , “From this place he comes/’
Digitized by v^.ooQle
VoivjU folljiv-j'X bj Cmionniit*.
2D
§ 68. m inserted; as:
OOCgoSo OOCgD no
kccsmamiva from kasmd iva , ‘"From what account* sor
§ 69. y inserted: as:
00000083 OOCOO C03
yatkay Lb.in from yathd idan^ “Besides this.”
§ 70. r mrerted; as:
ooooocol^o ooooocol g=o
sdsajporiva from sdsapo iva “Like mustard.”
§ 71. 1 inserted; as:
oocoooooo^ so soloooo^
ckhaldyatanan from chha ayatanan, “Six abodes,”
§ 72. V inserted; as:
* coc;cooo|£do o oocooo g^ooo
tatoiutdya from tato u\dga y “From this rising.”
§ 73. ail, anus warn, inserted before consonant or vowel; as:
5>oc8 a ooqo8 «c?oc8 o o0ep8 •
purlman jdtin sardmi , for purimajdtin sardmi
“I remember former states of existence.”
WHEN VOWELS ARE FOLLOWED BY CON SONANTS*
§ 74. When a word ends in a vowel and the next word begins
with a consonant, the vowel is occasionally subjected to some
change; as:
( a. ) The vowel is sometimes lengthened, as a to d, and i to
i ; as:
00 g0©g°8oaD03CQ0 OOgO COg
sammadhaman vipassato, sammd for sarnmci:
“He who has seen well the lav r .”
obc^foic^ dlco^occ^
garni muni chare for game muni chare.
“The Sage may dwell in the village.”
( b. ) Sometimes a long yowel is shortened; as % to i ; thus:
COOO^dl8^Dt)COOO cooo^d'i§^>3occoo
lonavddi ndmaso for bonavddi ndmaso t
“Bonavldi by name.”
Digitized by LnOOQle
( c. ) Sometime* one vowel is ex hinge 1 f >r another, *
o, or o for a ; thus ;
COOQCgD CCOODO^gD
e alhamo from esodhammo, “This !aw.”
S^DOOd^^OCCpOOOCOOS OCCp o«\
pinp/ga claritu paro sahasan^ paro for para;
4 ‘More than a thousand to go for boiled rice.”
§ 75. When a word ends in a vowel, and the next begins with,
any classified letter not a nasal, that letter is doubled ; but if it be
an aspirate, its corresponding unaspirated letter is used. Hence
the following compound consonants are found at the beginning of
words in sentences where the normal form begins with the second
member of the
compound :
kk
99
click
jj
tt
(fd
tt
dd
FP
lb
CO
CO
8
8
$
88
8
8
O
o
kkh
9S h
chcJih
jj h
tth
ddh
tth
d-ih
pph
Ibk
°8
&
0
§
88
8
o
o
&
The foil awing examples may suffice to illu3trat3 these changes :
soo8
CO&GC\\
abikkavaaro from
abi
kautaro ,
“Very desirable.
o^gsool
08 ocoo)
pang g ako from
pa
gahoj
“Seizing.”
COOQ^OO
COO
c8°oo
tettinsa from
te
this a,
“Thirty three/*
©cqgoo
CO^
SO o
ckatuMasa from
chatu
ci c.3 a t
‘‘Fourteen.**
300° 0 O
o
00
8o o
chhj/jbisa from
chha
visa
“Twenty six.”
e^ogoDrslc^oDoaD coo dodos)
ia/iappamAfo pur is as 3d from Una, pamddo .
“Hare there is forgetfulness to men.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Anuswara before a vowel .
SI
SogocB
nak/ihamali frc
oocB
na hhamaU ,
“lie is impatient.”
CCODCOgP^OQCOD GCOOOCCC qjO^OCCOD
csevachajjli&naphdlo ftOin c:oevLicha jhauapalo ,
“And ro lids has the advantages of Jlian.”
§ 76. Some of the unclassified consonants are occasionally
found doubled, as l and v\ but wiicn v is djubled, it is represen-
ted by double lb : as:
E ;gl 83 *1 °189 . „
duoOiuUtn from clu vu,:a;: t “Speaking evJ.”
TKE NASAL SYMBOL ANUSWARA.
§ 77. YvHben followed by either a consonant or a vowel, it is
occasionally elided ; as :
COOOODJOOO^COQ OOOOD 3300 ,
tdsdhansaiUlke from fd'-an ah an ,
“In tlie presence of these females.”
33%X3COgO^5O0O^> G3^0000g0^£000^
ci r rja xcicl o hu :ia p ass ana from ariya sachciianan dassanan ,
“Seeing the Anya truths.”
§ 78. When followed by a vowel, the vowel is occasionally 6-
lided ; as:
Q£QO °£3 sjo
dhanyanva from dhanyan ica, “As paddy.”
§ 79 When a vowel has been elided, if the next consonant be
double ss , it is changed to a single s ; as:
pupplancauti.ojjati from piqphcm assd , “Flowers are to her.”
§ 80. When followed by e, sometimes, or y, or h 9 it is chang-
ed to ny ;
a 3 :
ooegoo
00
Go
tanyeva
from tan
eva
“Even thee.'
“Q33
00
°* 9 S
sanyuttan
from
yuitan
“Union.”
CO^
Co
c 8
tvahnyi
from eran
hi,
"If so.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
32
Ammvara before a Consonant.
§ 81. When followed by a vowel, anuewara is usually charged
to Hi ; as:
COOO|Og«c8 coooj og sccS
konutwamasi from konu iuan asi 9 “Who art thou?”
(BoOOOOCCjoqpS cB' 930 Q OOCC^oqjoS
limahan kareyyami from kin ahetn kareyydmi 9
“What may I do?”
tumichchhatthesu from tun 'ickchha atthesu ,
“Tun in the signification of wishing,”
633«
ddnamuttaman from ddnem uttaman, “The best offering.”
COSC XD CO COO
evametan from evan etan, “Thus this.”
§ 82. Occasionally it is changed to d ; as
CooaccTo coo ococolo
etcdawcha from etan dvocha , “This he said.”
§ 83. When followed by a classified letter, anuswara is changed
to the nasal of the class to which it belongs; as:
“So indeed.”
“And a house.”
“And the third time.”
“What name?”
oqoc^cooooq cq3 coo coooog
sukhante hotu from sukhan te hotu %
“May happiness be to thee!”
CocSI
evangkho from
coo 03
gahmycha from
oocBoog 0
tatiyampi from
cBiocoo
JL to or m
c6 col
evan kho 9
oco o
gahan eha
oocBcd 8
tatiyan pi 9
cB* ^OCOD
77-drMo,
Digitized by LjOOQle
1
CHAPTER III.
TABLES OF DECLENSION.
Occidental grammarians take a word as a basis, and make
all the particles of inflection radiate from it, as from a centre, but
Kachchayano pursues the opposite course. He usually takes an in-
flection and makes all the varieties of nouns masculine feminine
and neuter, adjectives, and pronouns diverge from that inflection
as from a central point. Thus he gives 8 as the mark of the ge-
nitive singular, and then, in the tenth of his noun aphorisms, say3
ODOOOQQOQCXD sakamose “On account of sa, sa comes.”
That is, the original single 8 of the genitive is doubled, and
beco mes b8a. He next illustrates the use of the suffix by the fol-
lowing examples:
<,$00000 3$000 oBoglOCO OOOQ&[OOD
purisassa aggissa bhikkhussa sayambhmsa
“Of a man, of a fire, of a priest, of a divinity,
SOoBo^OOO 30^000 codSoOO
abhibliussct dandksa isissa
of a god, of a pilgrim, of a sage.
In continuation of his making sa the central point, his next
aphorism is:
ODDDOCC^OOOO 8an swekavachanem chi
“Also on account of san , sd, in the singular number.”
He adds the following examples:
CcBooo gcBoood cqSoOO $$0000 c8oo5
etissun etissa imiss.an imispd tissan
In this of this in this of this in that
cBoOOO OOOOO 9QG|005 33(^0000
tissa tassan amusan amussd ( All feminine. )
of that, in that, in thi s, of this.
The following tables of declension contain all that can be glean?
ed from the the whole of Kachchayauo’s examples.
. Digitized by LnOOQle
34
J’Hrisa, and Rtpa declined.
Nouns.
First Declension.
Sing.
Plur.
§ 89. Masculines in a, like
yurisa A man.
tj^COOD
Nom. puriso
purisd
<,$q5
lj$CCO
Acc. purisan
purise
ij$cooo8 cj^aoocB coooB
Ins. purisma
purisehi purisahi purisebi
<^00000
D. G. purisassa
puritdnan
<$C»CgO
Abl. purisasma purisalimd
{ as Instmmentivc . )
(j$QCXD C§° ^DD§^C00Cq <$°000q
Loc. purise . . . smin . . . sahmi purisesu purisdsu
<&*> #>»
Yoc. purisa purisd
(as Nominative .)
§ 90 Neuters in a, like rupa an image.
$6
fjdl? f)6)
Nom. rupan
rupani rupd
Acc. ( as Nominative .)
{as Nominative )
f)dlc8
Ins. ivpena
rupdhi
<5)0000
D. G. rupassa
rupanan
D°^>
Abl. rupasmd
{as Instrumentive . )
S) oc §°
f)<^
Loc. rupasmin
rupasu
Digitized by v^.ooQle
35
Aggi, and Dandi declined .
Sing.
Plur.
§ 91 Masculines in i like aggi fire.
*>§
SSOCODO
ec8
O
Nom.
aggi
aggayo
aggi
Acc.
aggm
(as Nmmative.)
S3§$0
acc
9
In. Ab. aygina
aggi hi
93^000
O
O
coc
a
*§*
D. G.
aggissa
aggino
agginan
*§=(?
3380}
Loc.
aggismm
aggisu
Yoc.
(as Nominative.)
(as Nominative.)
§
92 Masculines in i y like dandi A pilgrim.
s< $
sag sa£
segep
Nom.
dandi
dandi dandi
dandmo
s #
Acc.
dandin
dandinan
(as Nominative.)
S( $P
sa^oB
In. Ab. dandind
dandihi
acj^ooo
SCjgc^O
D. G.
dandissa
dandino
dandinan
s #§°
sago}
Loc.
dandismvn
s <$
dandisu
Yoc.
dandi
(as Nominative.)
REMARK.
Clough has all the forms of the ablative and
locative singu-
lar, and instrumentive plural given in purisa, § 89.
Digitized by
Google
3G
Bhikkhu , a/ifZ Sayamhhu declined*
Sing. • Plur.
§ 93 Masculines in w, like bhikkhu A priest.
o8og L
oBogco
oBogn
Nom.
bliikkltu
bhikkhave
bhikkhu
c8 ogcol
bhikkhavo
bhikkhu
Acc.
bhikkhun
(as Nominative.)
cSog'^D
o8og[[o8ii
In. Ab
. bhikkhuna
bhihkhuhi
o8og[CCO
o8og|^
D. G.
bhikkhussa
bhikkhunan
o8ogic§°
o8og|[cqn
bhikkliusmin
bliikkhusu
Yoc.
( Nominative.')
§
94 Masculines
in w, like sayamhhu A name op buddda.
cxxx^il
CXDOO£jQcTI
cooo^jcp
Nom.
sayamhhu
sayambliuvo
sayambhuno
Obcx&i.
Acc.
traifambhun
(as Nominative.)
cxxx^ip
OOOQ£|[c8
In. Ab.
sayambhund
sayambhuhi
0000^000
oooo^il^
D. G.
sayambhu88a
sayambh unan
OOOOQlcg
OXO£jlO}
Loc.
sayambhmmtn
sayambhum
Yoc.
(as Nominative .)
REMARK.
Bhikkhavo , or bhikkhave , is written on the inscriptions bhikhapd
rf |j but a fac-simile reads [j nearly the regular to' i
Digitized by v^.ooQle
37
Kanya, rafii , and mail declined.
Second Declension-
Sing. Piur.
$ 95 Feminines in d, like hmya A virgin.
OO0D OO0OCOO5 0005
Nom. kanya kanyayo kanyd
°°0
Acc. banyan (as Nominative .)
OO0OCO OO05c8 0005 o8
In. Ab. kanyaya kanydhi kanjabJiL
OO0DOOO 00030$
D. Gr. ... kanyanan
0003303 OO033OQ OO^DOq
l<oc. ... kanydyan kanydsu
OOC03
Voc. kanye (as Nominative .)
§ 96. Feminines
in i 9 like ratti night.
« i &
qg§co03
C 18§ '
^Tom. ratti
Oo
rattiyo
rata \
8?
(as Nominative .)
Acc. ratlin
c|o8c8
«tt8=®
In. Ab. rattiyd
ratti hi
ratti bhi
D. G. ...
rattinan
Loc.
rattiyan
rattisn
§ 97. Feminine
in i, like mail wisdom.
qS
Nom. matt
oc8°
ocBgood
m atiyo
(as Nominative ,)
Acc. matin
«cBo03
ooqp
oc8c8
oc8o8
In. Ab. matiyd
matyd
maiihi
in
«cBoo3
D. G. ...
ocBoo
matinan
ocBoq
Loc. maiiyan
matyan
matisu
6
Digitized by
Google
88
Nadi, dhcrm , and vculltu, declined.
Sing.
§ 98. Feminines in », like nadi a eiyek.
Plur.
Nom. 'nadt
f
Acc. nadm
In. Ab. nadiya
$>toeO
D. G. ...
|>§oo 5 ^>§00
$>§GOOO
nadiyo
(as Nominative .)
?§c 8
nndihi
f4
nadtnan
nadibhi
Loc.
nadiyan nadisu
§ 99. Feminines in u , like dhenu A cow.
COjgCOOO
GOf
Nom.
dhenu
dhenuyo
dhenu
Acc.
GOf°
dhenun
(as Nominative .)
w
GO$OOD
CO^OO
CGjOO
In. Ab.
dlienuya.
GO £000
dhenuhi
dhenubhi
D. G.
CO^OOO
dhenunan
co^oq cogoq
Loc.
dlienuyan dhenusu
§ 100. Feminines in u, like vadhu A daughter in law.
oq
OCjiQOCO
Nom. vadhu
vadhuyo
oq>°
Acc. vadhun
(as Is
OQ^COO
o$c8
In. Ab. vadhuyd
vadliuhi
o
OOOOO
cq$
D. G. ...
vadhunan
oqoo3
oqo5
Loc.
vadhuyan vadhum
oq
vadhu
oqS
vadhublii
Digitized by
Google
Puma, bhagava, and mana declined.
Third Declention.
39
Sing. Plur.
§ 101. Maculines in a increasing by n, like ■puma a male.
Nom.
Acc.
qoo
puma
qd
pwtnom
qwoQ^o
pumano
q«oc|>3 qq^D
In. Ab. pumano pumund
qyocp
D. G. pumano
(as Nominative .)
qoOQ^>o8 qoocaoS
A L • ' .11 '
Loc.
q ooq ^
pumane
qco
pume
pvmanehi
qoo^
pumdncm
qoooq
pumasu
'pumdnebhi
qc«o^ Voc . gj n .
pumesu ( pumcm .)
§ 102. Masculines in a increasing by t , nt, as bhagava A lord
ooool
N om, bhagcuva
0 OO O( j,
bhagavantan
COOOQ^ OOOOC §p
bhagavante bhagavanto
Acc.
OOOOOOD
In. Ab. bhagavatd
OOOOCOOO
D. G. bhagavato
oooocB
Loc. bhagdvati
(as Nominative .)
ooooc^oB ooooc^oB
bhagavantehi bhagavantebhi
oooooo
bhagavatan
ooooc^cq
bhagavantesu (V. Sin. bliaqavan .)
§ 103. Neuters in a increasing by s like mana mind*
o|>
Nom.
mam m
mandm
mavd
Acc.
(as Nominative .)
(as
Nominative .)
oc^>o 8
In. Ab.
manasa
manehi
manebhi
O^CODO
D. G.
m arioso
mananan
«j>b8
Qc^cq
Loc.
manasi
mane
manesu
(V. Sin.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
40
A(hi, dyu , and bhdtu declined.
§ 104 Neuters in i, like
95g
Nom.
athi
Ȥ
Acc.
athin
35§SO
i A BONE,
•8?
athini
so§
afhi
In. Ab. afhind
93§C^O
D. Gr. afhino
Loc. ajhihmi
afkismin
90§c8
afhihi
a{ hi nan
afJusu
(as Nominative .)
9S^o8
athibhi
§ 105 Neuters in u> like dyu age.
soleq sslo^?
Nom. dyu dyuni
9oloq°
Acc. dyun
oaloqp
In. Ab. ayund dyuhi
33loqC|D qdIo^
D. Gr. dyuno dyunan
t»loq§ ‘»loqcg 0 oSlu^oq
L oc. ayuhmi dyusmm dyusu
§ 106. Masculines, or feminines increasing b y r.
(a.) Like bhatu a brother.
30)(J^
dyu
(as Nominative .)
sslu^eB
ayubhi
ooooao
Nom. bhatd
OODOO<^
Acc. bhdtaran
ooooo sp
In. Ab. bhatard
coocqp^o
D. G. bhatuno
oddcBcooo
OODOo£|
Loc . bhdtari
OOOOOOCp
bhdtaro
(as Nominative .)
00500?G|c8 oobo^oB
bhdtarehi bhdtuhi
ooSooqof 000^
bhataranan . . . fcbwm
(as lustrum :n ive .)
ooooocqo^
bhdtaresu
Digitized by
Google
Satth
u , pitt/y and mdtu declined .
41
(i.) L'ke aatlb.
!* A IE AC HER.
co$p
COQgOCCp
Nora, tatthd
mttharo
™ 88°A
coggoc^D
^38
Aec. satthdran
entihavo
sattiAre
coggosc^oS
ocggcc^oS
In. Ab. mtikard
garthdrehi
satthArebhi
oogg i ooggic^D o>ggoqos
o^ggo^.
D. G. sallhu. sutihutw eaiti.ardrum
saVtdnatb
cogg^}
oiggxepq
Loc. satthari
eattnareeu
(r.) Like pi(u
A I* AT H EH.
8 COD
8cr>:cp
Nom. ;*Va
pi taro
Sco^
Acc. pifar'in
p it u ran (as Xr m l no firs,)
ooocp
OODC^OO
Here'S
In. Ab. ry’tard
pitarehi
r* Vi/ /» /;?
ooqsp
8cq 8oocp$
8ooo$
l). G. pituno
pitu pitardnan
pita nan
8co%
Sooscpq
Loc. pitari
pitahos*
(J.) Lika
l L HOTEL?.
ODCOO
QCCO^O
Nona. »,r4/4
m at are
ODOO^
o:ooccp
CJOCOGC|
Acc. mdtar&n
malaro
mat ore
OOCOqO
OOOOCC|c8
qdoo^oB
Tn. Ab. • ndtard
n.6ic rehi
rjtdloreblj
oocpp
cccq tcoocp? «
~OOl$ «0O^>
L. G. mdiuw
iftcia 7 ,r di a ran 07) Tttdidnan inolunun
«ooo^
(XOOC^O}
cxoqoq
Loc. mdiari
mdtaresii
mahtm
7
Digitized by(jOCK^IC
42
Sul'h!, raja, onl a o dn-tiiied.
Irregular Nouns
$ 107. Masculine* k» «, like ga’.U \ n.'icxr.
ooo)
oooi :oco
OO.dl'cW
Nom.
ftnkhd
b'nkftU h%
, . 1
tnk fiin^
ooo oool$
oool^
Acc.
sakha n sihhduan
sakha run, (- r ' ■
in a t'vr.)
008^0
codbcjoS
coco
In. Ab
. sakhtnd
sahnareht
sikh^hhi,
008000
oookp.j
oo8j
D. G.
sakhissa
S'lkhd.'&’iJti
#aA hi*u7H
00 ?©
oodlcc^cq
0 oc©oq
Lee.
sakhe
fiukkdresu
sahh'j+a
ooo oo ol ooS ooS
Voc. sakha sakha sakla ( <w ^favii/iative.)
§ 103. Masculines in J, like raja a king.
CpOO
rdjano
CpGSO?
rdjano
rdjebhi
CpOO$
rdjanan
fSPi
rajusu
§ 109. Masculines in o, like go an ox.
Nom.
Acc.
.
rajan
CjO»D^
raja tan,
raja
epTOt
raja
la. Ab.
cp?^
rdjena
ne 0
ran yd
CpOOicB
rdjehi
D. G.
cp8cp
rujino
C|CgOD
rdnyo
«ie
ranyan
Loc.
«i-e
range
cp8$
rdjini
cpcooq
ra/esi*
rdjuhi
w
raj u nan
col
6) col
ocol 0I8
Nom.
go
615 00 616[ 00 [
gdvo
gavo gdi r i
Acc.
odium gavan gdaun gavun
( <TC
Nominat.' /v>. )
In.
dlco^> oco^
colc8
col 08
g arena, g arena
gahi
gob hi
0. G.
OlOCOO 00000
col$
CO
gara^ra gnvassa
o’q'; odl
gonan
gavan
AM.
*;.c
g ,r -':i gat’d
(as
Insfrumentlt' e.)
gave
gosu
gdresu ga.
Digitized by
Google
Sabpa declined.
46
Adjectives
§ 110 Of first and 6c:ond.decl©asioiiS| as $aljp a ALL.
Sing. Plur.
(«.) MASCULINE.
Kom.
.oocgo
sabpo
SOgeOOD DO Cg
sdbvatio sabpti
Acc.
^8*
sabpun
(as Xom Ina ti re.)
cocg*
OOgCCOO OOCgo8 CDCgoS
Ins.
8Ctb})CH4‘
€t tbpaso sabpelu sahpebld
*
co g COO
OOegOOD^ OOOgDO
D.G.
sabpassa
eabptxun-an sabpcsaih
Abl.
cogcgo
gabpaswA
ocgccoo
sabpa to (as Instrument ivc.)
Loc.
“8^.
an bpasYni
sdhpesa
Isom.
COgD
sabjKf
(b%) FEMININE.
oogoeoDD oogp
sabpdtjo sabpd
Acc.
°°8
'eaboan
(a * Xom inactive . )
OOgOOO
In. Abl. sabpcya
* oocgc8 cocgcS
sabpehi edbpcbhi
IX G.
COODOO
sabfidya
oogDooof oogocS
sabpamnari s&lpdsan
Loc.
COODOO
sabyuya
coglco oogooq
cogcoo
Kom.
CDO‘
tibr-m
(e.) nf.utet?.
cogo?
sah'Hini
Acc.
cos'
L>
grtpa*
u . r
saltpan 1 -
\ <>o.
COO
O
sabpa
OOOD COgD$
sab ltd sabpAnd
{Trie
oih r ca;w <y
Lbc n&itcr arc. the si.n >■ as tin mascHlitwJ l
Digitized by v^.ooQle
$ 111. Adjectives of third, second, and first declensions,
gunava rosstssi.fd good qualities.
Sing. Plnr.
(a.) MASCULINE.
qcrxol ... o$p q cooc&d
... o^d
Nom.
g umed gumvantd gvnavanto
yt<§aran:es
qao°c&
.
Acc.
gunavantan
y wkuanft!
qciooooo
- oc&cB
In. Ab.
guitar atd
gunavantetii
qclOOOCOD
~ °<*??
... ooo
D. G.
gunavato
gunavantdnan
gunavatan
qorjO<B
••• °-$FH
Loc.
gunavati
gunavantesu
... o ... ol
~.i>
Yoc.
gunava gunava gunava n (a# Nominative-)
(h.) FEMININE.
qcrco& ...
oc8 qcroojucooo
~ «*
Nom.
gunavann gunavati gunaeanhye
gunavanh
■*6
o
:
Acc.
gunavantaii
(iw hominativc)
... ojUxD
ffe
Sc
In. Al.
guhavcmtiyd
gnnavotitif’i
•••
••• °SJ
D. G.
gumvantrr'On
*»« i«*
... o&q
Loc.
gunavaii t iya n gunwvan U*u
(c.) NEUTER.
qcr>5 qccJOAD?
Nam gvnavan ^wnivanUSni
...
Acc. pu#avanta/i (<w JSisminattve.)
(Tke ctftr cafes cf ile renter are tie sc me as the fnctsculive.)
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Packan declined .
*5
Participles.
§ 1 12. Participles increasing by t , nt 9 as pachan coorikg.
Sing. Plur.
(a.) MASCULINE.
Non.
06
ytichato pacha nto
oc&o
pachanta
Ac c.
pachanian
°°'db
pach ante
coc&oB
COOQD
co^c8
Ins.
pachancena pachai d
pacha, ntehi
pachantebhi
CONOCO CO^OOD
COj^
CO 06
D. G.
pachantassa j ctcl a - o
pachanta nan
pachatan
A 1 > 1 .
OO^D COOOO
pacha n tahmd pach a id
( as Insii
innsntive.)
Lee.
pachantasmd (jQ^po D
C'O^cg qccB
yjcr/i aw taswi pach ati
co^cq
pachaniesu
patch anta hmi pacha nte
<i)
FEMHsim
<- 0 S>,
Cc8 GOOD
Non. pachan U
pacnanU tjo
pachan ti
c
0
8 *.
Acc. pach ant in
(as Nominative .)
OC&ODD
co§jj 8
cc * a °
In. Ab. pacha atbjd
pach a ati hi
pachan tihlu
D. G.
pat h a rt fmaii
.. CC&OD
002^0^
Loo. ... pachantnjmi
pachan tesu
0 *,)
NEITTFR.
OQ
c '°^
Non. pachan
pacha nil
(as 'bsvtt
> i native.)
Acc. pacha ui an
(The other cases oj the n evict
• //.* trifle <
as the riiwMtie.)
8
Digitized byCjOO^L
2/for, dirt, and ti declirej.
4 *
Numeral Adjective?.
Has.
§ 115. i’foi oxk.
Fe?n.
Sent.
GiOOO
COOD
co5
Nom.
ek'o
eld
Acc.
COD
elan
COO
ekan
{Other rarer l
Cioo^
clena
CO0003
h tare a,
/
Ins.
ehitja
D. G
Coooco
cl'assa
Abl.
COO ODD
elrisd
COOCOOD ...
Loc.
COOC§
chistmi
•••
§ 114. Did two, of all gender*.
Xom.
<Xce cZni’a
eg qco
Acc.
... dwaijan
•••
§CQ
Ins.
du'ihi Jmfyena
§08 geoDS
D. G.
dtvin nan 0 n vinnan
Abl
dtmhi
8c8 f
Loc.
ehttsn
o
IN
$ 115.
Ti THREE.
Mas.
Fem.
Neut.
CO GOOD
cBeoooo
ScS
No. Ac.
tayo
tisao
tin i
& 08
dBo8
In. Ab.
tihi
tild
( Other carer as
| cBcoa^
masculine.)
IX G. finnan * tirman tingannan
tirsanrian
cSoq
cBoq
I.cc.
tit*
tiau
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Chatu, panycha % elunavisati, and ehmasafa declined. * ®?
§ ll«.
Chain For*
Maa.
F«ia.
oggpccp
OOOGOOOO
oggaEi
No. Ac chuttaro
cbalasfo
dhattdn
ooqc8
©oqc8
In. Ab. chaiuhi
chatuhi
(Ctli€n‘tasrj cm
ee^
OOOODDO^
vtascvline^
D. G. eftaiunnan
cliatasadnan .
eoqoq
ooqoq
•
Lee. ihaivtu
chaiuau
§ 117. Fanycha
five, of all genders.
No. Ac. fanycha
°63
. • ••
In. Ab. pcmychahi
owc8
D. G. panychannan
Offii
Loc. panychasu
°0J“l
§ 118. Ekunavisati nineteen, de«lined in i he feminia^b#
of all genders.
Ncm. ekunavisa&i C0^8oO<B
Acc. ekunavi 8 q,tin £0^8o0c6 #
Is. Ab. D. G. ehmavmUtyd CCX^8oO*8cX»
L°c. ... -sattyan ~
| 119. Ekunasata kikstt nine, declined in the neuter, but
of all genders.
No. Ac. ekunamtan
Ins. ekunasatena
D. G. elimuMcdasm
Abl. ekunasatatmd . sdtakmd ,
CcrtfODco
COtfOOQCD^
C^ooooa a>
‘CO^OOOOCgD
Lee. ekunashtasrA* • — safakmi
CO^OOOO
VoC. elcunasati i
COOO^O
— oooo§
Digitized by v^.ooQle
48
Ahma , and tnhma declined.
Pronouns.
j 120' Tbe First Personal Pronoun ahma I.
Singular.
XOO
« OO
«ooo GO
Nom.
dhan
Ace.
man
maman •
Joa.
mayi
me
D. 0.
mama
me
maman
All.
ahman
mayd
mdhyan mayyan
Loc.
mayi
Pin
Nom.
ahne
ahman
ahma?uin ,
Ace.
maijan
ah me
ahman
no
ahmanan
ahmdJcan
no
In. Ab. ahmehi
no 4
oo go oo 33 ^ co^ toq|*
WOOD
oc 8
iral.
GOCCj) OOO C $3
D. G. dhmdkan
Ldcs ahmesu
wo 9 COOOD
S 3 CyCO
cp
cp
cp
5 121. The Second Personal Pronoun tuhma thou .
S‘nju!ar.
Nom. #wa» him* tiu>nan qA q^q q^o 00 COO O^OCO
iwayd tuyd 0 • • •
Acq, /w’a?/- tuvan tavan tan Og OqO COO OO
Ina. ‘ 'faya tf<3
D. G. fora <e hchman hihyan
Abl.
Loc. /-aratfi
OCCOD COO
ooo coo oq^
COOCO
cco 3 oodS
Nom. iulitne tubman
Ace. fwAm <? tv k:r;a & (nhmakan vo
1c. Al). tv]>m*!tl
D. (x. tuhlndl <Ml
Loo. ink iv csu
Plural.
w cqcy oqcj>
oqcy oq^> oqcpod col
’o^c^oB
o^^ood
*>> '
CO'
col
col
“Digitized by Google
To, na
•declined.
'49
§ 122. The Third Personal Pronoun ta Via HE,
she, it ; al_
so demonstrative this,
THAT, THE.
Singular.
Mas.
Fern.
Neut.
COOD
OOD
O ,•
OO 2>
Nom.
so
St/
T
ton vjio
CD
•
*
OO |
0 »
CO $
Acc.
tan
itizn
wan-
tan non
CCOJ
CODOO pOO
In 3.
ten a
iceua
fcfya niii/a
(Other mse$
COODD
j vOO
COCOD OQ GOOD"*
masculine.-)
1^. G. tassa
nttssa
cBcood cBcooooo
tooo
cocgo coqo pCQ , D
/dyx /assi //ssa //Vsy? yd nu-ja
OO; COD
odx>d poo
Abl .
tas md t ah via namiu w-ah/md
tato
/ov/a /(«'/(!•
•
0008’ 008 coa8
OODOO OOOOO
cBqoo
*=§■ ?§
Loc.
tan /tun tahmt tnyi
nasmin
fch/ft tassan '
tis30:2V‘
nahmi
Plural.
COO
000 p
003$
Nom.
te
m
<a ««
/hi'
COO
c ?
OOD p
00D$
Acc.
te
?A<?
td 9M
Uini
ooocB oooc8
(.Other coses
COcBcOoB pc8 po8 pc8 pc8 asmasculhic,)
In. Ab. taki tahhi rtdhi nahhi tdhi tulhi nahi nab hi
CCOOQ CCOOOO^
Op DO
Cf>000^
OOOOO 000 COD ^
D. G. fcSvTTi lesdnan
nesan nesdnan
tdwra tdsanan
COOO}
c pi
COO CODOqCiO^
Lt c. tcsu
? . G-'/i
frstt tuSt* d
*
Digitized by(jOCK^IC
oO
Eta dtrVacd.
§ 123. The Demonstrative* Pronoun eaa this, that.
Sing. Plur.
(a.) MASCULINE.
CCOOD
CCOO
Num. eso
etc
CCO
CCOO
Aco. elan
etc
C CCDf>
Ccooc8
Ins. etena
et»‘hi
CcBcoo
CCOOOD
D. G . etiisa
el eso 71
Coocgo
Ccooc8
Abl. etasmd
ctehi
cooeg 3
Ccoocq
I.OC. etas nun
etesu
Q>\
FEMININE.
GOOD
GOOD
Ncm. esd
ctd
COO
GOOD
Aec. e<a»
eta
CCODOO
coodc8
In. Ab. etwja
etdhi
CCODOO C.&OXO
CcBocoooo
coooioo
D. G. etdya etiss a eVssdya
eidsan
COODOO Q&COO
cooooq
Loc. ' etdijan ctissan
CO
NEUTER.
Goo
COOD$
Nona, efttt* .
etdni
COO
Gcod^
Aco. eft.*/*
etdiii
The other cases <>j the neuter are the. same as the masculine.)
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Ima declined.
51
§ 124. The Demonstrative Pronoun ima this.
Sing. Plur. .
(a.) MASCULINE.
Nom.
Acc.
Ins.
3 QOO
ayan
COQ
iman
P
\mnid
ZfCO
ime
coCQ
OOO^ $occc 8
g>ocoo «8ooo ssoco g^c«o5
D. G. imassa, indssa as? a imesan
33 CgO co«^o «C«c 8
Abl. imasmd asmd imahm/i irtiehi
sH? ^ S>c§°$o«§ ^coo}
Loc. imasmin asmtn ismm imahmi imesu
coB
ehi
g^ccooo^
co8
eld
(5.) FEMININE.
Nom.
Acc.
»CJO •
ayan
iman
imd
${<fo
ima
S^«xx>
In. Ab. imdya
««doo «8ncoo
coSooODOO 330000 ^«003 ^ODOOO^
D. 6. ivnaya imissa imissdya ossa ividsan imdsdnan
S^odoq co8oo6 33 oo 5 coyooq
Loc. imdyan imtssan
assan
imdsu
(«•)
NEUTER.
Nom. iiian
imam
Acc. idan
ividni
(I%e other cases of the neuter are the same as the m xsotdiiu:.')
g^cwB
imehi
CO*)
es art
Digitized by v^.ooQle
£2
wimu declined.
§ 125. The D^mo&dtwtuve Pronoun c
imu tttis.
Sing.
Plur.
(«*) %t*SCUL!X£.
ssc^cood
ac^
ecoqcoco
Nom. amulco at a
asuto amu
sa<^
Acc. amun
amu
*»C^0
93^c8
in. «Ab. •aammi
•amuki
^fX>
^0CO$
D. G. amussa
arrM'Ktn
«H=§°
Loc. amusmiu
qimudu
(b.) FEMINIZE.
93C}COOD
TOOq , TOQCOCO
•
Nom. amuko
cun- arnuyo
92^COCO
Age. amun
amuio
33^000
330^ c8
lit. Ab. amuyd
arnuhi
ro^ooo
93(^0003 93<£33
«CCg3&4
D. G. amuyd
awzissa amusan
9aqoS
Loc. amuyan
amussan amti^n
(cl) Neuter.
GO^
'O
Nom, Offom-
amun i
Acc,
Mv< i
( 27 ?e vf/fcr o/ the neuter are the same. <
ors //"<? masculine^
«
Digitized by(jOCK^IC
Til decline J.
•M
§ 126. The Rslative Pronoun ya who , that , which , what.
Sing.
(<r.) MASCULINE.
Piur.
GOOD 001003 GOO
Nom. yo yako
y*
CQ
COO
Acc. yon
ye
CODf
cooco
Ius. yena.
yehl
ooooo
GO oo5
cooooof
D. G. yassa
yesan
yesdnaa
OOOgO
cooc8
Ail. ‘ yashfd
ye hi
oocS'
coooq
Loc. y asm m
yesn
(6.) FKMININE.
003
003
Nom. y«
yd
CO
CQ3
Acc. ya?*
yd
00300
O00c8
In. Ab. y<zy-i
yaV< »
000033 .
00333
003300 >
D. G. yassi
yawn
yd*dmiu
03 COO
ooDcq
Loc. yassan
yii-iii
( C .) NFUTJ-C.
CQ
3^
o
3
Nom. ?/<?./&
/
03
000*$
Acc. yan
ya// /
{The offer rascAt <f //«?
nm*er arc the same
(it* Hit ih r htt'f- ' iCiiii’t)
u»
Digitized byCjOO^IC
54
Kin declined.
.. * 127, Th«
Interrogative Pronoun hi
It WHO, WHICH,
,Sin^.
(>/,) MASCULINE#
Piur,
COO'D
COO •
Kom. In
ke
o
co
COO
Ace. Ian
ke
OCO^
coocB
Ins. Lena
kehi
OOOOO
OCOOO
cooooc^
1). 0. L'a&yi
L'Citan
lcesanan
cozgo
cooc8
Abl. has hid
kehi
co^
coooq
1h>C. JiO.fi m i 11/
tie* a
{h.) FEMININE.
coo
ODD
No m. Id
1:d
CO
COO
A-CCi hern
kd
COO oo
oodoB
i
In. Ab. lean a
Wei
ocooo
ODOOO
OOJOOOf
I>. G. ledijOj
kdsan
kdsdnan
ocooo
noooq
Loe. kdya
kdsa
(c.) NEUTER.
S°
003$
Norn, kin
kctni
CO
OOD$
Acc. Jean
kdni
(The other cases of the neuter are the same as Ha mamduit.)
Digitized by LnOOQLe
j
Declension of the Inscription*. 96
Bock' cut Declension.
§ 128. As First Declension ;
in final a.
(a.) MASCULINE*
Slngul
nr*
Nom.
££
jano
a man
Acc.
oV
dhamma*
the law
Ins.
D 81
dJiamntena
by the law
D. G.
D81
dhamnuma
of, or, to the law
Lee.
DiS
t lhammt
in the law' 1
. . .
i J f "A &
vrjitehmi
iu the conquered [country^
...
J J ° J
vijii&nsi
...
Voc.
■JE+*
rajiild
0 king’s follower-!
Plural.
Nom.
nJS-f
rajakd
king’s followers
Ins.
J3 _ J - J
b ( i rb JL lr jxttfvetiyhi
by neighbours
D. G.
8111
mamadnan
to, or, of men
Loc.
b©l
1
paikam
in the paths
(by N1UTER.
Singular.
Kom.
o
H JL b /b 0 Mtiipoiaihan
»
the Buddhist Sabbath
Acc.
n°
t
Bukben
pleasure
Plural.
Nom.
8-vJl
A
muldni
roots
*
Acc.
J - J
L 1 1
gharistani
households*
•
Digitized by(jOCK^IC
Declension of the Inscription*.
50
§ 120. As Second Dcctension~nEiiiNiNE.
Singular.
Nom. f A “i“ ja kd d
a bat
In. Ab. > A JL» e % a
by, or, from thh
j j — .
D. G. if X JL bhtehhanuja to, or, of a priestess
j o
Lee. JrWJL
in Tosa’i
§130. As Third Declension— masculine.
Singular.
1
ll;
\
»
-6
O
rajd
a king
Ine. PR
rdnyd
by a king
D.G. f=fi
ranijo
to, or, of a king
ALL B q X
mtilchato
from tha mouth
J J
Loo. (j A 1
pi tart
in a father
Plural.
Norn. I £ £
rajaiho
kings
§ 131. As the numeral two.
Nom. > }i i
o »
dm duva
two
Ins. > £ £
duvehi
by two
§ T32. As the First Personal Pronoun I.
Singular.
Ncm. HLr
ahan
i
Jus. y y J j me mo yd by me
t* Q. 8 8 8 me mama to, or, of me ; my
M • .
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER. IV.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
The Pali has three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter ;
and two numbers, singular, and plural. It differs from the Sans-
krit, as the Latin differs from the Greek, in the absence of a dual
number.
The Pali, like the Sanskrit, 1 as eight cases, the nominative,
the accusative, the instramentive, the dative, the ablative, the ge-
nitive, the locative, and the vocative. The instrumentive and loca-
tive, unknown to Greek or Latin, express relations denoted by ly,
and in.
In Greek there are three sets of terminations to mark the dis-
tinctions of case, and hence three declensions ; in Latin there are
five, and therefore five declensions. Kaehchayr.no gives one set
of terminations, go according to his grammar, Pali has only one
declension. The native Sanskrit grammarians also give a single
set of case terminations, which arc here furnished for comparison,
§ 133. Kaehchayano/s case terminations.
Singular. Plural.
_ PALI.
SANSKRIT.
PALI.
sa> t skr:t,
cB
fa
capo
Nom.
SI
SI
YO
jas
.35
W
GOOD
'SE!E n
Acc.
AN
AM
JO
SEAS'
V
Z\
c8
Ins.
TA
HI
BHIS '
00
•
*
WE,
Dat.
SA
NUE
NAN
BHYAS
Pp
??fa
c8
AW.
SMA
NOASI
lit
BHYAS '
Gen.
00
SA
NO AS
•
r
NAN
W
AM *
ft
a*
Loc.
SJilN
NGI
SO
SLP.
U
Digitized by v^-ooQle
Firs’ Frc'ci's'cm.
5 *
The v* entire is nor ccmidcrcd by Koch* hay&ne, nor by tire
native Sanskrit gramma riaiis, an ii.d< pendant cjuc, but ns included
in the nominative.
Those terminations unaltered ore never found attached to any
noun. Aw, lhr instance, is always rejected fr< m the ncmirative,
and some other affix substituted. tn Sr.m krit tie i of Si 8 re-
jected together with j, sh> (, vg % p* By writers later than Kaeh-
chayano, each changed set of terminations has been erected in-
to a separate declension, and hence fifteen declensions have been
furnished for Pali nouns.
In the preceding Tables of Declension are given all the dif-
ferent forms of Pali nouns, adjectives, end pronouns; and an ex-
amination of them will show, that they may be all conveniently
classed under three declensions.
Masculine and neuter nouns in a final, § 81). DO, furnish one
well market set of terminations, and may be compared with tho
Sanskrit as below.
$ 134. Nouns in a final. (;.) Masculine.
Singular. Plural.
CALI.
IAXSKA1T.
PALI.
• AKSKM1T.
C 0
•
•
D
V
Num.
O
AH
/
A
A If
•
•
c
TW
Acc. •
• N
If
K
AN ^
- ' *
•
•s
W
co8 co8 oo8 :
IliS.
EX A
ENA
IHI IBHt
AHI Attf
OOO
m
•s
w
Dab
SSA
A YA
4nan
F.BHYAH
CgD
Abb •
SMA
kMA
AT
(ns Ins.)
(ns T)nt.)
W
IT
r*
Gen.
(ns Tht.)
SVA
(ns l)nt.)
A NAN
n
c 9
d8°
W
•s
coq coq
•s
*
Ixt*;
t: hmi
SUIN’
K
a.su
EC HU
» 0
W
Vor.
A A
A
(as Num.)
(«*> N<,m.)
Tates s Sanskrit Grain mar, page 409.
Digitized by v^-ooQle
Compared with Sanskrit. 5?
v (6.) N">u!i3 in a final; Neuter.
Singular. Plural.
Pali.
Sanskrit,
Pali.
Sanskrit.
•
*
0?
Tfw
Nom. v
V
AM
AM
♦
•
4
Tfiff
Acc. N
N
Xni
is I
08'
08 c8
d8’
cS
<•>
W O
Vo?
w
SMiN
BMl
SMIX,
mo d usually
e.w a~e h'
found in manuscripts iii Uurniah,
for tie locative s
ingular.
While there are many point* of resemblance, it will be see'*
that the difference* betw*een Pali and Sanskrit aro very consider-
able. In the masculine singular they agree in the accusative, ia-
strumentive, genitive, one fonn of the locative, and one form of
the vocative. In the plural they are nearly alike in the ablative,
genitive, and one form of the locative ; and in the nominative, and
accusative singular and plural of the neuter they are identical.
In other instances however they differ widely. In Pali the
ablative plural ia the seme as the instrumentive, while in Sanskrit
it is the same as the dative, from which it differs in Pali ; and the
dative and geuitive, both singular and plural, are the same in Pa-
li, while they differ in Sanskrit. Stork* makes the dative and
genitive in Pali to differ, and gives aya in this declension for the
dative singular, identical with the Sanskrit ; but this is correct on*
ly as an exception The rule is that dya marks the dative sin-
gular of feminine forms, but not masculines ; and the declension
which has aya for the dative makes the genitive also in ay a.
Kachchayano how ever in the 58th rule of his Second Book f
gives some exceptions, in which after bases in a nenter. the dative
singular is made by aya ; but only when signifying /or. These ex-
ceptions £achcLayatio illustrates in the following sentence.
ssogoob, cScoooo, oqsTioo caoo^cxxx)^ qcg)
at thuya, ' sukhdya d-3 oa ma/i icssdnan , buddho
(JCODCOO gOg;CB. lole w P a M aU
j- 1 1 0
‘‘CUUMMATIC.® PALIC/E specimen aifcerum,” page 7.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
*<>0
Second Dt'dension.
‘ For tho we'l being, for the advantage, for the happiness of
men and dovJts, Buddha was manifested in the world.”
Th e correspondences between the Pali and the Sanskrit de-
clinat ions though more numerous, are not mor3 striking, than the
correspondences between the Pali and the classical languages.
In all the masculine declensions in Greek, 9 is tbe final of
the nominative singular, and according to Kachchayauo, si was
the original form in Pali. The neuter nominative singular, both
Greek and Pali, is marked by n ; and all the accusative singulars
it Greek end in n, and so they do in Pali. The genitive singular
of the third declension in Greek is os, in Pali it here is ssa 9 anl
originally sa in Kachjhayano’s table, and on Asoko’s inscriptions
The genitive plural always ends in on in Greek, and in Pali al-
ways in an. So the mark of the Latin ablative plural ib:is 9 has
its counterpart in the Pali elhl.
The feminine forms of § 95 —100 furnish a second clearly
eharaqferizcd declension. The terminations are given below.
.§
135.
Nouns in d i % u u
Singular.
feminine.
Plural.
Pali. Sanskrit.
Pali.
COCO
Sanskrit.
“Num.
A I
i v € X 1 in
TO
yXii
*-•
•
COCO
W-
Ace.
N
N *
TO
YAH
GO
-OOD ^TT
c8 08
fit:
Ins.
YA
HI BUI
BHIH
42
3 T
Dat.
YAI
K AN
BHYAH
• ••
WT*‘
Abb
•••
YAH
i<« •••
(as Ins.)
(as Daf.)
wf
Gen.
(as JMt.)
NAN
... uo *T
I 7
Loc.
c.
... VAN' YAN
•v
s u
su
Voo.
E •
&C, E &C.
(ds Nt.ia.)
(as NomJ)
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Th i rd Dec h n s ion.
Cl'
The five oblique eases of the singular are the same in Pali;
while they all differ in Sanskrit, but the difference is only in the
vowel, the consonant ?/ is the principal part of the termination in
both Ituguages. In Pali when the base ends in <f, the y of the
termination his a short, but when it ends in any other vowel, the
H of the y is Ion a distinction no" mile m Sanskrit. The Pali
has a second fjrm for the locative i;i y*n, knd this, it will be seen
ii identical with the Smsk-it form.
The forms in § 101 — 103. r fiord a third wetl defined decbiu
Fion, in which the root, out of the nominative case, if increase 1
by a consonant, like many nouns of the third declension in Greek.
S.mskrit nouns that end in consonants are disposed of, in Pali
in two ways. One class adds the vowel a to the consonant, au:I
1 hen follows the First Decc.isijn. T “a door”, in Pali
is diedr
s‘n
mdsa , “a
j. In fomo instances, as vui*, Pali
nth”, the Sanskrit has the Pali form also, uta*i
Another class drops the consonant in the nominative case, but
introduces it in the oblique cases. Such aie the nouns that ap-
pear in § 101 — 103.
§ 136. Nouns increasing in the oblique case*.
S’n^u’ar. Plural.
I’uli;
0
fcaiickr.t.
Pali.
c — 0
Sanskrit. .
•
•
Nom.
k A
•
9
0
AH
Acc.
s
K
(,w Nam.)
(a* Norn.)
0
T
cc8 ccB
fa:
Ins.
X
A
Km EBHI
BHIII
c — 0
•v
W
Dat
0
K
«
As ah
JBHYAII
Abl.
(as Ins.)
•
AH
(•■is If!*.)
(✓?.* Dat.)
f
Gen.
(as Dat.)
(ns Abl)
(a* Dat.
1
As
s
f
ccq Doq
*
3
Lpc*
K
9 0
I
r.sif ass
St
Yce.
N A A
(as Kv'ir;.)
(r.F y< la.)
(as 2 V •)
cl‘2
Digitized by v^.ooQle
c*> CharjctvrutU's <f <l<e LirTirskvf.
la IVi ‘‘Lord ’, is fihfujarat in Sanskrit,*
and ^ viaua , “mind” is
}nan^i in Sanskrit They
be'ong to the cdass of nouns, denominated by V.rx Mid'cr, ‘‘Nouns
with chang«<ble bases.” Thus />?*&/«,' “a mule, has’ two bases,
-puma, and pumdna. In Sanskrit 1 1 is word has three
qo
bases, jj pumaTis/ pum, -pirns, ami an g is
found in two^whi :li does uol appear in lAili, where it signifies
‘‘male," and not “man", as sometimes defined in Fan^krit.
In this declension there is a c’o. er. reseinlfance lotwcrntho
f*aU and the Sanskrit, than in the others, but there is a wide dif-
ereace in the dative and genkivo. The Pali .to.) ha* more tbnr.s
han the Sanskrit, especially the third declension In the siu-
;ul>r the nVtPive has two different-'TorinsV the locative throe, and
the 'vocative two. In the pin) al- ; it-<,ha$ three forms for the instrn-
mer.tive and ablative, and two for the locative, while in each case
the Sanskrit bad bub one form...
Were all the Pali nouns comprised in the above three classes,
the propriety of dividing them into three declensions wou’d be un-
questioned, end the dedensuns migtt be distinguished, by the ge-
nitive singular, os in Greek, thus:
I Declension, genitive singular ends in ssa.
II ... ... TA
III ... ... O
But there are several other classes of nouns which it is not
so clear w hat disposition had best be made of them. Thus mas-
culines in ?, i\ «, t/, § 91 — 94,. occilate between the first and third
declension*, like many objects in the kingdom of nature, which
teem to claim relationship with two families, standing where the
•Wilson •'deHnes ^ blwguvav, ‘‘One of the generic tit 1^9
of a « :r Junta duiiicd ^a 0 c.’ > la Pali, 33^0) hhagaru de-
clined Co* in § 102. with a second base ODOOCX) bhagnvaia is
on*- of the ti ks of G udama, -and it is fiitihd tl u; fe lined inlhe
ii5scvi| ti >n afByriUi, whore it .read.*:
- J - t
r J ,\ A A u [) 1 p/ .b A h/niytfcufd htnlhena hints 'te
1
“WVs s x o\Y.i by th Lord B i T a."
Digitized by v^.ooQle
H ofomdites.
(53
tiro circles, touch e*ch ether. They might be intde to constitute
a separate declension, or they might be clashed as a section of either
the first cr third. Tlioy are hcic placed in the first declension with
which they agree in every case, in one form in which they are
declined, excepting the instrumentive and ablative singular, and the
nominative and accusative plural ; and sometimes they arc the same
In the ablative.
They agree with the third decleus’on in making the install-’
hu nave sad ablative in a, ar.d in having a second foini cf the da-
tive ai d genitive singular in o, besides the regular one in #wi.
They correspond to Heteroclites in Greek. When declined with
the genitive singular in sm> they are of the first declension, but
whin they make it in o, they are of the third. It is? only neces-
sary to note that besides the forms given in 8 91—94, there are
also found:
8 137. Redundant forms of masculines in /, r, ?/, w.
(a,) Dative and genitive singular.
3<g£^o c8og|cy> oooq^ii^o
agghio dandiuo bhikUhuno my am O/nhui
Stork gives o as the only termination of the genitive sing'i'
lar. in these ncuns, and omits it in the. dative altogether.*
*8^
aggistnd
os§yo
(6.) Ablative singukr.
dondlsmd bhikLhnstnd tayainbhd^md
3a£<$0 ODCO^.|[^D
agylkmd dandihmd bJukkhuhmA sayambhuhmd
In like manner many nouns of the third declension, besides
the forms given in the paradigms, § 101 — 105, have redundan t
<oims in the singular conformed to the declensio/i of p’lrUa, § 89.
For exunp’e; nrt;/ri, Mi>7D, declined oil the bise mini, wrlthou, ti-
k.'ng is declined:
Ins. mauctui
Abb
CJ ^ 0 Ca.‘y(^0
Dat. Gen.
manasmd
C^COO
man ah nrd
*Seu ’ k c ham>i AT iC.t: halic.& spoebnm alt3rum,” pig) 2 d.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
u
No *jm i>/ rcUtionsfop.
§ 133. BKjgai'd A LORD, besides th 9 forms given in •§ 102,
fiS also d x-lined, out of the nominative case, oh tbe base lhag amnia,
like purisd of tha first declension, thus:
Singular. Plural.
Noxxl
ooocl
bhagavd
oooo^ oooo^p
bhaqavanU bhogavantd
OOOOS^
bha-gavunU
ooooc^cB oaooc^cB
bhaga vautehi bhugavartubhi
COOO£p$ *
bhaga vautdnan
cooo&cgl oooo&'p
Abl. b h agava ntasin d ... vantaJuud (as Instrutmn&ce.')
ODOO&cg’
Loc. bhagavantnumin
oooo£§ oo'oo 7^ oooo
bhagavantahmi bh agar ante bhagavautesxk
ooool oooo oooo
0500^
Acc. bhagavantun.
ODOOC^
Ins. bhagavwnicna
ZQOOfeXX)
D. G. bhagaraiitassa,
Yoc. bhagavd bh agava bhaga van (<« Nominativs.)
Nouns increasing by r, or that have a second base in which r
appears, form a complete class in themselves, fcnd might be treat-
ed as a separate declension, but there seems to be no sufficient rea-
son for separating them from the third.
§ 13$. Besides the fbrms given in the tablet, certain noons
of agency are declined after the form of satthii a teacher; as:
katiu A DOER. r\rrru vattu A SPEAKER.
°°88L
°88t
These nouns have a redundant form of the dative and geni-
tive singular in ssa, like the first declension, as:
ooggjooo
smith us
to or of A TEACnEU.
00^1003
kattu&s*
A DOER.
8oq'oo
pitussa
A FATHER.
wooqooo
mat mm
A MOTHER.
cooqcoo
bhdtussa
A H KOI HER.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Peculiar Forme.
65
§ 140. Occasionally the ablative singular is made by ito . as:
OOcBoODO mat i to , f.ora a mother,
8c£bcOD fitlto, ... A FATHER,
OODcS^COD ii< ‘ 7o > ••• A brother,
8SQCO0 dhtiito , ... A DAUGHTER,
^c8cB^COl duhitiio , ... A DAUGHTER.
Clough declines A mother, in the singular number, oil
the model of the second declension, making the instrumentive, da-
tive, genitive, and ablative, rndtayd *, but no such forms are given
by Kachchayano, and they have probably been introduced into the
Wguage since his grammir was written.
In the Pali books the nominative pluial is sometimes used
for the singular, as.*
QOC^QDCC|0 may y an maro “My mother.”
(X^Q^OOOCp *w/?ya n maro “Thy mother.”
These nouns of relationship in Sanskrit make their finals in
?i, while the nouns of agency correspond to Sanskrit
nouns made by the affix tri.
c
§ 141. There is so little diversity in the fem nine forms in
§ 95-100, that no exception can be taken to making them a sin-
gle declension. The apparent irregularity of mati wisdom ia the re-
sult of permutation. The final i of the base is elided, and the y
of the affix is compounded with the last consonant of tho base.
So also, among others;
OOo8 pathavi the earth, rati pleasure, with
ooo oo oooqp oooqf G[oqp G\pq\
yd yan become palhabyd pathalyan ratyd ratyan
§ 142. Many feminines in ut are formed by the affix ni be-
ing added to masculine, as:
c8og t
OO
oo
bhikkhu a priest bhikk/uuu a priestess hatti an elephant haULu
A FEMALE ELEPHANT.
•Clough’s Gramm vr, page 42.
13
Digitized by
Google
G6
Tcritrs JirrffvFnntM.
S« nil me s tlie h $t m.v el c f ll e n a; nilii e f uflcrs cl ai«ge be-
f< rc ll c t flix is appended, as:
oooqco
mdfu/ft A MATERNAL UXCI.B
oococB
yahtiynti MASTER OF A LOUSE
C;3^ rn >' A K, »0
WIFE OF nCC'LE
(jocqcoo^
mat mar t
OOCOCO$
(ja hoy at (ini MISTRESS OF A H0U8I
cp8? rdji'n* A QUIRE
§ 143. In the Pali books, tie masculine termination of the
locative singular is sometimes added to tie feminine form. Thus
^(jq niriyan and niriyahmi t4 In liell.”
are found on the same page.
§ 144. Sometimes the long vc.wel of the termii aticn yd is
dropped, a*:
%)OC ^^OOCCJT^^OD fhhn HfJ/jjd hhorda tnthifnn
“ihe sixth, the division of the kings, is fiwlid.”
§ 145. The irreoulaiities cf the irregular ncuns are accoun-
ted for by supposing the txislatce of two or moie bases. Fome
cases are formed regularly from ere brse, end otl <i cares hem
tlie other base, cr bases. Thus fcahhi A fbieid, l as two basts,
Oo3 00%)1 sa khi and mkhd.
Occasionally there are forms found fiom both roots in the
same case. Thus the nominative and accusative plural of $aW,
have both ^)3 c^D OO^lc^O folhino and sakhdno.
§ 146. Brahma is irregular only in that it increases by »,
in some of its cases instead of by n, and has tv. o bases,
0CXD CtO brahma and brahmana .
§ 147, a. di begikhivg, has 11 regular foi ms in the locative,
which has the following f rms:
sol 9° oolS§ aflcrsl
dlin ddikvti ddivmt ado
§ 148. Kamma a deep, and a few other nettns, hr.ve a form
with v in tlie instrument ive singular as:
learn mund 0 | CtDO ^ jra ^ mu -^
oogip
“By a <\\d.”
“By a Brahmin.’*
Digitized by v^.ooQle
67
Irregularities of the Vocal ’m.
§ 149. ]n tlic plural, the vocative is uniformly the same as
the nominative, and most frequently has a form like it in the sin-
gular, always in the tables, -vs hen the vocative is not given. But
ncuns that have a long vcwel in the nominative care, have also a
second form of the vocative with a short vowel, as:
Nom.&
00^ 000
q«o
^88°
S?o8
°Tod
coq
Yoc. bhagard
bhdtd
j>uma
satthd
itti
vedu
00 oo
OO CO
qo
°°88
coq
Voc. him gar a
bhdta
j'VJna
sattha
itti
vedw
On the other hand neuters that mike the nominative singular
in a final enuswaia have a io:m of the vocative with a long vowel,
as: Nom. qq qI rupan manan Voc qq! OM fupd mand
§ 150. In most languages the nemir alive case is regarded
as the base of the noun, but in Pali, as in Sanskrit, the nominative
case is usually formed fi om the base, and differs from it like the
other cases. Thus the lase pvrisa fours its nominative putiso,
and mpa makes rupan.
In forming compound words, the base and not the nominative
case is used, and it is the tare and not the nominative case that
has to be looked up in Samkiit dictionaries. A Pali dictionary
might be appropriately con piled on tl c s: me principle, hut the ex-
isting native Pali dictionaries insert the word in the nominative,
and ignore the base altogether.
The root to which nonns are referred differ usuaDy both from
the nominative case and tie tare cn which it is declined. Thus
Kachchayano derives
8oq ol £^cq
pitu A father, from pd to watch over, and the affix ritu
QOoq qd^> epeq
9 ndtu A MOTHER, ... 7»*W TO LOVE, ... rdtll
In this way most words are traced to a root and an affix, but
many of the derivations are imaginary. The affixes used in the
formation of words are very numerous, and will come under son-
side) aticu in a future chapter on derivation.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER V.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives are declined like nouns of the same terminations.
Thus sabpa , (§ HO.) is declined, in the masculine, like purisd
(§99.); in the feminine like kanyi (§ 95 ); and in the neuter like
rupa f§ 90.). So gunavd (§ 111.), in the masculine is like bha^
gavd (§ 102.), in the feminine like lUxdi (§ 98.), and in the neu-
ter like mana (§ 103.).
§ 151. The affix vd, in gunavd, corresponds to Sanskrit
and is used in the formation of many other adjectives, as;
bcdavd POSSESSED OF STRENTH
vat ,
003 61
c8ool
panyava
himavd
WISDOM
FROST AND SNOW
§ 152. Other adjectives, thus declined are formed with
md in the same signification ; corresponding to the Sanskrit particle
oocBol
<j)8«l
§ 153. McAa
satdmd POSSESSED OF cautiousnibss
ruchimd . . . lustre
bcmdhwmd ... RELATIONS
qua?, is declined on the same model.
the masculine singular is
Nom mdhoM maha
QCQ
Acc.
mahavdan
In. Ab.
mahmtd
000003
D. G.
mahato
0000003
Loc.
mabati
ooocB
WOOD
Thus
§ 154. Participles are dBclined like adjectives of the same
finals. In § 112. is a specimen of a present participle declined
like gunavd . Many other participles and participial adjectives are
declined on the model of sabpo , sabpa , sabpan\ like the Greek
pas , pasa, pan ; or the Latin bonus , bona , bonum.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Comparison of Adjectives. gt)
Decrees of Comparison.
K-ichchayano does n,,t <*' itinguish the degrees of comparison,
and they are often use 1, as in Sanskrit, not for comparison but to
denote “excess.*’ Clough says* “It does not appear that they
can he distinguished into the two classes of ‘Comparative, and Su-
perlative.”
§ 155 . These remarks are j istiaed by Kachchayano who writes:
aojoSrooo ocoIcBt*
sabpe inus pdpd ayamimxsan visena pdpoti
olyoo^epii co c^ooocqdji ol8c8cooon 0)8200011
papntn.ro evaa pdpatamo pdpUilso pdpiyo
°' lS -S 31 ’ pdpitho
All these are wicked. Th s one of these by being excccd-
Jngly wicked, is wiaked — taro , So also is wicked — t%ma , wicked
— isika, wicked — iya, wicked — ifha”
COCO g^cSoO cog ov i*ika y or if ha
These particles given by Kachch vyano above are the Sanskrit
Tnw, iyas and ishtha , and since Yates says f “Each
of which may be comparative or superlative”, they -may be admit-
ted as pos .essing the same doable signiiicatlon in Pali. Kachchaya-
no furnishes several examples, a3:
qcirooo qc£cooo qc£:gD
gunata virtuous guniyo gunifho more, or most virtuous
COOO CoScoOD CpSvgD
t ncdhd intelligent mcdhigo medhifho more, or MOST intelligent
§ 156 . Whatever grammarians may say, usage shows that
tor a designates the comparative degree, and tama the superla-
tive, as in Sanskrit and Greek. For example: King Wathandria
says of his Queen Madi,
oSqcgd OQocqcrooj ooooooDqp.tD^ oooooouo
madtto satagunena sahassaguneua satasaha
♦Clough’s Grammar, ptge 93 .
t Yates’ 8 Sanskrit Gramm ir, page 75 .
14
Digitized by
Google
70
iS'W Hafir* Sulfiftfutol.
oooqcao~ cogg^oo^cto ceo 800 occi^
sstujvmvna taljavtjuimiyana went ) tya lardvtt
“1 la n. !M;uii, ly v a hundred-tin es, by a tliousr.nd times, ly
ten then, mu d times is infinite v ! «!an nn»re beloved by me.”
One of Kachcheyano’s example? reads:
0CCO3 sooo^oo ooeoo
fdtnd rtdnnan dassuniyn lamo
“ 0 / wemen the one with a golden 1 ppcarance is the hand-
foment.” • .
§ 157. The con pari tive decree is often made by varan bet-
tki , and the superlative by nttamvn best. TLe ypuug wife of an
o’d Bialmiin is abused thus:
ooog Sgggooo oocq ooccB 880c o<^
yatiran jitmtitm gh?re varati viahantn jiritan varan
“Thou who dwxdlest in tie Louse of an olcl man, death to
tlu© were better than life.” • .
When Way*handr:a gave away his children, it is said:
^18B Q rfdn a vmfiantan 'odd
“He gave the best gift.”
§ 158. When adjectives take /?/</, ?/a, or isika, a final vowel
or affix is dro]>ped as in Sanskrit. 1 lius in the examples given above
cooo coo ooScood
meJhd become* m*dha as
qcooco
qco
medhiyo
qc£coco
gunata ... gnna ... yvtyyo
§ 159. In English a few adjectives, as good and bad; on being
compared change the root, and become better best, and worse worst .
80 in Pali, as also in Sanskrit, when iya and if ha are affixed to
certain a Ijectives, they t kenew bc.ses, a*;
cj> 8 cgo
cnUha
KfiAR vnln (new base)
nedhjo
it edif ho
*8
occoo
ooaBcoco
cocS ego
ayjja
small ' lank
haniyo
lanifo
OOOO
oodScood
oooScgD
ha 4 a
FlUM cdJUa
eudlu yo
fddhifho
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Numerals,
71
Numeral Adjectives.
Cardinal Numbers.
§ 160. The Pali numerals resemble the Sanskrit, and the mi-
nenls of all the Indo- European nations ;yet there are points of
difference throughout. In the large numbers they differ materially.
There is no distinct name for a million, ac there is in Sanskrit.
It is tailed ten hundred thousand. But there is a proper name
for ten millions, and then the enumeration proceeds by periods of
sevens, every seven places of figuies having a distinct name up to
a unit with one hundred and forty ciphers.
In English, ten and one are expressed by eleven, one left after
ten; so by an analogous idiom, nineteen is expressed in Pali by cku-
wivtsa, or twenty less one; and ninety nine by ehmc&ata, or one
hundred less one.
0
1
j
2
?
3
<?
4
0
5
G
6
1
7
O
8
CCOOD
GOOD
Coo
Coo
oko
ekd
ekan OKE (base)
eh a
c§
§ q?o
§ &
dws duve
two dwa duve
did duvi
COCQOD
cBcccod &C$>
$
tayo
tri
tisso tint
THREE tl
ogpesp ©ogoooc eoocoo6 cggn£|
o o\
chattdro
chatuyo chaiasso chattdri
four chain
°63
panycha
FiYK (base)
panycha
GOOD
30
coco SO
so or
chha
SIX
so or chha
oegg
.“89
saita
SHYEST
satta
at ha
EIGHT
atha
6
9 vava mine
OO SCO
10 data TRM
nawa
SCO
aist
Digitized by CjOOQle
72
Numerals from Elfren toTiirty E'ght.
oo-
COOOSOO
J9
cc*o8oo
11
ekadasa
ELEVEN
24
jobisa TWENTY
FOUR
COOOC^CO
00^800
elaraxn
chat n rim
glsoo
JO
oggSoo '
12
dvoadasn
TWELVE
25
paui/chctr&ta
FIVE
ODCjOO
Jff
sog°oo
hdntsa
• . .
26
c hliapbna,
SIX
cv
o
cooqoo
n
oogg8oo
13
terasa
THIRTEEN
27
8 attain* a
SEVEN
°9
«}9*>
JO
xg'800
14
ciuiddasa
FOURTEEN
28
ct{uol*a
EIGHT
03
O 039 OD
je
^>ol8oo
15
pun .fch'vlisa
fifteen
20
navai-isa
NINE
O^DD
Co^cfe' 00
pannaram
...
eku/iatinsa
."X
O t
coolgoo
i
9°
cB"oo
16
8olam
SIXTEEN
80
tinsa THIRTY
Q1
i
90
Cooc8 r oo
17
sattarasa
SEVENTEEN
31
ekatin m
ONE
OO.
23gDC^OO
9 J
c 88§'°°
18
atlidrasa
EIGHTEEN
32
dtvettinss
TWO
oe
^olsoo
eog§ J cx>
19
navadasa
NINETEEN
bdttinsa
A
-+>
OO
8
99
000^*00
...
fihunavisa
33
tettinsa
three
JO
8oo
99
oo^c8°oo
20
W TWENTY !
34
chatutinsa,
four
ooocB
90
35
panychatinsa
FIVE
JO
Coo8oa
9?
oog^co
21
ekaA'isa
ONE
3 5
chhattinva
SIX
JJ
00800
91
ooggcB'oo
22
bdvlsa
TWO
37
sattatinga
SEVEN
J?
<000800
9°
33 gc £°00
23
THREE '
38
apituma
EIGHT
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Numerals from Thirty Nine to Sixty Seven.
78
^ocB'co
39 navatima thirty nine
QO^Ogpdd
9°
40
ehuiiachattaii
OggDcScO
chattalisa
FORTY
ONE
TWO
. . . chuttdlisa
oodo 8 oo
tdlisa
90 cooogjpc8oo
41 ehachattdllsa
9 j c§oq 0 dc 8 cx)
42 dwechittaUsa ...
OOOQQDOO
bdchattalua
99 cooogpc§oo
43 techattaUsa ... three
99 ocqog0oc8oo
44 dmlactiatt lisa ... FOUR
93
45 panyckac/uittallsa ... five
O0goooc8oo
paaydiatdlisa
9<S oooggDoSoo
46 chh wkattdilsa
9^ CXDg0COgQO-'ScX)
47 satidckattdusa
90 33 gO 3 gDc 800
48 at hoc hat tails a
96 ^ooooocSoD
49 nuvadiatdtis 1
GOtfOgOOO
ehunapanydsa . . .
0£0000
50 paaydsa fifiy
six
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
30 cooo^ooo
51 ehapanydsa FIFTY ONE
3 j CgOgOOD
52 dwepaaydsa ... TWO
^ ^ COOO0DDOO
53 tcpanyasa ... THRER
39 OO^O^DOO
54 chatupaayasa ... FOUR
33 OQgOgOCQ
55 pany ehapanydsa ... FIVE
3 S 000^0000
56 ckhapanyasa ... SIX
31 CXDQ0O^DCO
57 sattapanyasa ... SEVEN
30 33 gO£)D
58 athapanyd ... eight
3g CjOO^DOOO
59 nopanydsa ... nine
doq^oo^
ekumisathi
So oo§
60 sa/Ai sixty
So coooo§
61 eha8atlii ... ONE
ej $co§
62 dwdsathi ... two
S9 coooo§
03 ... THREE
(?9 ooqoo§
64 chatasathi ... FOUR
g_ 3 o eB°°8
65 panychasathi ... FIVE
(s(s 2000§
66 dihasafhi ... six
(?q oog0oo§
67 satUvsatkl ... seven
15
Digitized by
Google
74
Numerals from S/.rfy Ei'/lf fo Xhiefy Xhie.
I
Co
'O^
COQ30o8cB
68
Ofhusnflu SIXTY EIGHT
83
tea sit! MGHTY
THREE
<?s
$>ooo§
|°9
ooqcpoScB
69
iulV«8<J$Jii
NINE
- 84
chaturd*fti
FOUR
' c^ooggcB
;°D
o03do8cB
eJiunasaftah ...
. . .
85
2>o uyehdsttl
FIVE
1°
ooggcB
Off
oogoo8c£
70
sail.tl SEVENTY
86
ch halos' it)
SIX
°1
oogpoScB
sat tori
87
satiudf-
SEVEN
io
COOOOQ0cB
OO
sogooScB
71
ekasaftat*
GNF
88 *
r
EIGHT
1J
gtoggcfi
og
72
dicasattati
TWO
89
NINE
cco ooggcB
1 £0
f>qc8
73
Ip - at tail
THREE
90
'/r - ninety
19
©OqOOQ0c8
so
Cooj>o|c8
74
chat a sat tat i
FOUR
91
ONE
13
o 0goog0cB
ej
Cgf,°[c8
75
panycliasattati . . .
FIVE
92
(hn:u>a ati
TWO
a®
3ODOQ0cB
e?
coo|>olcB
76
C hhasattati
SIX
93
ten >> <u>
THREE
11
oog^ooggcB
S 9
ooq^o[«8
77
saUasattati
SEVEN
94
chatunucuU
FOUR
1°
t^googgcB
®3
78
a : ; ixattati
EIGHT
95
'panyduD/oamti ...
FIVE
1®
aoooggcQ
eff
30^>0|c8
79
V/-'/. ...V'/// itl
NINE
96
chhanavuti
SIX
caq^oScB
SI
°ogq^° L cB
97
sattauari/ti
SEVEN
OO
t»o8cB
go
^g^O[c8
80
a EIGHTY
98
athanai'vti
EIGHT
oo
CooooScB
es
j>0^>0(c8
81
p] ilfi it /
ONE
99
navanavnti
NINE
oj
82
gioScB
chudidti
TWO
Coq^oooo
ekuiuusata
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Numerals , One Hundred and Upwards.
75
O A
ooo
OOOO
O
O
OQ3 coco
o
o
Stffrm ONE HUNDRED
500
panycha sat an
FIVE HUND.
COO OOOO
Coo
QCOCOO
... -
ekasatan
600
cliha satan
SIX
JOO
CgOOOO
900
ooggoooo
200
dwesa tan two
700
sat ta satan
SEVEN ...
^OO
COO OOOO
OOO
GQgOOOO
300
tesatan three . . .
800
athasatan
ETGHT ...
9 OO
OO 90 OOO
600
^00006
400
chatusatan four . . .
900
nwvasatan
NINE . . .
oooo
1000
ooooco
100000
oooooooo
10000000
SO=} OOOO
d’jhsasatan
0 )00000000$
satasahassan
coooB
*. *-
koti
oo oooo 5
sahassan a thousand
lakkhan
«jcs>
ku$e
A LACK
TEN MILLIONS
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OQOOD^
100000000000000 /w/.vrfi
oooooooooooooooooooooo COOO^O'-OOO
1000000000000000000000 ht'ppakui
K HUNDRED BILL
?
TEN TRILLIONS
^>0^00 9 ^oqCO 0 9QCOgl00C(8 © 8 |L <1 WgflOO °
^C|g|[9 Q 92000$ oo 3200 oo oj
C'ooooog.oo 09 0oc6 09 oqqs 03 o© qcoo
£|oO 01 OOX>D$ 00 OOODOOOOO^ o@ OXOC^OCfl jo
The names given above designate numbers, that have multi-
ples of se ven ciphers after a unit, equal to the numbers set against
the several names. Thus:
nahutan has a unit with 28;
ninnahutan ... 35.
akkhobJuim ... 42.
hindu ... 49.
ambutan _ ... 56.
nirabpudan ' 63*
ahahan 70.
apapan .... 77.
at at an, . . 84,
sokandhikan has a unit with 91.
uppalan . . . 98,
lumudan ... 1 05.
paduman ... 112 .
punt civilian ... 119.
kathanan ... 126.
mahakathanan ... 133.
asangkJiyeyyan . 140,
i. e. “an innumerable number.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
76
Ordinals •
There is much diversity in writing the numerals between
twenty and ninety. All the forms given above with a final a are
often written with a final n, and always so in the nominative.
Twenty is visa, visan, visatan , and vtsaii. Thirty follows the same
analogy, as, tisa, tinsa , Usan, tinsati , and tisati. Forty is written
chatialisa , chattaUsan , chuttaMsa-san , chottdlisa—san, and talisa-lisaih.
And fourteen, besides the form given, is also written choddasa ,
and chatudasa. Sixty is sometimes written with chha, chhathi ,
and the v in nava , nine, is occasionally changed to o, as novi-
sati, twenty nine, and nopanyasa , fifty nine.
There is also a want of uniformity in writing some of the
large numerals, as: kofippakofi , and kotipakofi ; and akkhobhani ,
and akhobham-bhani ; apapan , ababan , and apaban ; nirappudan ,
and nirabpudan at at an, and aiatan ~ sokandhakcm, and sogandha-
kan ; uppalan, and vpalan ; kumuddan , and kumadan ; and asang .
kheyya,n-yan-yani.
§ 161. The first five numerals are declined in § 113-117. Above
five the numerals are of all genders, whatever may be the gen-
der of the form in which they are declined. From five- to eigh-
teen inclusive, they are declined like panycha five, in the plural
number, as given in § 115. All the numerals between eighteen
and ninety nine are declined in the singular number only. Eka-
navtsaii nineteen is an example, (§ 118.) Kachchayano says
from twenty to ninety inclusive they are of the feminine gender.
One hundred and upwards are neuter, excepting those that have
a final i, which are feminine. They are usually declined in the
singular, like ekunasata in § 116, but they take occasionally plu-
ral terminations.
Ordinal Numbers.
§ 162. Above four the Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals
by affixing the particle
ma, corresponding
to the Sanskrit tt»
og«
pathama
FIRST
^cBoo
dutiya
SECONB
OOCDOO
tatiya
thire
chatutta
FOURTH
003°
panychama
FIFTH
SOgO
chhathama
SIXTH
ODQQ»
sattama
SEVENTH
33gO
athama
EIGHTH
navama
NINTH
sooy
dasama
TENTH
ELEVENTH
glsoow
dwadmama
TWELVTH
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER VI.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
The Pali pronouns are nearly related to Sanskrit, and more
remotely to the pronouns of all the Indo-European languages.
Personal Pronouns.
5 163. The two first personal pronouns are treated together
by Kachchayano, and he refers them to allied bases, to ahma I,
and tuhma thou. So the Greek igo and sw, the Latin ago and
tu, the English 1 and Thou, though apparently widely apart, are
made from the same base. *The declensions are given in § 120,
121, and show a striking resemblance to the Greek, but they con-
tain redundant forms in no and vo, corresponding to the Latin
nos and vos .
The Sanskrit has also nah and vah, but their usage differs
from Pali. In Sanskrit they are used in three cases only, but in Pa-
li they are used in five, being found in the nominative and the in-
atrumentive in which they are never used in Sanskrit. It is note
worthy too that Kachchayano gives examples to illustrate their
usage in these two cases, while he gives none for the other cases ;
as if he were pointing out a usage that might be questioned.
Here the Pali, as in some other instances, is nearer the Latin than
the Sanskrit is ; but the ablative is wanting in Pali, though com-
mon in Latin. If formed regularly, it would be nobhi and vobhi ,
very like nobis and vobis.
§ 164. The Third Personal Pronoun is referred to the base
ia. It is often used as a demonstrative, and occasionally as a de^
finite article, but more like the Greek than the English, and the
declension in § 122. exhibits a great resemblance, in form, to the
Greek Article. A redundant form, out of the nominative case, is
found in na/n y which does not appear in Sanskrit ; but the poetic
nin, in Greek appears to be the same word.
§ 165. The word which Kachchayano refers to bhavxnta , used
in respectful addresses, like “Your Lordship’’, may be regarded as
an Honorific Second Personal Pronoun. It is declined like bha*
gavdy § 102. but is irregular in some of its casos as:
Digitized by AjOOQle
78
Honorific Pronoun.
MASCULINE.
Singular.
Plural.
coo
COOOQ^p COODC^ CDOC&)
Nom.
bhavan
bhonto bhonte bhavanto
°°°<i
Acc.
bhavantan
OOOOOD
Ins.
bhavatd
COOOCOOD
D. G
bhoto
feminine — Singular
00 COOOGOOO
cooocB
Voc.
bhante bhoto
blioti
It is most frequently met in the Pali books in the vocative,
bhante , which though given by Kachchayano in the singular only,
is used in both the singular and plural. It occurs six times in
the short Asoka inscription found at By rath, but was misunder-
stood by Prof. Wilson, who rendered it verbally.* It is used by A-
soka in addressing the Buddhist assembly precisely as it is used in
the examination for the Buddhist Priesthood, where Spiegel ren-
ders it VENERAB1LES.
Possessive Pronouns
§ 166. The Possessive Pronouns have no independant bases of
their own, but are made from tho genitive cases of the personal
pronouns, as:
COO©^^ vachanan “The word of me” ; i. e. My word
V$Q<£ ma van mama ‘ ‘The mind of me” ; i. e. My mind.
COOpPOcB fefiijdti “The relatives of thee”; i. e. Thy relatives.
OOoSoCJC^DSl^ tavapituno danan “The gift of the father of
thee” ; i. e. Thy father.
©803°^ dhammanychussa “And the law of him”; i. e. His law.
<1 • o
93(^000© O O aJtmdkan mansan “The flesh of us”;i. e. Our flesh
o •
OCJ(^0OO©^> tuhmakan dhanan “The property of you”; i. e. Your
property.
* Journal Royal Asiatic Society: Vol. XVI, page 361.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Reflexives and Demonstratives.
79
Reflexive Pronouns.
§ 167. The reflexive pronoun silp, is made from attd
33890
which is declined like puma §101. Thus:
attano brahmaniya nessami
“For myself [and] the Brahminee I will lead away.”
Sometimes it is made by the indeclinable sayan 00 OQ
svayam in Sanskrit.
The reflexive possessive pronoun own, is made by salca
svaka in Sanskrit, as
OOOOOODCO^>
sakabhdvena
“By his own existence.”
It is often made also by attd as:
^83 C * OC i83 C<7D ^ ^ OOOO °gO attano jputtake ddse katwd
“Making the children of himself slaves” ; i. e. His own children.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
§ 168. There are three demonstrative pronouns whose declen-
sions are given in § 123—125.
Eta is formed from the third personal pronoun by prefixing e.
Max Muller says the corresponding Sanskrit pronoun signifies
“This (very near)”. In the books it is often used in a manner to
justify such a definition in Pali, but again it is frequently used in
precisely the same connection that the other demonstratives are,
and in the Burmese translations it is constantly rendered by
tho THAT.
Kachchayano gives ima as the base of another demonstrative,
which in Sanskrit is referred to idam . It is in very general use
for this .
The third demonstrative has amu for its base, but in Sanskrit
it is referred to ados. Clough defines it this , and Max Muller says
of the Sanskrit word “ That (mediate).” In the Burmese trans-
lations it is uniformly rendered by eemee, “Such a person as has
been mentioned.”
The third personal pronoun is also in frequent use as a de-
monstrative, that or this ; more often that.
The forms of etad and idam on the base ena in Sanskrit, are
not found in Pali.
Digitized by v^,ooQle
80
Pdative, Interrogative, and Indefinite Pronouns .
Belative Pronoun.
§ 16 $. The relative pronoun y a, who, or which, is declined like
the third personal pronoun, by rejecting t and interring y, (§126),
much as the relative in Greek is made from the article by rejecting t.
The relative is often repeated in the signification of wh oxvee
whatever, as :
CtX)D^CODDqgDC^O^ y €8U y esu ^^ nesu
“In what, what place,”; i. e. In whatever place.
Interrogative Pronoun.
§ 170. The interrogative pronoun kin , who? which? what? is
declined, excepting in the nominative singular neuter, like the rela-
tive, substituting k for y : (§127.)
The interrogative which? or what? is sometimes made by
adding the comparative affix tara , or tamx to the base ka, as:
OO00€| OOOQG
katara katama katara katama
WHICH? WHICH? WHICH?
In Sanskrit ’ katara signifies “Which of two?” and Clough gives
thehame definition ; but this is not the exclusive usage in Pali, as :
ogcyDOoqcg^CQQ kwa katarasmin suite “Where? In
which, or what rule?” where the rules are numerous.
Indefinite Pronouns.
§ 171. By adding the particle chi to the interrogative kin, the
indefinite pronoun any one, or some one is formed, as:
COOD<
i 8 c 8 ^S}c
]CCXX) kochihinapuriso “Any, or some outcast.”
The relative ya is sometimes prefixed to the above in the
same signification, as:
coo$>coo$>8cco$> $>OOOQO yena kena chi tena nahatd
“Have the y been taken away by any one, or some one?”
Occasionally it signifies every, as:
idha yan kinycld atthi
“There is any thing, i. e. every thing, in this place.”
iulra either, OTHER, anya another, anyamanyan, each other,
are a few other indefinite pronouns.
§^003
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER Til.
VERBS.
The Pali verb is nearly allied to the Sanskrit, but has few-
er forms, and is characterized by greater simplicity.
Voice.
§ 172. The Pali has distinct foims for two voices, like the *
Greek, and like the Greek too, it expresses three voices by these
two sets of forms.
The Pali names of the voices express distinctly the significa-
tion of each. The first is ;
O par ass a padani
Fiom parassa , the genitive or dative case of para another; and
padani , the plural ot pada A word : i. e. 44 Words to, or for ano-
ther/’— Transitive Verbs, or the Active Voice. The other is ;
attano padani
From attano the genitive, or dative ca^e of attd self, and pada ,
as before; i. e. “Words for self- Intransitives, aLd the Middle,
and Passive Voices. The Passive however is distinguished by tak-
ing y before the terminations in the conjugational tenses.
This is the theory of the Voices, but in practice the Middle
form may often have a transitive signification, like deponents in
Latin; so that active verts may be considered as conjugated in
both forms ; the passive however in ;he Attanopadani only, and
then distinguished, in part, by the characteristic y .
Mood.
§ 173. Pali verbs have four moods, the indicative, the optative
the conditional, the imperative, and the infinitive. The benedictive
and subjunctive moods do not exist in Pali.
The conditional is used to express that section of the op-
tative, in other languages, in which the act has not been perform-
ed through some difficult y being in the way. It supplies the place
of the subjunctive, in the clause with if, with which it is intro-
duced, as:
COOD CO COO COD’. 92COc8cOOD SCo8pCOO
so die elcan ydnan alabhissd agachchhissd
“If he had had a mean 3 of cmveyaice, he w mid have goie/’
17
Digitized by v^.ooQle
#2 Trust, Number, uitd Person,
Tense.
§ 174. There are five tenses in Pali, the present, the perfect,
the imjeifect, the aorist, and the future. One less than the San-
skrit which has two futures. The three preterites correspond to
the perfect, imperfect, and aorist of Greek verbs. Like Greek,
the perfect reduplicates the first syllable, and the imperfect and
aorist take a augment. These three tenses Kachchayano calls:
OCCpOgD
paroklchd hiyyattani ajjatam
Kachchayano says that Parokkha denotes past time undistin-
guished, indefinite. The same tense in Sanskrit with the corre-
sponding name, paroksha , is denominated by Yates the perfect,
and defines it “What was done at a very remote period.” Ben-
fey also calls it the perfect ; Williams, the second preterite, and
says it has reference to an eTent done and past at some definite
period.” Max Muller writes of it: “The reduplicated perfect de-
notes something absolutely past.”
Hiyyattam is the Pali name of the imperfect tense. It is de-
fined as a definite past, and “denotes time past before any portion
of the current day/’ according to Clough and Yates ; but “time
recently past before yesterday,” according to Alwis.
The aorist, ajjatani , is defined by Kachchayano as time past
which is “near.” Alwis says it is “the preterite of to— day,” and
quotes native authority to show that it commences at from three
to five o’clock in the morning. These nice distinctions of the
Grammarians do not appear in practice. What Williams writes
of the Sanskrit is equally true of the Pali ; “The three preterites
are used without much distinction.”
Number.
§ 175. The Pali verbs have the same numbers as the nouns,
singular and plural, lacking the Sanskrit and Greek dual.
Person.
§ 176. There are three persons, first, second, and third; but
Kachchayano enumerates them in reverse order, and calls the third
the first, the second person the middle, and the first person the prin-
cipal, or highest.
In modem Greek grammars it is common to precede the pa-
radigms with the terminations of the various moods and tenses,
but this is precisely the mode of teaching grammar which existed
anterior to a l Kuropean grammars.
Digitized by AjOOQle
Verbal Terminations.
Terminations of Verbs.
§ 177. Kachchayano gives the following terminations for the
voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons of all verbs.
Active V oice — Parassa paddni.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person,
8
d8
cB
Sin.
mi
*i
ti
<9
00
®i>
Plu.
ma
tha
cmti
PERFECT TENSE.
79
C
79
Sin.
a
e
a
9
88
§
Pin'
bma
ttha
u
IMPERFECT TENSE.
79
@
&Q
Sin.
a
0
d
9°
88
§
Plu.
hma
ttha
u
AORIST.
©
d
Sin.
i
0
r
z
88
9
a
Plu.
hma
ttha
un
FUTURE TENSE.
ocodS
OCDcS
ocoS
Sin.
8sami
88081
ssati
OOOOO
00000
Plu. '
ssdma
ssattlia
tsanti
Digitized by v^ooole
34 Verbal Terminations — Active Voice.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
CoqpS
CoqpcS
Ccqi
Sin.
eyy ami
eyyasi
eyyd
Coq po
Coqjooo
Ccxji'l
Plu.
eyyama
eyy at ha
eyijun
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
oo5
COCO
0000
Sin.
ssan
8se
ssd
0000^0
00000
ooooq
Plu.
ssahmd
ssatha
ssansu
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
8
d3
oq
Sin.
mi
hi
tu
O
00
■ mi
Plu.
ma
tha
ant Li
INFINITIVE MOOD.
tun
REMARKS.
The principal letter in all the first persons plural is m, and so
it is In Greek.
The principal letter in all the second persons plural is t , or »
pronounced th in Burmah, precisely as it is in Greek.
The future tense is made from the present by introducing ss
before each termination, and this is the way it is formed in Greek,
excepting that one 8 is inserted instead of two.
The optative, or potential, mood is characterized by taking e, or
eyy before the terminations throughout, and the Greek optative
is formed in a similar manner by taking the connecting vowel i.
And the terminations are all the same as the present tense of the
indicative, excepting the third person plural, which has* a final n,
and a like exception is found in Gre^k.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Yet hal terminations*
85
Middle and Passive Voice — AttanopaMm.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person.
c
COO
COO
Sin.
e
S<3
te
eg
eg
Plu.
hue
live
ante
PERFECT TENSE.
s?
cfflP
88
Sin.
i
tthu
ttha
Q(j
ego
GG[
Plu.
lime
hvo
re
IMPERFECT TENSE.
♦
CO CO
COO
88
Sin.
i or- in
86
ttha
gcoo
9°
88L
Plu.
hmase
hvan
tth ton
AORIST.
90
COO
300
Sin.
a
se
a
eg
c
9
coo
Plu.
lime
hvan
•
FUTURE TENSE.
u
OOO
oooocco
OOOCOO
Sin.
ssan
ssate
OODOCg
ooo?g
000 0^
Plu.
88 a! tube
ssahoe
ssante
18
Digitized by v^ooole
86 Veiial Term i n ations— Middle and Passive Votes #
OPTATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person -
Coqy
CCOOD
COO
Sin.
eyyan
etho
etha
CCXJ| r ^
cuqpcgt
Pin.
eyyahme
eyydhvo
eran
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
00&
ooccoo
00000
Sin.
ssan
stage
88atha
OODO^COQ
OOOr.9
odS*oq
Pin.
88&hmase
ssahve
ssinsu
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
C
oco[ oq
CO
Sin-
•
«w or su
tan
<£D^C00
ego
Pin.
dhmase
hvo
antan
REMARKS.
The first person singular of the imperfect tense is i in all the
copies of of Kachchayano to which I can refer, but it is in in both
Clongh and Alwis. So the third person singular is ta in the books
in Bnrmah, bnt ttha in Clongh and Alwis. Since in both instances
it is more probable that a letter has been dropped by careless tran-
scribers, than that one has been added, the Singalese books are
probably correct, but the books in Burmah agree with Sanskrit.
In the second person plural of the optative, the a is long, as:
eyydhvo , but it is short in Clough and Alwis. The same person
in the imperative varies between 88 and s.
Many of these middle and passive terminations closely resem-
ble those of Greek verbs in mu Take, for instance the present
tense :
Pa.
Gr.
Pa.
Gr.
Pa.
Gr.
Sin.
e
MAI
se
SAI
te
TAI
Pin.
hme
METHA
hve
STHE
ante
ANTAI
In general, though there are many points of difference, all
the terminations are nearly allied to the Sanskrit, and many are
identical.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
' Verb Conjugated.
Paradigm.
f
§178.
The following
is an example of a
Pali verb united
the preceding terminations.
Pacha to cook
; Germ, backen,
to BAKE.
Active Voice. — Fo/rassapaddnu
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
odl8
ooc8
oocB
Sia.
pachdmi
pachasi
pachati
oolo
OOOO
'Pin.
pachama
pochatha
PERFECT TFNSE.
pachanti
OOO
^ooco
GOO
Sin.
papacha
papache
papacha
0089
8
OO
88
ooq
Pin.
papachihma
papachittha
IMPERFECT TENSE.
papachu
3300
ooocol
33000
Sin.
apacha
apacho
apachd
9300^0
3300Qg
33QCJ
Plu.
apachahmd
apachattha
AORIST.
apachu
sco8
33 OQO 0
eoo8
Sin.
apachi
apacho
apachi
SOOOC^O
3300 QQ
Pin.
apachahmd
apachattha
FUTERE TENSE.
apachun
0800008
0800008
o8oooc8
Sin.
pachissami
pachissasi
2 : '"' A
0800000
0800000
c j r,
ocroo^
Plu.
pachhsama
pachissatha
pachissauti
Digitized by v^.ooQle
88 Verbal Teiminatione — Active Voice.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
ooooqjlS
o^ooqjlcS
ocooqj
Sin.
pacheyydmi
paclteyydsi
pacheyya
ocooqjly
ooooqjjlco
occoq^
Pin.
pacheyydma
pacheyydtha
pacheyyun
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
9308006
33080000
20080000
Sin.
apachisscui
apachi&te
apachissd
t»o8ooo^o
930800000
93o8oo5oq
Plu.
apachissahma
apachi88atha
apachissansu
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
CO08
coo8
COO ^
Sin.
pachami
pachahi
pachatu
OCOQ
OQOO
Plu.
pachdma
pachatha
paclumtu.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
0803
pachttun .
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE
Mas.
Fern.
Neut.
OO
pachan
pachauti
paelamtan
PAST PARTICIPLE.
0000 q1
ooooocB
OOOOO
pacliatavd
pachatavati
pachatavan
FUTURE PARTICIPLE.
08000
08000^
08000^
pachissan
pachissanti
pachissantcm
CONTINUATI VE PARTICIPLE.
08030
8°
OO
O
00
0
pachitwd , or
paohitwdnay or
paohiUuLJ*
Digitized by v^.ooQle
89
Verb Conjugated — Passive Voice.
Passive Voice.
The passive voice is formed by adding the terminations of the
Attanopadani to the root. In the present and imperfect tenses,
and the optative, and imperative moods, y is prefixed to the ter-
minations, but the y is often assimilated to the last consonant of
the base ; as in this example, where it is permuted to ch.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person.
0%?0D
0 $ 3 C 0
Sin.
pachche
pachchase
pachchte
Plu.
pachchahtne
pachchahve
pachchante
PERFECT TENSE.
008
oo8oggo
oo8gg
Sin.
papachi
papaeJiittlio
papaehattha
00809
008090
c
c
00
0
J)
Plu.
papachihme
papacliilivo
papachire
IMrERFECT TENSE.
930 8 — 8*
© ©
330^300
*^888
Sin.
apachchi — chchin
apachehaee
apachchattha
TOOgC^COO
3 *> 89 °
Plu.
apachchahmase
apachchahvan
apachchatthun
AORIST.
TOGO
9508300
9S>OOD
Sin.
apaclui
apachise
apachd
930809
93089°
&)OQ[
Plu.
apachihme
apachihvan
apachu
FUTURE TENSE.
o8oo5
08000300
08000300
Sin.
pach issan
pnchissase
pachissate
080OOO39
0800009
0800033,
Plu.
pachissdhme
pachissahve
pichissanta
19
Digitized by v^.ooole
so
Verb Copjiirjnreif-^l’amtc Voice.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Firfet Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
O-goqg
OSg^OOD
OCCCO
©
Sin.
pachcheyyan
paclichelho
paclichetha
ocguqpcgo
oege^
Plu.
paclccheyyaltme
pachcheyyahvo
paclichemn
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
30 o 8 oo 5
3008000000
900800000
Sin.
ttpach issan
apacli ifisase
apachissatha
* 30 o 8 oOOD^)CCO
■ 900800009
* 30 o 8 cd 8 *oq
Plu.
apacliissdlimase
apach issalive
apacliissinm
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
OQ 2
OCOO
©
Sin.
pa chche
pachchanu
pachchaian
ool^coo
° 2 Q 9 °
Plu.
pachchdhmase
paclieliahvo
pachchantan
INFINITIVE MOOD.
o8oq
Mas.
pachitun
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Fem.
Kent.
o©GOcp
OQGD^O
OcGD$
ptachamauo
pachamana
pacluimdnan
PAST PARTICIPLE.
080000
08000
0800
pcichito
pacliita
pachitan
0800000
O
FUTURE PARTICIPLE.
0800 §0
0800 §°
pachitabbo
pachitabbd
pachitabban
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Permutations of Y.
91
BIUTATIONS OF Y.
§ 179. The following examples illustrate the permutations of y ,
when used to characterize the passive voice :
0300 0300 COO OO OIOCCO
OO L ©
saka to be able sal-hate is able. vaclia to speak, vuchchate
is spoken.
03 QG>> GgjCOO
mada or maja to squeeze in the hand, niajjate is squeezed.
qo qq| ojcoo q^coo
budha or bujha to know, buddhate lujjhate is known.
0[£> 0[§CC0 QO^> OOjX)COO
to increase, vuddate is increased, liana to kill, lianyate
IS KILLED.
0300 CQgfCD OO OgCOO
Za&/ia to obtain, labbhate is obtained, dkama to discipline dhammate
IS DISCIPLINED.
ooq OOaqjQOO (303 Og^COO
2*ara to do, kayyate is done, phala to finish, phallate is finished.
§0
zgcoo So o Soooooo
dim to play, dibpate is played, d/m to see, dissate is seen.
In Sanskrit the y is not changed to the preceeding consonant
but, in instances like these, is united to it, as: divyate
for dibpate above. Nor is usage uniform in Pali, dhamyate qc^j QQ3
occurs as well as dhammate , and in many instances the y stands as
an independant syllable, as:
ooSoocoo oSoocoo
t no
hariyate is done. gaehchliiyate is gone.
§ 180. The a or a of certain roots is changed to i before the
y of the passive, as:
si §ooc8 dl 8ooc8
da to give, diyati is given. dha to hold dhiyati is holden.
gl §ooc£ dl SoocS
tha to place, thiyati is placed, ma to love, miyati is loved.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
92
Deponents .
06)
t-^oocB
61
800 c8
Ad to ABANDON, hiyati IS ABANDONED. pd to DRINK, piyaJti IS DRUNK.
oc8ooc£ yco «o8jocB
wmk to worship, mahiyaii is worshiped, matha to nourish, ma(hs m
yati is nourished.
§ 181. Yaja to worship, is changed in the passive to ija , as:
OX* St$coo yaja to worship, ijjate is worshiped.
§ 182. Sometimes the passive voice has an active signification,
like deponents in Latin, as:
OpPCOQ (J^ODCOO many ate knows. jdyate produces.
§ 183. Occasionally the active terminations are attached to
passive bases in the signification of the passive, as:
o[§£> co&cfi vuchchati is spoken, labbhati is obtained.
OgcB ban yati is done, pachchate is cooked.
§CX)c8 8ajjanena buddho miyati.
“Buddha is beloved by good men.”
Alwis renders miyati by is measured, as if from the root
m, but it is constantly used in the Pali books, as above, like
mid, defined in Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, “To have affection 9
or regard for.”
(51 0 CBODCB mayd papan hiyate
“Sin is abandoned by me.”
Hiyate , is translated by Alwis, “Is reduced’’, but the Pali u-
sage is as if the word were identical with the Sanskrit root
§ 184. On adding the characteristic y of the passive, v in
OO - OOO OOO
vacha to speak, vasa to dwell, vaha to flow, to arrive, is some-
times changed to vu, as:
0[©c8 O[000C&
vuelwhate is said, vussati is dwelling, or residing.
§ 185. The letter h when a final radical, is sometimes written
after y in combination; and in vaha is changed to l, as:
0|0^c8 OjO^cB wiyhati, or valhati, is flowing, is conveyed.
Digitized by
Google
Hegular Verbs,
Conjugation.
§186. In Greek there are several conjugations of verbs* owing to
various additions being made to the root in some of its moods and
tenses. Thus the root lab inserts n before the last consonant of
the verb* and becomes lambano to take; and zo adds nu, forming
zonnumi to gird*
In a precisely similar manner, sometimes by the same in*
crements, several conjugations are formed in Pali. These changes
of conjugation are confined, with one exception* to the present and
imperfect tenses* and the optative, and imperative moods, called
conjngational tenses. Kachchayano enumerates eight conjugati-
ons. In Sanskrit there are ten .
REGULAR VERBS.
§ 187. The first conjugation is characterized by the root tak-
ing a final a. If the root ends in u , the u is changed to v ; if in
t, the i is changed to y, as:
ocjj ooocB § SoccB
bhu to be* bhavati he is ; ji to conquer jvyati, he conquers.
Pacha conjugated above belongs to this conjugation, and all
the verbs of the first, second, third, and sixth conjugations in
Sanskrit* appear to be embraced in this first one in Pali.
In the Sanskrit, “If a root be of the 1st conjugation, the rule
for the formation of the the base in the conjugational tenses is, that
the Guna be substituted for the vowel of the root throughout every
’person of every tense . Thus from buclh “to know,” is formed the
base bodh." No such rule is given by Kachchayano, but in point
of fact some verbs follow the rule, and some do not. The u in
the example above is not changed into o, but remains unchanged
in Pali, See § 179, where this word occurs. Other examples are
oqsi oq^coo o^c?> cqe$?CD
yuja to join, yujjate is joined, huja to be angrt, hujhate
IS ANGRY.
muda to enjoy, mudati he enjoys. Following the rule are
qo colocfi <^o ccpo^oo
gupa to guard, gopati he guards, rucha to shine, rochati it shines
COODOTOO && COOtM#
twlux to REGRET, Suchate HE REGRETS, tijll to SHINE, ti'jata IT SHINES.
20
Digitized by v^.ooQle
$4
Kachclia jarw » Conjugations.
This substitution of o for «, and e for t has its parallel m
Greek, where “The present and imperfect exhibit the root in its
most protracted form/* which is as time of Pali as of Greek.
This change of vowels is culled in Pali vuddhi, but it is not
necessary to use the term. It is the more inexpedient because it
is the same word as the Sanskrit vriddhv , which designates a difi-
ferent change of vowels, this being called in Sanskrit gnna.
Its use therefore would lead to confusion.
§ 188. Kachchayano’s third conjugation, corresponding to the
fourth in Sanskrit, ought to fallow immediately on the first, for
it is characterized by adding y to the root like the passive, so that
the active is merely the passive base with the active terminations,
while the passive is subjected to no change. No new element
is introduced, and it is merely a combination of the passive of the
first conjugation, which with this may be regarded as the regular
verb.
These two combined conjugations probable contain more than
four fifths of all the Pali verbs, and the student who has mastered
the easy paradigm given, can understand at sight four fifths of the
verbal forms he will meet in his reading, and the remaining fifth,
belonging to other conjugations, may be properly regarded as irre-
gular verbs.
Still it is useful to to retain the arrangement of Kachchayano
especially for readers in Burmah, who may wish to refer to the o-
riginal work, and because the classification resembles that of the
Sanskrit native grammarians, which has been followed, with more
or less modifications, by all writers on Sanskrit grammar.
Kachchayano names each conjugation after the example he
uses to illustrates it. Thus :
OOcflS OCJ <J)O0§ <j)0
1. bhavapi, from bu to be. 2. rudhadi, from rudha to restrain
8cf 8 8o cgo8
3. diva or, .. diva to plat. 4 swadi,
c8ooo8 c8 oodi8
5. KIAAPT. ... Id to BUY. 6. gahapt, ...
oop8 oo^> qc|dl8
7. tanapi ... tana extend 8. cuurayadi ...
SU to HEAR.
OOO
yah a to take.
churn to STEAL.
Digitized by v^ooQle
Insertion of n.
95
SECOND CONJUGATION.
§ 189. The second conjugation corresponds with the seventh
in Sanskrit, and is characterized by the insertion of the anuswara,
«n, before the last consonant of the root, like math in Greek, that
inserts n and becomes mcmthano “to learn.’ * The following is
an example of this conjugation, in the active voice.
Chhida to cut, sunder; Latin; scid, scindo, to CUT.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
PRESENT TENSE.
Second Person. Third Person.
ss8§i3
s8|c8
d8|cB
Sin.
chhindami
chhvndasi
chhindati
s8 “ 00
Pin.
chhinddma
chhindatha
chhindante
33s8§
IMPERFECT TENSE.
3338 c §1
3338 §1
Sin.
achhinda
achhindo
achhinda
333& “ (p
333811
Pin.
achhindalimd
achhmdattha
achhinda
d8c§oqp8
OPTATIVE MOOD.
38c|oqj]1c8
=8c|a3|
Sin.
chhindeyydmi
chhvndeyyasi
chhindeyya
d8c|oc^«
d3‘“og|ko
38c|°^l
Plu.
chhindeyydma
chliindeyyatha
chhindeyyun
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
d8|l8 d8|c8
Sin.
chhindami
chhindahi
chhindatu
d8«‘o
38 “ CO
%
Plu.
chhinddma
chhindatha
chhindu
§ 190. The final radical may take either a, i, t, e, or o, as :
qgpcB <aa°c£ $c§oc£
rundhati , rundhitl , rundhitl , rundheti , or rundhoti , obstructs.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
96
Third Conjugation,
8 191 . The n before the last consonant is subjected to the re*
gular permutations given in § 83 . Thus :
<xx?> ooggcB oqoo oqc^pcB
bhaja to ENJOY, bhanyjati ENJOYS, sabha to GORE, mmbhoti GORES.
§ 192 . The passive is made by adding y to the root, and the
terminations of the Attano padani , as:
n
rundhayate , he obstructs, or restrains.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
§ 193 . As has been noted in § 188 . the third conjugation is
characterized by inserting y between the root and the terminati-
ons, as:
Diva to sport, to go ; Greek theo to run.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
present tense.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person.
83I8
8308
83d*
Sin.
dippdmi
dippasi
dippati
§£>)«
%»
888,.
Plu.
dippdina
dippatha
IMPERFECT TENSE.
dippanti
33803!
33830
Sin.
adippa
adippo
adippa
338090
*%8
Plu.
adippahmd
adippatlha
OPTATIVE MOOD.
adippu
80303P8
8cgoqfld8
803031
Sin.
dippeyydmi
dippeyydsi
dippeyya
8cgoqpo
800x5! 00
8 C 3 U 3 ,* L
Plu.
dippeyyama
dippeyydtha
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
dippeyyun.
§gl8
8308
8303
Sin.
dippdmi
dippahi
dip pain
83)0
8 8 3 °
Plu.
dippdma
dippatha
dippauta
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Fifth Conjugation,
97
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
§ 194. The fourth conjugation is characterized by adding nu
una , or na to the root ; like ag , in Greek, which adds and be-
comes agnumi to break.
In the singular of the present and imperfect tenses active, and
in the imperative mood the first person of both numbers, and both
voices, and the third person singular active, the conjugation al n
is changed to o.
The following is an example of this conjugation:
Pdpu[i. e. pa-dpu] to obtain ; Latin, apo to obtain.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Perso
olqSODDS
dlqccoDDcS
dlqcaDOcB
Sin.
. pdpunomi
pdpunosi
papumti
dlqoo|o
d1qaD[oo
Pin.
pdpumuna
papumdha
papunwanti
Or,
olqcoooS
C^qCODDcS
dlqaoocB
Si n.
papunami
papundsi
papumti
olqciDoy
6 Icoodco
olqoioo^
Plu.
pdpunama
papundtha
pdpumnti
FIFTH CONJUGATION.
§195. The fifth conjugation, corresponding to the Sanskrit
ninth, adds na to the root, like the Greek dam , which adds na
in the middle voice, and becomes damnamai to subdue.
The limits of the preceding conjugation might have been easi-
ly extended to include this one. The following is one of
IJachchayano’s examples:
21
Digitized by v^.ooQle
9 $
Sixfh Conjugation*
Lit to cut; Greek luo to loose*
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person*
c\^d8 c\^>oc8 c^^ocB
Sin. lundmi lundsi luvdti
Pin. lunama
(XftOCO
lunatha
Iwu anti
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
§ 196. The sixth conjugation is confined, so far as known, to a
single verb, and is in nowise entitled to the distinction of a conju-
gation. This verb is referred in Sanskrit to the ninth conjugation
corresponding to the fifth in Pali, to which it might be appropri-
ately referred.
Kaehchayano says the conjugation is characterized by adding
ppcr r or Ima to the root, as:
Gaha , Sans. Gralta , to take, Germ, greifen, to gripe, grasp.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person,
c?x)ocB
Sin.
gheppdmi
gheppasi
gheppati
coooly
CODOOO
«»8S>
Plu.
g heppama
gheppatlia
Or,
glieppanti
OCVjoS
O
c
ocEpcS
Sin..
gahnami
gahndsi
gahnati
ocirpo
OCJJOGO
oc e°<^
Plu.
gahndnia
galinatha
gahndnti
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Kara Conjugated
99
SEVENTH CONJUGATION.
§ 197. The seventh conjugation is the eighth in Sanskrit, and
is characterized by taking o, or yira after the root.
The principal verb in this conjugation is kara to do, and it
occurs in books more often perhaps than any other verb, except
the verb to be. It is conjugated with various irregularities. All
the forms found in Machchayano are given below:
Kara , Sans. Kri y to do, make. Latin; creo to create, make.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
PRESENT TENSE.
Second Person.
Third Person.
ooccpS
ooccpcS
ooccpcB
Sin.
karomi
karosi
karoti
ooccpo
ooccpoo
Plu.
karoma
karoiha
Or,
karonti
oodSepS
oodSepS
oodScpB
Sin.
kayirami
kayirasi
kayirati
oodScpo
oodSepo
oooScig,
Plu.
kayvrama
kayiratha
Or,
kayiranti
0^38
o^cS
Sin.
kuppami
kuppasi
huppati
cqoo
Plu.
kuppama
kuppatha
AORIST.
huppanti
QSOODcS
3300DS003
9200008
Sin.
akasi
akaso
akdbt
© 2 OO 0<2
33ooo<x>gg
SQooooq 0
Plu.
akasahma
akdsattha
akasun ,
Digitized by v^.ooQle
100
Kara Conjugated.
First Person.
AORIST.
Second person.
Third Person.
9300
<&ao?cp
scoo£[
Sin.
akari
akaro
akari
3300^83
3300 $
Pin.
akarahmd
akarattha
akarun
000088
FUTURE TENSE.
00008 c8
oooo8c8
Sin.
kahimi
kahisi
kdhiti
000080
0000800
00008^
Plu.
kahima
kdhitha
kdhinti
000008
Or,
0000008
ooooocB
Sin.
k ahdmi
k alidsi
k ahati
OOJCOO
ooooooo
OO'JOO^,
Pin.
k ahdma
k ahatha
k ahtnti
oo£|oooo8
Or,
oo^ococS
oo£jooocB
Sin.
k arissdmi
'karissasi
k arixsati
00^00000
oo%oooo
oo^coo^
Plu.
k airissdma
karissatha
k arissanti
oocqoqpS
OPTATIVE MOOD.
oooc|oqjoc8
ooc^oqj
Sin.
kareyydrni
kareyydsi
kareyya
OO^O^OO
OOZG[tXpCQ
oooqo^[
Pin.
kareyyama
'kareyydtha
kareyyun
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
ooccpS
ooocpoS
oo^qoocj
Sin.
karomi
karosi
Jcarotu
00?Gp«
oorspoo
Plu.
karoma
karotha
karouiu
Digitized by v^.ooQle
101
Kara Conjugated .
Passive and Middle Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
axoqj
oooqjiob
oooqicoo
Sin.
Jcayije
kayyase
kayyate
oooqjo^
OOCX)j?9
oooqic^
Pin.
kayyahnu >
kayyahve
kayyante
Or,
00^200
OO^OO^CO
oo^oocoo
Sin.
kariye
kanyase
kariyate
oo£}oo?<^
3
8
O
U 3
3
f
&
Plu.
kariyahme
kareyahve
kariyante
Or,
oo?q
OO^CO?
00^203
Sin.
leave
k arise
karite
00^09
00^29
oo$l^
Pin.
karilime
karihve
karinle
Or,
00
Sin.
kure
kuruse
kurute
Plu.
kuruhi/n
kuruhve
kurunte
INFINITIVE MOOD.
<3 °88L
OODQQL
•s'
O
8
kattmb
kattua
katun
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.
ogoo
OOCOOD
kcithan
CONTINUATIYE PARTICIPLE. FUTURE
PASSIVE PARTICIPLE.
ooogo oooq$
oocog 0
ooloog° oolg
katwd
katana
katahpaii
IdtuhjXiii kdttabjj
n
Digitized by LnOOQLe
* CG
tot
Eighth Conjugation.
EIGHTH CONJUGATION.
§ 198. The eight conjugation, like the tenth in Sanskrit, ought
to have been treated as the conjugation of causative verbs; but the
form though causative has not always a causative signification.
The characteristic letters are e, ne, aya 1 and nay a.
If the first vowel of the root be a, it is lengthened into d, if
ti, or t, it is changed to o, or e. as m § 187. and a final u , or e
is changed to v, or y. The following are examples of this
conjugation:
Chura to steal ; Latin furor to steal.
First Person.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Second Person. Third Person.
cclccjS
c<?cc^c8
co)c<^cB
Sin.
chorerm
choresi
choreti
colccjw
colcqoo
Plu.
chorema
clioretha
chorenti
co^ooS
Or,
col cpecS
co1g|ooc8
Sin.
chorayami
chorayasi
clwrayati
co1g\oo«
C01C|OOCQ
cdlc^oo^
Plu.
chorayama
chorayatha
chorayanti
Mata, Sans. Mana r to deliberate ;
Latin men— memini.
QC^cS
«G^cB
Sin.
manterui
man tesi
manteti
OZ&CQ
Plu.
mardema
mantetha
mantenti
0^.008
Or,
0^0008
OJkjOOcB
Sin.
man lay ami
mmitayasi
mantayati
o^poco
Plu.
mantayama
mantayatha
manta y anti
Digitized by kjOOQle
103
Hoots differently conjugated.
Verbs of several Conjugations.
§ 199. The same root is often conjugated in two or more con-
jugations, sometimes with a different signification; as:
bhindati Second conjugation, from root bhida. breaks
o8gcB
bhijjati third
DISTRIBUTES.
Hence arises this fourfold division of the roots:
I. Roots conjugated in one conjugation .
II. ... ... two
III- ... ... three
IV ... ... four
These divisions are subdivided, and each subdivision is nam-
ed by compounding the names of the several conjugations accord-
ing to which the roots it includes are conjugated, as:
0^o1§^)OD§ buvadi rudhddi first and second conjugation, as:
c8oC0 c8gC& Upati limpati anoints, smears.
CXj61§§ol9 bmadi dwadi first and third conjugation, as:
gDcB gOODcB fkayati stands, is established.
O^ol§C^0§ buvadi swadi first and fourth conjugation, as :
olcxxfi BctfcOcB gdyati gindti SINGS.
CX^dl §cSoCO 8 buvadi kiyadi first and fifth conjugation, as:
C0>CX)c8 &3>0C8 jeyati jinati CONQUORS.
O^cfl§00|>D§ buvadi tanddi first and seventh conjugation, as
GOOCHS GiOOCGpcB jdgarati jdgaroti awakens.
buvadi churadi first and eighth conjugation, as:
00^>c8 ODC^cB manati mdneti investigates.
<goo£8ol8 rudhddi divddi second and third conjugation, as
munychati muchchti is free.
Digitized by
Google
104
Verbs of Fuiir Conjugations.
8ol8*^Cp8 divddi churddi third and eighth conjugation, as:
$8^ ^)*Oc8 ^)CX>Dc8 ruppati rupeti rupayati confuses,
Cgo8c8sX)D8 stvidi kiyddi fourth and fifth conjugation, as:
8cCOOOc8 8 ^Dc£ chinoti chindti assembles.
G£o8oOj>d8 swadi tanddi fourth and seventh conjugation, as:
olc^OODDcB O^olcB pdpundti pappoti
OBTAINS.
O^6l8<0ol8^Cp8 buvddi rudhddi churddi first, second, and
eighth conjugation, as:
c8 # ooc8 oqoocB c8 # cooc8
hit, sat i liansati hinsete injures, kills.
O^O 1 8 861 8c8cX)l 8 buvduli divddi kiyddi first, third, and
fiith conjugation, as :
c8o8ooc£ c8c8oooc8 c8c8oopc8
kllisati kilissati kilisandti is ▼ICUCS.
0^o88dl8^Gp8 buvddi divddi churddi first, third, and
eighth conjugation, as :
ccpocB $gc8 ccpcccB ccpcooocB
roc /tali ruchchati rocheti rocheyati shines.
CXJO 1 8 ^dl 8 861 8qcp 8 buvddi rudhddi divadi churddi
first, second, third, and eighth conjugation, as:
8scB 8§c8 8g<c8 cocsc £ cocsoocB
vidati vindati vijjati vedcti vedayati KNOWS.
CXj^61 8 8 ol 8 Og 3 9c8cOO 8 buvddi di vddi stvadi kiyddi
first, third, fourth, and fifth conjugation, as:
socB qoocB ^ccococB ^dcS
daoati duyati dunoti dimdti goes, is :N pain.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Gama causative Conjugated • 105
Causal Verbs.
§ 200. Any verb may be changed to a causal verb by adding
to the base e , aya, ape , or apaya*
In Sanskrit p to denote the causative is introduced as an ex*
ception, but it is regular in Pali, and is found frequently in the
Asoka Inscriptions. Pe however is shortened to pi, as:
:-JL°D8-Jb ">A"±b i± %J T U A”
Iyan dhamalipi devanan piyena Piyadasind ranya lekhapitd .
“This law- writing is caused to be written by King Piyadasi
beloved of the Devas.”
In book Pali this same root, likha to write, appears with the
double consonant likkha , and pe for the causative instead of pi, as:
oSoSogD ooocggocgg cSogocoogD
akkharani likkhitwd savcmnapatte likkhdpetwd
“Having written letters.” “Having caused to write on a gold plate.”
The rules for the change of vowels are the same as given in
the eighth conjugation § 198. but usage varies in the lengtheniug
of the first vowel of the root, and it is never lengthened before
a double consonant. The following are examples : gdmaya and
gamaya cause to go, cldutaya cause to think, and kare, kdraya,
kdrdpe , kdrdpaya cause to do.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
olcxx>o8
olooodS
olooccB
Sin.
gdmaydmi
gdmayasi
gamayati
OIOOODQ
dlooooo
olocx^
Pin.
gdmaydma
gdmayatha
Or,
gamayanti
OOOdoS
oooocS
o«occB
Sin.
gamayami
gamayasi
gamayati
OQOOOQ
OQOOOO
OOOD^
Plu.
gamaydma
gamayatha
gamayanti
23
Digitized by v^.ooQle
106
Kara causative Conjugated*
Active Voice.
indicative mood.
Plu.
Sin.
Pin.
Sin.
Sin.
Pin.
Sin.
PRESENT TEftSE.
First Person. Second Person.
Third Person.
8^0008
8^0008
%ooc8
chintayami
cliinatayasi
cliintayati -
8 ^ood«
8^0000
8 A“-'§,
clivutaydma
chintayaiha
cliintayanti
OolcG^S
ooiecjc3
oolcc^cS
I'd re mi
Jidresi
Jidreti
oolce^o
OOlcCjOO
Jcdrema
I'dretha
Or,
haven ti
OO 0 C|CX> 0 §
oocejocoS
OOOqoccB
hdraydmi
Jtdrayasi
A* dray at i
OOOC]OCOQ
OOOGjOOOO
OOOGjOO^
hdraydmi
h dr ay a si
Or,
A drayanti
OOOC|OCo 8
OODCpcooS OODCpCGcS
kdrdpemi
Jidrapesi
hdrapeti
OODqOQQQ
OOOCJOCOOO OOOCpCoS
Icdrapema
kardpetha
Or,
karapenti
OOOG|OOOGo 8
OOD^OOOOC
lxdrdpaydmi
lcardpayasi
lcarapayati
Pin. Urdpaydina Urdpayatha Mrdpayanti
Kaehehayano says that l is occasionally used for a causa-
tive affix, from the root
Q'Oo coQoocccB . .
L J Vta JOtalatl, CAUSES TO shine.
foil ? at !, h ° ( 'T mentaf ° rS “ 7 tbis is an illter Polation, and is not
found in tho old copies of his Grammar.
Digitized by Cjooole
Vivas a Conjugated . 107
Desiderative Verbs.
§ 201. In Pali, as in Sanskrit, to avoid the circumlocution of us-
ing the verb wish, and the infinitive mood of another verb, cer-
tain changes artf made in the verb to express the idea by one word.
The first syllable of the verb is reduplicated according to rules to
be noted hereafter, and klia, or chha , or sa is added to the root.
Thus, for
ccxoo}
c^oqogcB oq<*
©
blwtun ichchhati , is
written bubhukkhati , from bhuja to eat, and kh
“He wishes to eat.”
wsBalsfcSgfc
WOOD
©0
ghasitun ichchhati ,
is written jigliajjati , from ghasa to eat, and chh
“He wishes to eat.”
o\o\^S
SoloocB ol
00
patun ichchhati, is
written pivasati , from pa to drink, and
sa
“He wishes to drink.”
COOOOq co^cB
oqooDLCocB oq
00
sotun ichchhati , is written sussusati, from su to hear, and
sa
“He wishes to hear.”
88*oic8 ooq
oo
haritun ichchhati , is written jiginsati , from liar a, to caret, and sa
“He wishes to carry.”
Alwis says : “This word is written in all the Pali works Jigin -
saf i-shou Id it not be Jilimnati?” The reply is in the negative, be-
cause one of Kachchhayano’s aphorisms says : “When the root
hara takes the affix sa, the whole root is changed to pm.”
The following example of Pivasa , wish to drink, may serve
to illustrate the conjugation of these verbs :
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
80I0008
8cfl CO 08
SoloccB
Sin. pi v as ami
pivasasi
pivasati
80I0000 ■
80I0000
SolcoJ^
Plu. pivdsdma
pivdsatha
picdsanti
Digitized by CjOOQle
loa
A Hebrew Idiom .
Intensive, or Frequentive Verbs.
§ 202. To express emphasis, intensity, or frequent action, the
bases of verbal roots are reduplicated. It is something parrallel •
to the Hebrew infinitive in such expressions as, moth yaumuth
DYING THOU SHALT DIE.
It is remarkable that Kachchayano says nothing on this form
of the verb. Alwis however refers to two of his examples as il-
lustrations of it ; but they do not appear to be cases in point.
They lack both the peculiar form and the peculiar signification.
sggcS sg
daddalati , from the root data which Alwis de-
fines: ^‘Illumines intensely. ,, But it is defined by commentators
merely to “shine, or illuminate.”
Oo5«cB OQ changlcamati, from the root gama , Alwis de-
fines: “Walks repeatedly.” But this is not the definition of the
Scoliasts. They say it means to “Walk with the feet.” i. e. go
on foot. Moreover the Sanskrit uses the intensive form of this
root, but both the reduplication, and the definition differ, as:
gam , to GO, jangamyate ; jangarmti to walk crookedly.*
The word however has passed into Burmese with something
of the frequentive signification. Thus in Judson’s Dictionary
zengyan is defined: “A walk, a place for walking to and fro.”
The Pali books furnish a form with the signification of the fre-
quentive verb, in which the reduplication consists of the whole
base of the verb, and is interchanged with the participle, as:
oscjocqoqi os\ gg[
chare chareyya from char a* uddharissa uddhainssami , from dha/ra
“He might practice “Bringing out I will bring out, or
earnestly, or frequently.” I will bring out repeatedly.”
Sometimes the reduplication is made with the root repeated
and e. The religious books contain such expressions as these :
OC?|0|o8 0§°0g00§)8
name namami , from narna. vande vanddmi. vanditwd vamddmi
“Bowing I bow repeatedly.” “Worshipping I worship intently. 77
♦Max Muller page 225. Williams page 132.
Digitized by
Google
109
Frequentive Verbs .
In the last example the con tin native participle and verb are
used in precisely the same signification as the reduplicated verb,
which might be regarded as an abbreviated form of the participle
rather than as an intensive verb, but it lacks the i of the partici-
ple.
If the insertion of a nasal be the characteristic of intensive
or frequentive verbs, then Kachcliayano gives several examples.
But none of them are recognized by his commentators as posses-
sing the signification of the frequentive verb, and there is noth-
ing in the text to indicate any change in the meaning of the verb;
yet it seems certain that had Kachchayano intended to convey a
special signification, he would have indicated it, as he does the de-
siderative verbs. Kachchayano' s text in which the examples oc-
cur is the following:
OOOgOOO OOQgl 950dlc00 OOOgOOO
Jcavagga88a chavaggti abhase vattamdna*sa kavaggassa
€OCol coodcB 8cB^cB <?ig,c8 §toog^c8
chavaqqo hoti chikichchhati jiguiachchhati jiqhagachchhati
§8ooc6 . oi&xB oo5oc8
jigisati janggamciti changkam-ati
^icSooQg sagpocooo ^gc8ooooc«o
niggahitanycha abbhdsassa ante niggahitagamo
cococBol oo5«cB ogcccB ©<Soc8
hotivd changkamati chanychalati changgamati
“For a k classified letter, a ch classified letter.”
“In the reduplication of the present tense, for a k classified
letter is a ch c lassified letter — janggamati , chankamati ”
“And anuswara.”
“At the end of the reduplication anuswara comes sometimes,
changkamati , clianyclialati , changgamati .”
Chanychalati is rendered shakes; and changkamati, ch'inggamati ?
and, janggamati are all translated he goes, chankamati once he
walks with his feet. All are probably from the same root gama,
but they are sometimes referred to gamu and kamu . Possibly
kram to stride may be the root of changkamati.
24
TOT
Digitized by v^.ooQle
ire
Nominal Verbs .
Denominative Verbs.
§ 203. To express a sentence in a single word, several par-"
tides are affixed to nouns which change them to verbs in the sig-
nification of acting, or becoming like them, or treating another
like them, or desiring them for one’s self, or using them as instru-
ments.
(a.) The affix dya is used to signify one making hims elf like
the noun. Thus, for
ooccSo «Ooqc8 oooodoocB
pappatamiva attdnan dcharati , is written pappatdyaii.
“He makes himself like a mount ain.”
OOCOOD OOqgSo (KOOqcS OO^gloOcB
sangho samuddhamiva attdnan dcharati , is written samuddhayati .
“The church-assembly makes itself like the ocean.”
This form of the verb may be compared with such English?
words, as romanize , to make like Roman ; and latinize , to make
LIKE LATIN.
(b.) The affix tya is used to denote that a person, or things
is treated as the person, or thing, expressed by the noun, as:
scaogg 0 aoggSo 3»cqc8 aog^oocB
achhattan chhattamiva dcharati , is expressed by chhattiyaU
“That which is not an umbrella he treats as an umbrella.”
aaqgg' qggSo 9QDoqc8 qggoccB
aputtan puttamiva dcharati , is expressed by puttiyati
“He who is not a son, he treats as a son.”
(c,) This last affix, tya , is used also in the signification of^
desiring for one’s self, that which is denoted by the noun, as:
°83 og§cx>c£
attano pattan ichchliati , is written pattiyati
“He desires a vessel for himself.”
?o£.c8 ao^oocB
attano ghatan ichchhati, is written gha{tyati
“He desires a water jar for himself.”
Digitized by v^.ooQLe
Ceylonese and Burmese renderings . Ill
TO 88-i>° °88 *$5® oggoocfi
atttano vatthan ichchhati , is written vatthiyati .
“He desires clothes for himself.”
of sqgfB o^oocB
attano dhanan ichchhati , is written dhamyati.
“He desires property for himself.”
(d.) To express the instrument by which an act is perform-
ed, the noun is conterted into a verb by affixing ya-j as:
8c 6 8cooooo gooloocB go8oooooc8
gitan vindya upagayati , is written upavinayati.
“He is eminently skilled in singing by means of the late.”
yg oog^o &&OOQ& occBoog^oocB
maggan hattma atikkamati , is written atihattiyati
“He goes over the road by means of an elephant.”
Analogous with this is the English colloquial verb to foot it.
Occasionally the verb is formed on the basis of an adjective^
as:
8oq§l cooocB 8cqglooc8
ratti visuddhd hotti , is written, visuddhayati .
“The evening is pleasant.” Or, “It is pleasant [by means
of the evening.]”
(e.) Sometimes dra, and ala are affixed in the signification
of making, like ify in English, as:
°°d*> °°ccpc8 oo^cpcB
santan karoti , is expressed by santardti.
“He makes peace, or pacifies.”
ooccpcB goggoococB
upakkaman karoti , is expressed by upakkamalati
“He makes strenuous effort.”
Alwis renders this phrase: “He devises a plan”,
iipakrama y “A stratagem”, might sustain this definition. gOggQ
upakkama however, is defined by the Pali lexicographers, “dili-
gence, industry.” This is another of not a few examples, in which
the Pali of Ceylon seems to differ from the Pali of Burmah.
Digitized by
Google
112
Change 9 in Reduplication*
Reduplicated Verbs.
§ 204. There are a few verbs which reduplicate their first syl-
lable in some of their forms, like Greek verbs in mi . In Sans*
krit they are raised to the dignity of a conjugation, the third, but
Kachchayano includes them in his first conjugation. The follow-
ing is an example:
Da to give ; Greek do to give.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person.
33)8
33)08
ss)cB
dadami
dadasi
dadati
ss)«
33)00
daddma
dadatha
daddnti
This reduplication is not confined to these verbs. The per-
fect tense of all verbs is reduplicated, and desiderative and frequen-
tive verbs are reduplicated, and since Kachchayano treats the re-
duplication of all under one head, the laws that govern the redu-
plication have been reserved for this place.
(a.) If a root begin with a second or fourth classified letter,
it is changed to the corresponding first or third ; that is an aspirate
is reduplicated by an unaspirate, as:
chichchheda , the perfect tense of chhida — he cut.
hahhuoa , ... ... hhu — he became.
dadliati , the present tense of dka — he carries.
8 Sk s
sooS
^oqogcB
bubliukkhali ,
bhuja WISHES TO EAT.
(&.) A letter of the Tc class is changed in reduplication to a
letter of the ch class ; that is is a gutteral is changed to a palatal,
as:
8oo^cB
chikaclichhati , present tense of kita — he practises
MEDICINE.
Digitized by AjOOQle
Reduplicated Verbs.
113
8c%£
h , as:
cMkichchhati , present tense of hita — he practises
MEDICINE.
(c.) Occasionally the reduplication is made by t instead of
tihichchhati , as above — he practises medicine.
jiguchchhate , present tense of gvpa — he guards.
((?.) The aspirate h is changed in reduplication to j, as:
OiUOOcB jahdti , present tense of ha — HE abandons.
C^OgcB <^?Oo]c8 juliwati , or jjuholi , present tense of Aw,
^ hu y in Sanskrit — he offers, or sacrifices.
(?>OODGj. jahdra, perfect tense, third person singular of liar a, ^
An, in Sanskrit — he carried, or took. Alwis says “Abandoned.
(e.) The radical vowel if long is shortened in reduplication,
as:
,-Q
3SICD dadatiy present tense of da — HE gives.
SOOcS dadhdti, ... dhd — he carries.
(/.) Sometimes the reduplication takes i, as:
jighachchhatiy from ghasa — he wishes to eat.
8oCXDc8 pivasati from pa — he wishes to drink.
(</.) Sometimes a vowel is dropped in reduplication, as:
babhuvO) from bliu — he became.
Sometimes the vowel is retained, as:
qoqcgcB bublmJclchatiy from bhuja — HE wishes to Eat.
( h .) The root tlia sometimes becomes Ufa in reduplication, as.
^gcB tifati — HE STANDS c8g°* tit aim — let him stand.
cBcgcqj
tifeyya — he mat stand cBgoqit ti{ayyun — they
MAT STAND.
25
Digitized by
Google
m
Difference of Sanskrit and Pali .
(t.) Sometimes the reduplication takes anuswara, as:
OoSocB changlcamcUi , from kamu — he goes.
CgODcB chanychalati , from chala — he shakes.
(Jk.) Sometimes for the root pa, piva is substituted in re-
duplication, as :
pivati\ he drinks. 8oOC£ pi va tu, let him drink.
8*0(>3j piveyya , he may drink. 8^0OZJ|[ piveyyun.
THEY MAY DRINK.
Sometimes the bare root is used in the same signifipatio n r
as:
pd/e, HE DRINKS.
(7.) When the roots pa and md take the affix sa, they some
times become va , and man, after the reduplication, as:
Solcocfi pivdsati, from pa — he wishes to drink.
8qODcB mmansati , from md — he investigates, or reasons.
(m.) The final radical becomes k, when kh is added to a
reduplicated root, as:
cBcBogcB titikkati, from ZZ/a — HE FORBEARS, HAS PATIENCE.
( 77 .) The final consonant is changed to gIi, when chh is ad-
ded to the final radical, as:
^C8 & CB tikichclihati, from kit a — he practises medicine.
jighachchliaU, from ghasa—B.'S wishes to eat.
gq&cB
jiguchchhati, from gup a — rHE GUARDS, PROTECTS.
Alwis renders “He reproaches/’ which accords with the San-
skrit. And the definition given above is identical with the San*
skrit when the root is conjugated without reduplication -# opayaM
nurefa This proves that the signification of Pali forms can-
not be safely inferred from the Sanskrit.
Digitized by
Google
The Verb to fie t
115
Anomalous Verbs.
First among anomalous verbs in all the Indu-European lan-
guages, is the verb to be. In Greek and Latin its base appears
to be es , and in Pali many forms are made from asa. The An-
glo Saxon, and allied tongues, made their verb to be from the root
be , and in Pali a complete verb from bu, in the signification of to
be, or Become, is found in both the active and middle voices.
Webster says of the verb to BE: “It is defective, and its de-
fects are supplied by verbs from other roots, am, is, was , were .”
The defects are in the usage, not in the verb. It is complete
in Pali, and in some of the rural districts of England, the Pa-
li forms of this verb are still spoken, which 2i books have been
supplanted by “am, is, was , tvere” The roots asa, and bhw exist
in Sanskrit, but the Pali has a third root ku for the verb to be,
with copious forms, that has no place in Sanskrit, but which has
been suggested, with great probabilty, to be of common origin
with the Hebrew verb to be, huh.
§ 205 All the forms of the verb to be are not found in Kach-
chayano, but in order to furnish a complete paradigm, his defi-
ciences have been supplied from other books in Burmah, and from
the researches of Alwis in Ceylon.
Asa to BEi Latin, esse, to be.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person. Third Person.
SDC§
35c8
90 9008 00 cB
Sin.
asmi
or ahmi
asi
0
atthi or attlii or sati
35^
*88
Pin.
asma
or ahma attha
santi or saute
Kachchayano gives attlii only for the third person, but the
books supply in addition, atfhi, and sati. The last is near the
asti of the Qimar inscriptions, and the two are brought the near-
er by a rule of Kachchayano ’s which Bays:
OD0OCKXD3DD SqCdIcO ! C sabpassasddi lopo chi.
“And a at the beginning of asa is erased in all.”
Originally there would seem to have been tenses conjugated
in the middle voice, bnt the only trace remaining in use is the
third person plural, saute.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
116
Asa Conjugated .
AORIST.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
9 ©o 8 *
9008
93 c8
1
Sin.
asin
Obi
as i
S3 d8 <£
»d8gg
33d8*oq
so oq
Plu.
asihma
asittha
o 8 insu , pr
asun
REMARKS .
Alwis conjugates this tense with the initial & long throughout.
like the Sanskrit, but the books in Burmah, so far as
noted, make |
it short. •
*
OPTATIVE MOOD.
1
33 005
03000
90000
d8yco
Sin.
assan
assa
0880 , or
siyd
930O3DU
9300000
3 S 0 CDL
d8aq°
Plu.
assdma
assatha
assu
siyun
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
93c8
Sin.
asmi
aid
atthu
©ocg
^88
°°Si
Plu.
asma
attha
8 ontu*
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES.
ODC&D
“A
santo
santz
santan
00 <30Cp
OOQDp
ObOO^
samdno
8 amdnd
somdnon
REMARKS.
The Pali, like the Latin, makes the future from another rooty
but the Greek makes the future and other forms from this root
which are not met either in Pali or Sanskrit. It is worthy of
remark too, that the Sanskrit has two preterites, while there is
one only in Pali.
Digitized by v^-ooQle
117
Bhu Conjugated — Active Voice.
Bhu to be ; Anglo-Saxon, be, to be.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
00088
00008
ooocB
Sin.
bhavami
bhavasi
bhavatl
oooly
00 OCX)
Plu.
bhavdma
bhavatha
bliavanti
PERFECT TENSE.
ocqo
OCqQO
ocqo-
Sin.
babhuva
babhure
bdbliuva
ocqoq
»orj8gg
oy l°[
Plu.
babhuvahma
babhuviitha
babhuva
IMPERFECT TENSE.
9COOO
9200Co"l
S3 30 OD
Sin.
abliava
a.bhavo
abliava
33000^0
osooogg
S3000([
Plu.
abhavahma
abhavattha
abhavu *
AORIST.
92008 8*
3200 Col
32008
Sin.
abhavi-vin
abhavo
abliavi *
soooogo
TOOoogg
S200o[ 320o8*oq
Plu.
abhavahma
abhavattha
abhavun dbhavinsu
FUTURE TENSE.
oo8ocod8
00800008
ooSooocB
Sin.
bhavisadnn
bliavissasi
bhavissati
00800000
00800000
008000^
Plu.
bhavlssama
bhavissatha
bliavlssantl
*By an oversight this vowel was printed short on page 87.
26
Digitized by Ajooole
118
Bhu Conjugated — Active Voice .
OPTATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
oocooqpS
oocooqpcS
coco cocooqf
Sin.
bhaveyyami
bhaveyyasi
bhave, bliaveyya
ooccoqpo
oocouqjooo
ooooogji
Pin.
bhaveyyama
bhaveyyatlia
bhaveyyun
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
9SOo8oOO
930080000
90008000
Sin.
abhavissan
abhavisse
abhavissa
90008.0005
0200800000
9:00800005
Pin.
abhavissahma
abhavissatha
dbliavissansu
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
OOolS
ooolcB
00005
Sin.
bliavami
bhavahi
bhavatu
ooolw
00° go
Plu.
bhavdma
bhavattha
bhavantu
INFINITIVE MOOD.
oo8cq
bhavitvn.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES.
OOOC£0
000^
°°°&
bhcwantu
%
bhavanh
blia/vantan
OOOODC^O
OOOQ^D
OOOOD^
bhavamdno
bhavamava
bhavamdnan (. Middle .)
FUTURE PARTICIPLES*
Oo8oOOG^O
1 008006^
008000
bhavissanto
bhavissanii
bhavissantan
REMARKS.
Kaclichayano gives un alone for the termination of the third
person plural cf the aorist, but, in a subsequent rule adds, insu,
fts used with it inter chan gably.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Bu declined Middle Voice.
11 »
Middle Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
PRESENT TENSE.
Second Person.
Third Person.
COCO
OOO COD
000 cco
Sin.
bhave
bhavase
bhavate
OOOC9
cooog
oooo^
Plu.
bhavahme
bhavahve
bhavante
PERFECT TENSE.
oa^Sogoo
Sin.
babhuvi
babhuvittho
babhuvittha
©09809
009809)
009800
Plu.
babhuvihme
babuvihvo
babhuvive
9200 8’
IMPERFECT TENSE,
90000 COD
90000 gg
Sin.
abbavin
abhavase
abhavattha
SDOOQC^COD
OOOOO^f
5»090gg[
Plu.
abhavahmase
abhavahvan
abhavatthun
92)000
AORIST.
90000 COD
9000 dl
Sin.
abhava
abhavase
abhava
SGOOOCC^
92 > 00 O<J°
3500 OIL
Plu.
abhavahme
abhavahvan
abhavu
oo 8 co 5
FUTURE TENSE.
008000000
008000000
Sin.
bhavissan
bhavissase
bhavissate
008000009 00800009
00800000^
Plu.
bhavissahme
bhavissahve
bhavissante
Digitized by v^.ooQle
120
Bu declined — Middle Voice.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
First Person.
Second Person. Third Person.
oosooqj
OO 20 COO 0
oocooo
Sin.
bhaveyyan
lhavetho
bhavetka
ooooocfldc^
oocooqccp
OOQO<?[
Plu.
bhaveyydhme
bhaveyyahvo
bhaveran
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
93008006
3 soo 8 ooocoo
9300800000
Sin.
abhavi 88 <m
abham8808e
dbhavi 88 atha
9300800025
9100800009
sooo8ooOc^
Plu.
abliavi 88 ahme
abhavissdhve
abhwvmomte
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
OOCO
oooooo[
OOOOO
Sin.
blare
bhacassu
bhavatan
ooolocoo
OOO col
Plu.
- bhavdmase
bhavahvo
bhavantan
INFINITIVE MOOD.
00805
BHAVITUN
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PASSIYE PARTICIPLE.
•
05000b c^o
05000b £
bhuyamdno
bhuyamand
bhuyamanan
PAST PARTICIPLE.
O^COOD
cqcoo
bhuto
bhutd
bhutan
FUTURE PARTICIPLE.
oo8oooooc^>:
D 00800000^0
00800000$
bhavissamano
bhavissamdnd
bhavissamdnan
Digitized by v^.ooQle
121
Hu Conjugated.
Hu to be ; Hebrew, huh, to be.
Alwis writes this root with u long, hu , but Kachchayano
nifoimly with the short vowel, hu.
Active Voice
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
First Person.
Second Person.
Third Person.
coooS
cooodS
cooocB
Sin,
homi
hod
hoti
COOOO
cocooo
COOD^j
Plu.
homa
hotha
lionti
IMPERFECT TENSE.
93 o^o ecoqo 9 co^col
330qdl
Sin.
ahuva , or aliuvan
ahuvo
ahuva
930^0^
330^089
<xcqo\i
Pin.
ahuvahma
ahuvattlia
ahuvu
AORIST.
330Cj> 93COOodS* 33COOOc8
330C£ 93 COol c8
Sin.
ahun or ahosin
aliosi
aim or aliosi
330qg 93COolc8^ 33Co61c8gO 93OO0[
Plu.
ahuhma or ahosihma ahodttha
ahavun
This tense is also formed on the base he. Ahesun
the third person plural is of common occurrence in the books.
Sometimes a nasal is inserted between the base and the ter-
mination, as: ahengsun — they were ; and the same form is met
occasionally in other verbs.
cooS
FUTURE TENSE.
coocS
coocB
Sin. hemi
hesi
heti
COCO
coogg
Plu. hema
hettlia
henti
Digitized by v^ooole
122
Hu Conjugated.
future tense. (Continued.)
Or,
First Person. Second Person, Third Person.
COOc88 ccocx?8
coocSdS
coooBcB
Sin.
hehhni , or
hehami
liehi8i
hehiti
So
c
cooodlo
coooSgg
caooS^j
Plu.
heluma , or
Jtehdma,
hehittha
hehinti
coooc88
Or,
COODOOlS
COO0o8c8
cooOcBcB
Sin.
hohimi , or
hohami
liohisi
hohiti
O
S
u
So
c
COOOOOlo
cubocBgg
CCX>0«%
Plu.
hohima , or
hohama
hohittha
kohinti
These three forms of the future are made six, by inserting
ssa between each base and termination, thus:
coo 00008 cuocooo3 coo coo c8
Sin. hessdmi
CODOOODQ
Plu. Jtessdma
hessasi
CODOODOg
hessattha
hessati
COOOOdJL,
hessanti
In like manner the tense is conjugated on the bases hehi , and
7w7*7, as:
coocBooOcB ccoocBooocB
liehissati
HE WILL BE..
hohissati
HE WILL BE.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
ccooqpS
cccuqpdB
coDoqj
Sin. heyydmi
hcyydsi
Jieyya
cocoqpQ
GODoqy
CODtXjjDgg
GUDoqfi
Plu. heyydma , or
heyyan
lieyyattha
Jieyyun
The optative mood, as met in the books in Burmah, is usu-
ally made on the base asa. Alwis says he has not found the
form given above in the books on Buddhism.
Digitized by v^ooQle
Hu Conjugated.
123
OPTATIVE MOOD
(Confirmed.)
Or,
cxpooqpS
ogoooqp'oB
oqcocx^
Sin.
huveyydmi
huveyydsi
huveyya
o^Goocpy
ogcotxpgg
oqcooqt[
Plu.
huveyyama
huveyyattha
huveyyun
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
930 o 8 qo 5
930080000
990080000
Sin.
ahavissan
ahavisse
ahavissd
09008000^
330 o 8 o 03 CQ
930080060^
Plu.
ahavissahma
ahavissatha
ahavissamu
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
caooS
codoc8
cooDcq
Sin.
homi
hohi
hotu
COODQ
GO GOOD
COOD^L
Plu.
homo,
hottha
hontu
INFINITIVE MOOD.
hutun
CONTIKUATIVE PARTICIPLE.
OgOgO OgOgO} hutwd , or hutwdna
Middle Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
96058*
TOcqoGoC)
soaqogg
Sin. almoin
ahuvase
ahuvuttha
TOoqo^Goo
ssoqog 0
930 g°ggt
Plu. ahuvahma8e
ahuvahvan
PAST PARTICIPLE.
ahuvatthun
OSGOOD
0^000
OqOO
hutv
hula
huuin
27
Digitized by v^.ooQle
124
Gamu Conjugated,
f 206 . Gamu to GO ; English, gang to go.
gam, substitutes for its final in “the special tenses ,,
chchh, says Max Muller. In Pali this substitution is not confin -
ed to the special tenses. Kachchayano gives examples in the fu-
ture, the conditional, and the aorist, which do not belong to the
special or conjugational tenses. The same tense or mood is often
conjugated on both bases. The following are specimens:
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
First Person.
AORIST.
Second Person. Third Person.
*°i>
900 Qgp
9304
Sin.
agachehhi
(ujachckho
agachehhi
**%&■ \
*“$>88
Pin.
agaehctihihma
agaehchhattha
Also,
agachchhun
eccS
SOOCoO
9008
Sin.
agami
agamo
agartn
9300(^0
GOOQgg
Plu.
agamahma
agamattha
FUTURE TENSE.
agamun
0800008
no
o^ooocS
oJ^ooOcB
Sin.
gachchhissami
gachchhissasi
Also,
gachchliissati
0800008
o8oooc8
oSooocB
gamissami
gamissasi
gamissati
Kachchayano gives
a third base, ghamma. which does not ap-
pear in
Sanskrit. The following are examples
in the imperative.
oogoB
ex>goq
Sin.
ghammaini
gliammahi
ghammatu
0008
o«c8
OQO\
.. .
gamdmi
gamahi
gamatu
ogsfi
w
...
,
gachchhami
gachclihahi
gachchhatu
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Disa, Nyd , and Bru Conjugated.
125
Disa, or Dakhha to see; Greek, deik-numi, cause to see.
§ 207. In Sanskrit, dm substitutes pas in the “special tenses,”
but in Pali disa is also used, and there are moods or tenses form-
ed on the six following bases:
§00 §000 3000 sog oooo
disa dissa dassa dakkha daclichha passa
The following examples are in the active voice, and indicative
mood.
8ooc8
disati
PRESENT TENSE.
§oooc8 sogcB sgjcB oooocB
dissati ddkkhati dachchhati passati
“He sees.”
adassa , Imperfect, — he saw. Cont. part, diswa
§C$D
Nyd to know; Greek, gno to know.
§ 208. The Sanskrit irregular verbs appear to be more regular
than the corresponding ones in Pali. This verb in Sanskrit has
two bases only, while in Pali it has four, as:
£DD OO @> ^>0 n y£ ,j£ jan nd
PRESENT TENSE.
0*0 ^DOOcS jdndti ndyati he knows.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
©OCyC>q| GOpOO G>0^>000 jdneyya janya jdniyd
“He may know”.
Bru to speak ; English, bruit to report.
§ 209. This imperfect verb substitutes aha for its
perfect tense, as:
PRESENT TENSE AORIST-
base in the
@ 8<8 . @ 8 ^
bratiti bravinti — he says-they say abravti
PERFECT TENSE.
90000 900 OC^ 90i)000q
abravun — SAID
aha
ahn
ahansun — he said, they said — they said.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
126
Vacha , Vada , Jara, ami ifara Conjugated,
Vacha to spbak; Latin, yoco to gall.
§ 210. The verb vacha has three bases, vacha , vakkha and u -
cha. The Sanskrit pres, passive is formed from ncha, but in Pali
more usually from vacha, though both forms are used, as:
Active Voice,
PRESENT TENSE.
oogoS
OOgOO
vakkh&mi , vakkhdma — I say, we say,
imperfect tense.
SDOOl
9COq
avachd , avachu — HB said, they said,
AORIST.
wcolo
sccolq
avocha, avochun — he said, they said.
Passive Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
0[gC0D
o L g<fi
g^COO vuchchate , vuchchati , uchchte , .
“It is said.”
09
§ 211. The last consonant of the root vada to speak some-
times becomes jj , a change that does not appear to be made in
Sanskrit.
OgpS OSlS OCsS vqjjami, vaddmi , vajjemi , vademi
“I speak, or say.”
OPTATIVE MOOD.
%
OC$oq| OCSU5I vajjeyya, vadeyga — he mat speak.
§ 212. The root jara to geow old, is sometimes changed to
jira, jvyya, and jiya, as:
SoqjcB 8ooc8
jirati , jiyyati , jiyaU — grows old
OG[
§ 213. The root mara to die, is occasionally changed to mi-
as : SoDcB C^cB miyati, marati — he dies.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
The intermediate i.
127
SR
§ 214. Sometimes su in isu to wish, is changed to chchha. In
Sanskrit this change is regularly made in 4 ‘the special tenses”,
but in Pali the change is represented as a matter of choice, thu s:
whchhati , esati — he wishes.
OO^
§ 215. YamUy to restrain, sometimes changes its last radical
to chchha,, Alwis writes yama , nearer the Sanskrit yam . With the
preposition m, it signifies to “be permanent, to observe”, while
its Singalese definition, according to Alwis, is “regulates.”
?od&c8
^ooocB
niyachchhati
si
niyamati — he observes.
§ 216. In T)d to give, are several irregularities met in read-
ing or noted by Kachchayano. The passive is sometimes made like
the Sanskrit, diyate , and sometimes like the third conjugation, di-
yati: and similar double forms are found with other verbs. The
da not only becomes di occasionally, but also de. In one instance
the base appears to be changed to do.ha , and the present tense is
sometimes made from dam . The following are examples:
s$8
SoocB
§ 217.
dgjjami , dammami, dahmi — i give.
dajjeiyya dadeyya — he mat give.
scsoqj
§OOCCO diyati , diyate — it is given.
Miscellaneous Anomalies.
The characteristic ssa of the future tense is sometimes
omitted.
§ 218. The a augment of the imperfect and aorist tenses, and
the conditional mood, is frequently omitted.
§ 219. The affix which marks the second person singular of
the imperative mood sometimes take & before it, is sometimes
omitted. '
§ 220. “The intermediate i,”says Max Muller,” which has to
be inserted between the verbal base and the terminations originally
beginning with consonants”, in the unmodified tenses, furnishes
“one of the most difficult chapters of Sanskrit grammar.” Kach*
chayano disposes of the whole subject in the following sentence ;
“Jn the non-conj ugational tenses the letter i comes.”
Digitized by AjOOQle
128 Participles present , past, and future.
Participles.
In both form and usage the Pali participles are nearly iden-
tical with the Sanskrit.
Active Voice.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
§ 221. The present participle may be formed from the third
person plural of the present tense, by changing the anti to an.
In Sanskrit the change is to at. Por the declension, see § 112.
FUTURE PARTICIPLE.
§ 222. The future participle may be made from the third per-
son plural of the future tense, by the same change that makes the
present. See § 178.
Kachchayano however makes this participle also by omitting
the 88 of the future tense, leaving the form of the present. Thus
he gives
OOC|OC^O fcaronto , Tcardno — he who will dO
PERFECT PARTICIPLE.
§ 223. The perfect participle active is formed by adding vi
to the past participle passive. For the declension, see § 111.
Middle and Passive Voices*
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
§ 224. The present participle is formed by changing the teiS
initiation of the third person plural of the present tense, ante, in-
to amana.
This same form is used by Kachchayano for both the pre-
sent and future tenses, and sometimes in an active signification
as well as in a middle and passive. It is declined like the ex-
amples in § 89, 90, 95.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
§ 225. The past participle is formed by adding ta to the root,
or in some instances na. It is frequently used as a finite yerb.
The declension is the same as the present participle noted above.
Kachchayano has another past participle, but not of common
occurrence, made from this by the addition of dci \ as:
oqgp8 o [680008
Indtavi \ vimtdci — EATEN — REMAl X£I>
Digitized by v^-ooQle
129
The passive past participle .
000800
9300
90 0800
yachita. part.
asa
to eat, asita, part.
0800
00006
0000800
pachita ,
bhdsa
SPEAK, bhdsita ,
000800
qri^oo
;, hasita
rahkha ,
. . . guard, rakkhita . . .
goc8oo
OS
Ǥ00
The past participle is rarely formed by simply adding ta to
the root unchanged, as:
$£0 ita GONE 09 ^^ nyata known ^00 lUta feared
§ 226, Sometimes an intermediate i is found between the root
and the affix.
(a.) In some instances no farther change is made, as:
OlOO
GO
0030
hasa, .
0003
npasa... approach, upasita , ... rnada , ... madden, madita , ...
(£>.) Occasionly the penultimate vowel of the root is lengthen-
ed, sometimes as in § 187. As:
c8 000800 §oo * csdSco
Si ... sleep, scvyita, ... disa ... preach, desita ,
(c.) Certain verbs with final d change it to i, as:
g) . §00 c51 800
thd ... stand, thita , ... pd ... drink, pita.,
*• § 227. More usually no intermediate i occurs.
(a.) Some roots drop a final nasal before ta, as:
oqo<^ oqooo gopo^ goooco
sngamu ... GO well, bugata ,... upahana ... destroy upuliata ...
GOO <6[<^ G[CO
mana ... mind, mata ... ramu ... enjoy, rata
(6.) Occasionally when a final nasal is rejected, the preceding
vowel is lengthened, as:
oTlco 00^ ooloo
jana
bear,
jdta
huna , ... kjll, hdta
Digitized by
Google
130
Changes of the participial L
(c.) Boots with a final ch, or j, usually change that letter to
t, before the t of the participle, as:
c8o c8g0
sicha, to POUR, sitta, part.
880 88g^
vivicha . ... SOLITARY, vivittOy ...
©o> ogg
chaja , ... abandon, chatta , ...
OO O L 03
vacha, to speak, tmfto, part.
«l» ^588
thuja, bat, bhutta , ...
°888
yuja , ... unite, yufta, ...
(d,) Occasionally the £ of the participle is changed to the pa-
latal of the root, as:
*° n
nacha , to dance, nachcha, part.
(e.) A final p is dropped, and the t is doubled, as:
c 8 o
%
00000
“AS?
lipa ... smear,
1 /itta j . . .
santapa, ..
. BURN scvntatta ...
oqo
^88
mpa, ... sleep,
8 utta ...
sugupa, ..
,. HIDE, 8 ugutta , ...
(/) In some instances the final consonant of the root is drop-
ped, and the participle is written tha , as:
48
oo@>
c8§
pachchha ,
... ask, puiha, ...
yaja, ... OFFER,
yitha , ...
O00
°S
§00
8 S
wwa,
.. DWELL, ...
duo, ... SEE,
ditha, ...
nacha, to
dance, natha , part.
(?•)
Sometimes the participial d becomes dh before dh, and
dft before d, and &A, as:
qo
c^a
0000
003
]mdha t ...
know, buddha , ...
labha, ... obtain,
laddha ,
Digitized by
Google
The passive past participle in na. 131
(&.) Certain roots ending in ma , or m», change their final to
n before the participial t, as:
803C l &&>& 0DOOG[ ODOO&
vibhamu , to turn, vibbhanta , part, sangarrm , to GO sakanta , part.
06 ^
hhamu ,
... dig khanta, ..
. samu , to quiet, santa,
OG l
damn
... tame, danta , ...
varan, ... vomit, vanZa,
(*••)
In some instances a
final r is rejected before the partici-
piai Z,
as :
OOOG[
OOO 00
8ooq 80000
pakara ,
...DO pakata , .
visara , ... go, visata.
(&.) When the intermediate i is nsed, the final r, or nasal is
not rejected, as:
oq oSco coq oo£joo
gamu, ... GO, gamita, ... ram, ... rbmemb-er, sarita, ...
(Z,) Before a few roots with final h the participial t is chan-
ged to Z, as:
030^00 OCX?
4 ruha>, ... ASCEND, druhla ... gaJia, ... TAKE , galila,
OOO Oi>£ 300
fcafaj, ... obtain, &d/*Za, ... daha, ... Bmn,dahla,
§ £ 28 . Certain verbs take na for the passive participle instead
-of ta, among which may be noted the following:
(a,) Roots whose finals are d, d, or dh often take na, and
n in the place of their final radical, as:
08s
o8s
bhida , ... divide,
bhvrma, ...
chliida ,
... CUT, chhinna , ...
$©
8,
rydha, ... hinder,
runna , ...
kkida, . . .
alarm jkhinna,
29
Digitized by v^.ooQle
182 Con tinuative past participle .
(6.) Roots with a final r, when they correspond to rx ^
final in Sanskrit, usually take », as:
CDG[ cBgg Q o
tara 9 to CROSS, tinna, part. parijira 9 to be vert old, parijinna, pt.
CONTINUATIYE PARTICIPLE.
§ 229. The indeclinable past participle is sometimes called the
gerund . It corresponds to the Greek participle when used to con-
tinue a sentence without a conjunction, as in Luke 9 : 16. “Za-
bon “having taken” the five loaves and two fshes, “onabhpeas”
“having looked up” to heaven, He blessed them.” So in Pali:
oq^c© 8§° ogo (§occo5 <£OgCCOD (c^ooDcqogo
sunalche bindhUua brahmcnan rukkhato otaretwd
ODDS' CXD§Cq ^cSsiCOOgO COODO.^ SOgO S^ttoloo
sdkhasandhare nisidapeiud Ihcjanan datud imangata
“Having tied up the dogs, having caused the brahmin to det.
sccnd from the tree, having seated him on spread branches, hav-
ing given food, he spoke this verse.”
§ 230 This participle has several foims, as follows:
(a.) After simple veibs it is usually written iud, iucna , or
tuna .
(Z/.) After ccmjrourd veibs, the ccntinuative affix is common-
ly, but not uniformly, ya.
§ 231. The root is usually subjected to the same changes be-
fore iwa as before ta of the past participle. There are a few ex-
ceptions, the most prominent of which is, that the causative par-
ticles are retained before tied, w T hile they are rejected before ta:
OgOGCOgD vanddpetwa — having caused to worship
OO£)Q€|0gS5 Icdretwd ... ... do
pwretwd ... ... fill
ODCQDCOOOgO sanmoheiwd ... ... be foolish
giocsogo
unnadetwd ... ... echo
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Future passive participle.
138
§ 232. No distinction is made between twd, twdna , and twna %
Different forms are often used with the same verb, as:
CX^OgO sutwd , sutwdna — having heard
OOgO QO^> gorntwd , gantuna — ... gone
§ 233. When y is used with compound verbs, it is subject to
the same rules as y y when united with the verb to form the pas -
sive voice, as in § 179. Thus:
ohdyar— ABANDONED.
vivichcha — solitary.
uppajja — BORN.
arambha —
EXERTED.
sooog
dgamma— come. ^ 8^9 paggahya — taken up.
§ 234. In the books twd is often met with compound verbs,
and both ya, and twd are frequently used with the same verb, as:
SS)o8o J^CX) $OgO abhivandvya , abhivanditwd
“Having worshipped remarkably.”
I SOOslcX) 330§c8og0 dddya, ddiyitwa — having taken.
I
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE.
§ 235. The future passive participle is usually made by the af-
fix tabpa , but sometimes by aniya , ya, yya , and teyya . Some
grammarians class these participles as verbal adjectives. They ex-
press futurity combined with possibility, obligation, or fitness.
For instance : In a great drought the people fasted and prayed
s even days, and still no rain fell. The question was then asked:
c8 OODCOg hinnukho tabpan
“What is to be done?” or, “What shall be done?” or,
“What ought to be done?” or, “What can be done?”
(a.) If the vowel of the root be lengthened in conjugation, and
the intermediate i be inserted, the same changes are made be-
fore tabpa , as:
oo8oog oq<?> cooooog
bhu, to be, bavitabpa. buja to eat, bhotabpa.
si sloog OOC| OOOOg °°8B8
dd ... GIVE, databpa. kara ... do, kutabpa , or kattabpa,
Digitized by v^-ooQle
134 Infinitive mood .
Q > ) Sometimes there are two forms, one with intermediate t,
and one without it, as:
S $>8 w ?°°8 ®t ®<$>8 ®?<»8
warm to think, mantabpa , manitabpa . iehanu dig, khantabpa , khani-
o<* 0^3 08003 °°* °°<&8 C0 ? 00 i 8
yawn to GO, gantabpa , gamitabpa . &ana kiLl, hantabpa , hani-
This participle is declined like safcpa § 110.
(c.J The base of the verb before <miya y yya , or yef, is usually
the same as that before tabpa, omitting the intermediate « al-
ways before aniya, as:
OS
8
%
0
adhii to
learn, ajjhaniya.
pada to
GO, pajjcmiya
*000
soooo^oO
ooq
OOqc^QO
dsa ...
PUT IN, asaniya.
fcara ...
DO karaniya.
S
cotoqj
?
o^cxji
ji ... conquor, jeyya.
nt
GUIDB, neyya.
oo<q
ooo£|a 5
800
scgcxji Scgoqj
to ...
DO, kdriya.
dwa ...
SEE, datheyya , ditheyya
goo
gDOCOOuqj
os
OC&JW |
nyd ...
KNOW, nydteyya .
pada ...
GO, patteyya.
Arviya is written with a long 1 by Clough, as in Sanskrit,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
§ 236. The infinitive mood is classed by Kachchayano with
the participles, and it is formed by the affix taw with the same
base before it, as precedes the future participle tabpa,s&:
1
A-
6
8
00)0^
pwwi ... be born, jamtwi .
ji ... CONQUER, jetun.
oq ©ooc5o$
00
oooq
(Ml ... HEAR, SOfan.
dW ... BEAR, dhdtun.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER VIII.
INDECLINABLE WORDS.
Indeclinable words may be divided into adverbs, prepositions,
tjonj unctions, and interjections*
Adverbs.
§ 237. Some adverbs are formed by the cases of nouns, and
have a form of declension, as:
8 ce^ 8 c|oo 5
chiran. A long time, chirena , by a long time, chirassan . of long time.
000003
jpurato , before. pachchato. behind* kato, whence?
CORRELLATIVE ADVERBS.
§ 238. Certain adverbs are correllatives formed by affixing a
particle to a pronoun, and forming adverbs of
Time, Place. Manner. Quantity.
900 930 COCOO CCOO
idani, now. atta, aim , here. tatha, thus, tdva , so MUCH
cos\ oosV$ oDgg co(0
tadd , taddni , then. tatta , there.
ODSl
OD0 OO
OOOOD
OODO
yadd , when, yafra, where, yathd, as. ydva , as much
009I 0sl 00 0(0 0006
Tcctdd, kudd , When? kutta, kutra , where? kathan t how?
ODg3l ODsl OOg0 OC>30 00300
sabpadd , sacfoi, always, sabpatta , sabpatra , all places, sabpatthd , IN
[every way.
<soos) c °^88
e&ada, at one time. ekatta, ekatra , in one place. •
9O0SI 900000
anyadd, at another time. anyathd, in an other wat.
SO
Digitized by
Google
130
Adverbs .
MISCELLANEOUS ADVERBS.
§ 239. There are many other miscellaneous adverbs, of which
a few are here given according to the usual classification.
(a,) ADVERBS OF TIME.
Cooqc8 co| oogcB gcgj
adhund , etarahi, handa, sampati , ajja, now, at present^
oco §ol csiood
page in the morning, diva, by day. dosd, rattan , at night.
OOOOOO OO^CO 9^£>G[000 00$ 0
satatan, santatan , andratan , saraf, perpetually.-
(&.) ADVERBS OF PLACE.
£3© go©0 93^00 OCOO OCo8‘
t<2Aa, i/ia, atraha, here. tahan , tahin, there.
0^00 oqc8* oqc8Qg$ OQO^D
kuhan , kuhin , kuhinychanan, where? samantd , ON ALL SIDES/
antaran , within, antard , antarena, between. saww£, NEAR#
(c.) ADVERBS OF MANNER.
00 cB
'l
Sl 88° c6
COCO
oocooo
% t%,
itthan , evaw,
hevan, thus,
tatheva, so.
puna ,
again, punapunnan , repeatedly.
«a««, VARIOUSLY.'
CO
08 ooo8$
G|©0
ue or, fa’, certainly, kamini , willingly, mudhd, in vainv
(d.) ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.
*k<£ sscBo 9S<£a0©COO3
atf, a£wa, atisayo, much, exceedingly. &aw, little^
(e.) ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION.
OOD^ GODOq
OWia, YES, CERTAINLY. sddhu , sa&W, YES,' AGREED/
(/^ ADVERBS OF NEGATION.
S3 33 ^ C^>0 ^c8 ©0
a f aw, wa, wo, wafo’, no, not. may prohibitive.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
dispositions', 137
Prepositions.
§ 240 Prepositions are often prefixed to verbs im Pali, as
in Greek. Some of them are nearly identical both in form, and
signification.
Thus para
in Greek, is para
... peri
... pari
upo
upa
sun
san
The whole number of these prepositions in Greek is eigh-
teen, and though there are twenty in PaH, the two lists might
be easily made to harmonize.
The Pali prepositions differ but slightly from the Sanskrit.
The final r in dur^ and nir, and the final d in ud are omitted in
Pali, but they appear in composition before a vowel* The r in
pra 9 and prati is dropped altogether in Pali.
The effect of these prepositions on the verbs with which they
are combined must be learned from the usage* They cannot be
adequately defined in a word. Thus d, which Corresponds
to the Latin ad , may be defined by to, but when prefixed to cer-
tain verbs it reverses their meaning. So da to give, on becom-
ing dda signifies to take. The following are the prepositions:
95 c8
958 95(g)
95$
d, TO.
aft, BEYOND.
adhiy egjha, above.
anti< after.
930
95 8
3500 95^
950 (5}
apa , off.
apt, on.
abhiy abbha , towards.
. ava 9 0, away*
e
e°
%
%
U , UP.
upa , ABOVE.
du 7 ILL.
m 9 into*
%
o
ocB 0^
OGp
ni, out.
pa, BEFORE.
pati, pafif BACK.
pard , backwards*
8
00
pari around, vi, apart.
san> with.
SU y WELL.
§ 241.
Some of the
above prepositions are often used with
nouns and
pronouns, but,
excepting d, usually as postpositions.
And there
are other particles, that are usually
regarded as ad-
Verbs, which also serve as prepositions in the government of nouns
fend pronouns, as:
Digitized by v^.ooQle
138
Conjunctions and Interjections.
b o£ 1 o£ t
adha , below. cuntara, between, upari, OVER, pan, ABOUT.
£|coo 8^0 oooo cOcS oo §°*
Wte, without. ve?wf, besides. sdha, samm, saddhin, with .
Conjunctions.
§ 242. There are very few conjunctions in Pali All the parts
of a compound sentence being so generally connected by partici-
ples, there is little use for them beyond that of linking together
the parts of a paragraph Of the few conjunctions in use, several
are adverbs in form.
o
o — o
93 8 8
cha, AND.
cha — cha, BOTH AND.
apiy ply AND, ALSO.
uo 8 co
8 COCO
&
yadi, cke %
, chi, 8dche , IP, WHEN. hi, FOR, BECAUSE.
•O
CO
<s6o8
evari, as,
ve , AS, WHEN.
evanhiy if SO.
OOCOOO
coo^> oocood coo^
yato.
yena, wherefore, tato.
tena. therefore.
CO si
9000
90000I8
tdd&y THEN.
atha, MOREOVER.
athavdpi, and besides.
61
ol— ol
vdy OR.
vd — vdy EITHER OR.
tWy BUT.
Interjections.
§ 243. Interjections are not common, the following may be
noted:
ccoo 9 COO
*>0^ QC[
ppcooo
bhoy he, Ordinary terms of address.
are, re, Disrespectful
oho. An exclamation of surprise.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER IX.
DERIVATIVE WORDS.
The roots of the Sanskrit language are estimated at about
two thousand, and the Pali and Sanskrit roots are substantially
the same. And it may be remarked in passing that the Burmese
and Karen languages are formed from a similar number of roots,
and, if in other tongues they be found of about the same num-
ber, there will be a strong presumption that in the roots of vari-
ous languages we have merely the different changes that have been
rung out of the original set of roots in use, when “$he whole earth
was of one language and one speech.”
These two thousand roots are made into one or two hund-
red thousand words, as in Webster's English dictionary, by chan-
ging their forms, or taking additions, or both. The added letters
that form new conjugations often give different significations to
the verb, and the prefixed prepositions have frequently the same
effect as the formation of new verbs.
Changes in the roots, and numerous affixes are used to form
T&ouas and adjectives. The penultimate vowel is often changed
<as in § 187.
§ 244. The last consonant of the root is subjected to such
changes and additions in derived words, that it is frequently dif-
ficult for the student to refer them to their proper roots. Thus:
lO
OO
OO
oloO
ch becomes
h, as
pacha to cook, palw, cooking.
&
%>
... ...
chchh, ...
riclia ... destroy, richchha destroying
H
ft
009S0
coogp
...
sanacha, ..
.. move, samcvjja moving.
&
b
°&
°b
chchh . . .
ndhj . . .
gachchhcb . . ,
go, gandha odour.
<h
O
oqc*
COOOO
.3
9>
yuja,
.. join, yoga JOINING.
31
Digitized by v^.ooQle
140
. Changes of (he last radical*
6 B
<5
cog
006
nych becomes
ngg, a s
sanycha to
> QUIET,
sangga ,
QU IETING.
444
nj
...
... ...
ranja . . ,
DESIRE,
rangga
DESIRING#
444
6S
...
...
tti,
... ...
...
ratti
...
444
S
«<
*18
...
th
...
.
ratha
...
R
8
ft
n
t
...
chchj ...
nofa
. DANCE,
ruvchcha
DANCING.
R
*
8 ,
s *
4
...
khida
ALARM,
khinna
ALARMING.
CO
8
0000
cog
t
...
c/jcA, ...
sofa,
BE TRUE,
sachcha
TRUTH.
444
£>
(Boo
m s8
...
...
ctaAA, ...
kita GIVE MEDICINE, Tcachchhd
MEDICINE.
00
&
coco
ih
...
chchha,
hatha ...
SPEAK,
kachchha
SPEAKING.
€€€
CO
WOO
«88
.r.
...
7, ...
matha ...
BOX,
maUa
A BOXER.
8
&
oqs
d
...
ckchh, ...
...
GIVE PAIN,
tnchchhd giving pain .
€44
8
8 s
00
*
...
...
i/r
vida,
KNOW,
vijja
KNOWLEDGE.
444
6§
8 s
<*> 8 §
...
ttlj . . .
mida y ...
LOVE,
metti
LOVE.
444
@
003
CO@
...
...
...
chhada , ..
. COVER,
chhatra AN UMBRELLA,
c
St
CJO
cc l 5 8 t
dh
...
a> •••
budha . . „
KNOW,
&0/)*a INTELLIGENCE
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Changes of the last radical.
141
©
©
0|0
0|_©
dh
becomes <M, as
vwtaa to INCREASE,
mdda INCREASE.
f
00
y*
ooo
n
t, ...
mana
... THINK,
mata knowledge,
00
5b
CDOO
a>&>
bh
... chchh, . .
, labha
... OBTAIN,
lachchhd obtaining.
Hi
8
Hi
COgD
...
... ddh>^ . . <
...
laddha
&
OG^
°s?
mu
. . . chchhy . . ,
, gamu ,
... GO,
gachchhd going.
«l
CO
OG[
OOO
r
t,
mara
... DIE,
mata death.
Hi
88
OG^
°88
it , ...
vara
.. PRESERVE,
} VOtta A GARMENT.
Hi
8
QG[
©g
...
... mm, ...
dhara .
.. ESTABLISH
dhamma law.
0
8B
0^0
“88
V
ft, ...
suva . .
. INJURE,
satta A KNIFE.
00
5b
OO0
°i 0
£
chchh , ...
vasa . . .
DWELL,
vachchhd dwelling-
<«
O
8°}
e°
...
. . .
...
BE TROUBLED, udda TROUBLE.
©
oooBg^oq
jjh,
abhiim
... DESIRE,
abhijjhd desiring.
<«
&
Hi
SDcBjgp
... c/ic/lft ...
...
...
abhfchchhd
CD
5b
<2^00
H 8 ?
%
chchh , ...
mwAa . . .
DOUBT,
muchchhd , doubting.
Hi
OO
COO
•
61 oo
...
2/> ••
graft a ...
TAKE,
TAKING,
Digitized by v^.ooQle
342 Verbal roots used for nouns, and adjectives •
§ 245. Sometimes the last consonant is omited altogether, as;
cqcp o<^
turagamu to GO swiftly, turaga A horse ; from gamu .
cqo>o ***
bhujagamu ... crookedly, bhujaga A snake;
§ 246. Occasionally, though regularily derived from the root,
every letter of ths root is changed in the derivative, as:
oo gen 293
vacha to speak, oka speaking, utta spoken, uttered.
If words in the same language are occasionally changed, by
the operation of established laws, to forms that retain no element
of the original root, it may be expected that such changes will
often occur when the words pa3S into other languages, an d ety-
mologists are therefore compelled to allow “vowels to go for noth-
ing, and consonants for very little.’’
It appeals from the above examples, that there is a strong
tendency to substitute, in the last radical, a gutteral for a pala-
tal, a palatal for a dental, and that chchh represents ch, t, th , d,
bh , m, 8, and h. But while the last consonant is constantly an
evanescent quantity, the first almost always remains unchanged.
It is the only permanent part of the word, and may perhaps in-
dicate the monosyllabic base from which the root was originally
derived.
Kachchayano enters largely into the derivation of words. Three
books, out of the eight into which his grammar is divided, are
devoted to this subject. A small fraction only of what he has
written can be given here. To enter fully into the matter belongs
rather to the dictionary, than to the grammar,
§ 247. The verbal root unchanged is occasionally used for a
noun or adjective, as:
vama to vomit, vama vomiting.
§ 248. More usually the penultimate vowel is lengthened, and
if the final radical be a palatal, it is changed to its corresponding
gutteral, as :
O^O COOOOO
ccpo
fuoha to grieve, soka grieving, ruja to be sick, roga sickness,
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Affixes ha, and ika.
148
§ 249. (a.) Ka is added to verbal roots, after lengthening the
penultimate vowel, to form nouns, and adjectives, as :
Q 0 pacha to cook, (jlooo pdchaka a cook.
1m to reap, CODOOO Idvaka a reaper.
( 6 .) Ka added to nouns forms nouns of multitude, art
Q^OOO m/mussa man. Q^OOOrO 'Mmmsaka many men.
mayura peacock, may wr aka MANY PEACOCKS*
O($*30 ma hinsa buffalo, wahinsaka MANY BUFFALLO
§ 250. Yale* is added to verbal roots unchanged to form nouns,
as :
€\ U 10 QIVE > si 0003
8^ vina to instruct, 0^0000
5 251, Ika is affixed to nouns, dropping the last vowel, to
fprm other nouns and adjectives. The new nouns formed are of-
ten denominatives, gentiles, and instrumentive nouns, but the ge*
serai effect of the particle is that of man , with or without a hy-
phen, as affixed to nouns in English. Thus ^Net-man,” in Pa 1 !
js Fisherman,” in English. The following are examples:
laoco A NBT) aocSoo i ilika ^ kit-man.
©1 8oo chdpika A BOWMAN r '• 1 '
dovdrika A DOOR-MAN. '
A GIVER.
vmayalca an instructor.
chdpa A BOW,
dwdra A DOOR,
OOQ magada MAGUDA,
idgw* A citt j
CbOOOO^ 8 ^hara HOG,
cslol^oo
Qo8cD magadika a MAGUDAMAN.
ndgarika A citizen.
COO 000^00 8okanka A
That is a man who kills hogs-A butcher.
dlco vdta WIND ’ oIcBoo vd
is one suffering from disease produced by wind, or flatulency.
Ula sesamUm, CODcSoo A 8ESAMUM ~ THINa *
f hat k a mixture in which sesamnm predominates.
??
HOO-MAN.
A WIND-MAN. That
Digitized by
Google
144 Affixes ta, tia, tra t Uto y Cund (ha «
8^00 wna ya the viniya, qo^cSoD venwyiha A vtniya-mAN,
That is a student of the Yiniya Buddhist Scriptures.
Qg dhamma law, O^CVD dhammika A law-man.
mdnasika MIND— MAN.
That is one devoted to the law-RELiGious.
Jcaya BODY, ODOcScO hdy%ha BODY— MAN.
That is pertaining to the body — corporeal.
0^00 mrnasa mind, «q^o8oO
That is pertaining to the mind — mental.
OOOO vachasa word, olooSoD vdchasika word-man.
That is pertaining to words — verbal.
§ 252. Many nouns and adjectives are met with the. form of
the passive past participle, adding to , ita to the verbal base, as:
£3 i to 00 , GONE.
^ ptyato OFFER, ADORE, p&jito OFFERED, ADORED.
8s vida to KNOW, 89oD v idito' KNOWN.
§ 253. Tta, optionally changed to tra , is added to verbal root
to form nouns, as:
q*| pd to drink, Q p^ patto , or patra, drinking cup.
dd to give, ddtto) or ddhra , A DONOR.
§ 254. Ifta is added to verbal roots, after the penultimate vo-
wel has been lengthened, to form nouns of aggregation, as:
qq vada to speak, q] vdditta the whole of the
SPEAKERS, Or A MULTITUDE OF SPEAKERS.
OG[
clmra to observe,
®'%3
chdritto the whole of the
observers, or a multitude of observers.
§ 255. A few abstract nouns are formed by adding (ha to ver-
bal roots, as:
dara to dread,
damn to reprove,
SCfO
sgoo
daratha dread.
dammatha reproof.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
145
Affixes n, », yarn , ma, ttima^ and ya.
§ 256. Many nouns, and adjectives are formed by adding n
Or » to verbal roots, as:
oqo
kztdha to be angry,
cooo©$
kodhana
ANGRY.
qoo
dusa
to BE WICKED,
cs1o6^>
dosana
WICKED.
q
jpu
to
be pure,
OO}
pavana
PURE.
S3 00
asa
to
EAT,
S300^>
asana
EATING.
nyd
to
KNOW,
^oOooo
nydna
KNOWING.
ooq
Jcara to
ACT,
OOSjOD
Tcarana
ACTION, <
INSTRUMENT OF ACTION.
§ 257. Tana is affixed to proper names to form patronymics,
as:
vachcliha vachchha, 0&CX)? vachchayana the son op
§ 258. Ma is added to roots in the signification of possession,
°&
VACHCHHA.
qq) go AN OX, COIq goma A POSSESSER of oxen.
va to BE WITHERED, VWma A WITHERED THING.
h/u to sacrifice, CODQQ
§ 259. Ttima is affixed to verbal roots, after dropping their
last vowel, to form nouns, as:
da to give, dattima A thing given, gift.
^ hu to BE BAD, ODg§« A TH1NG THAT 18 BAJ) -
§ 260. Ya is appended to verbal roots to form nouns denot-
ing the instrument, as:
vina to instruct, 8 jqq vinaya the work that
homa a sacrifice.
g^ vina to instruct, g^
INSTRUCTS.
n ^ sa t0 ^ e ust in, ^qoooo n ^ 8a y a
TRUSTED IN. i. e. A TEACHER.
THE PERSON
Digitized by
Google
149 Affimet ya, tnaya, and eya, eyya.
I 261. Ta compounded with the last consonant is added to
adjectives to form abstract noons, as:
900900 <dasa IDLE > »lcooqj n)LilfE8S -
wccpo aro ? < * H0T SICK > »ocspq| irogya ™ 8TAT * °'
HOT BEING SICK.
§ 262. Maya is affixed to nouns, after lengthening the vowel,
to form other nouns, as:
ssoo a y* IB0N > 99coo0cxx> a y° ma v a MJJ)m
or IKON, or ▲ WORKER IN IRON. 1 . 6. A BLACKSMITH.
cq°gg iuvcuma gold, cOOOOggCXX) 80 Va ^^y a MAD ®
OF GOLD, or A WORKER IN GOLD. i. C. A GOLDSMITH.
§ 263. (a.) Eya , eyy, is added to verbal roots, after dropping
the last vowel, to form nouns, as:
si
dd to GIVE,
csuqi
deyya giving.
ol
Jpd tO DRINK,
ccoqi
peyya drinking.
OOD
hd to REJECT,
coooqj
heyya rejecting.
«D
md to LoVE,
coeqj
meyya loving.
e?
nyd to know,
cgcoqi
nyeyya KNOWING.
(b.) Eyya is added to notms to form other nouns in the sigbt*
fication of worthiness, as;
SOOi)j> dassana seeing, SOOO^^OCJj dassaneyya worthy or
BEING BEEN.
vandana worshipping, q vcundamyya worthy or
BEING WORSHIPPED.
(c.) . It is added to feminine proper names to form patrony*
mics, as:
gcunggd gangga, WW ganggeya,
A SON OP GANGGA
RUHINA, Tcihineyya ROHINEYYA '
A SON OF RUHINA.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
147
Affixed kcvra , ura , era, Za, ZZa, tZa, and va.
.§ 264. Kara is added to nouns to form denominatives, as.
r>r\ kurribha A pot,
kumbhaMra A POTTER..
QDCO FLOWER,
oocoocoq
mcUakdra a flowerist.
ratha A carriage,
^cjooooq
rathakdra CARRIAGE-
MAKER.
§ 265. Ura is affixed to verbal roots
to form nouns, and ad-
jectives, as:
gg Vida tO KNOW,
vidura knowing, wise.
masa to weigh,
maswra A pea.
§ 266. Era is added to
proper names to form patronymics, as-
8ool vidhava vidhava,
coocoq
vedhavera vedhavera
THE SON OP VIDHAVA.
§ 267. La is added to verbal roots to form nouns and adjec*
tives,
as:
os>
pafa to SURROUND,
oqco
pafala
A MULTITUDE.
<^co
musa to break,
e^ooco
mmala
A PESTLE.
cqx>
kusa to SHINE,
O^QOCO
kusala
HAPPY .
oo
maga to go,
0<$CO
manggala
FORTUNATE.
§ 268. Lla is added to nouns to form other nouns, as:
qq 2 veda the veda, COSgg vedalla one who trusts
IN THE VEDAS.
§ 269. lla is added to nouns to form adjectives in the signi-
fication of possession, as:
cqap tu — a A SN0UT ’ 0^a£tt> fa&itia, having a snout.
That is having a large snout.
§ 270 When a proper name ends in u, the patronymic is
sometimes made by changing it to va , and lengthening the pen-
ultimate vowel, as:
9 *
manu manu,
mdnava manava son qp manu.
33
Digitized by v^.ooQle
148
Afi&i $a, $*a , d, id , t, and U 9 Ut.
§ 271. 8aor s$a m added to verbal roots to form nouns and
adjectives, as:
9000
ala
to ADORN,
90CD0Q
alasa idle.
manvssa MAN.
^ or manu 10 ** ow > q^COO
That is the being that knows good and evil.
§ 272. if is added to verbal roots to form abstract nouns, as:
qq mada to intoxicate, c ^p mac ^ lc ^^ intoxication.
§278. Td is affixed to noons to form other noons, as:
^ jana ux, G>5>COD 3 Mmtd MANT MKN -
§ 274. Vd is added to noons to form adjectives signifying pos*
session, as:
q . ao 9' u Q a attribute, a good attribute, qcODol S^ffi***
POSSESSED or GOOD ATTRIBUTES — VIRTUOUS.
dhana property, dhcmavd possessed or property*
That is rich.
QCOOS ^ ce8a HAnt > CODOOoI ^ ce8av * POSSESSED OF HAIR*
That is HAIRY.
bhaga glory, ODOoT ^ ia 9 av ^ possessed or GLottfV
That is glorious.
§ 275. (a.) Noons are formed from verbal roots by affixing
i, as:
muni ONE REVERENCED; AN ASCETIC*
marut to reverence, ^
kava to PAINT; C>d8 A PAINTEE *
(6.) It is added to proper names to form patronymics, as:
olC|OGD v< * r( *% a yARANA > olCjOClB vdrani varani son of varana
§ 276. Ti is affixed to the same verbal base as that of the pas*
sive past participle, to form feminine abstract noons, as:
oq mara to die, maM death.
mam to know, matii knowledge*
Digitized by v^.ooQle
149
Ajfiaes di, disOy rUo , dihJcho , /, vi, and pit.
§ 277. Dt, from d&*a to see, is appended to pronomial bases
in the signification of like, as:
idi
like
THIS.
ooo9
y&di
like
WHAT.
cob 9
tadi
like
THAT.
oo9
mddi
like
ME.
hidi
like
WHAT?
edi
like
THAT,
coo9
sddi
EQUAL
TO IT.
8COO
<V“
This affix is also written diso, rieo, and dilckhoi
Scooo £}cooo &GCQO
§ 278. (a.) Nouns are formed from verbal or nonn bases by
affixing %, as:
CX)€^ torn t0 D0 » OD ^ ton' a does, an artificer,
danda a stick, dandi one who has a stick.
(&.) It is added to proper names to form patronimics of the
feminine gender, as:
COlODQ gotama gotama, QoIodS 9°^ a/m ^ go^ami daugh-
ter of gotama.
§ 279. Vi is added to nonns to form nouns and adjectives in
the signification of possession, as:
COQ medha understanding, medium possessed of
tJNDERSTANDING, WISE.
§ 280. U, tu, dhu, mo, and me, are added to verbal roots to
form nouns, as:
oBog
bhiklcha
to BEG;
cSogt
bhikhl A BEGGAR.
OD^
hana
to KILL,
oo$
homo DEATH, A WEAPON.
ooq
leara
to DO,
oo<a
torn A DOER.
ool
bU
tO SHINE,
00lCDD[
bhdmo the SUN.
£t
ri
to INJURE,
rent* dust.
CO
VO
tO GO,
cocol
vernc A BAMBOO.
Digitized by
Google
150
Affixes mi, tu, dhu, mma , iya , Ickhuttu, and dM.
CO
dhe
to DRIRK, .
dhenu WHAT (JIVES drink, a COW.
©1
dhd
to SUPPORT,
dhdtu THAT WHICH SUPPORTS, ' A
BOOT,
AN ELEMENT.
08
he
*° °°» coocq
hetu THAT WHICH MAKES TO 00
▲ CAUSE.
du
to AGITATE, SO( ^
davadhu anxiety.
There are other affixes, as mma forming nouns, iya adjectives
and kkhattn, and dhd adverbs, but the principle ones are given.
Some of these affixes are identical with the Sanskrit, as ika,
and H : but others differ materially. When the Sanskrit affix has
a final consonant, the final is dropped, as, i which corresponds
to the Sanskrit m, and dhu to the Sanskrit duch.
When the final consonant is dropped, the preceding vowel is
sometimes lengthened, as vi for vin, and va for vat. Occasional-
ly usage is not uniform. Thus mat in Sanskrit is sometimes
md in Pali and declined like bhagava , § 102: but it is sometimes
ma, and declined tike puriso , § 89. Here it seems to be confoun-
ded with the Sanskrit affix man.
The derivation of words is often quite dissimilar. Thus bha -
gawd, or bhagavat , is derived in Pali from bhaga and the affix va,
but in Sanskrit from bhaga and matuch. Like differences are
frequently met. One of the most note worthy is manussa, man*
In Sanskrit it is derived from manu , and made to signify a de-
scendant of Menu, but Kachchayano derives the word from mo*
nu to know. His words are:
cr^oocoocqoDQCO ©eg o^cB ©>5pc8c8 ©$©oco3
kusalakusale dhamme manati jandtiti manusbO
COCQOII O00€|aD00O0qaD° o^cB <?>o^oc8cB cf)
manuso kdrandkaranan manati jdndtiti vd
«|COOOO ©O^COOOO rnanusso mdnusso
“He understands, he knows the good and not good laws,’ so
[It was said. Hence] manusso. Or, ‘The cause and the causeless
he understands, he knows/ so [It was said. Hence ] manusso.”
For this definition Kachchayano must have drawn his ideas
from a Shemitic source.
Digitized by kjOOQle
CHAPTER X.
COMPOUND WORDS.
Pali, like Sanskrit, is distinguished by its numerous and
complex compound words, but the most involved of them are on-
ly exaggerations of such English expressions as:
“The always-wind-obeying-deep. ”
“Iron-cotton-silk-print and dye works.”
In English the words when compounded remain unchanged,
but in Pali the particles of inflection are dropped from every word
except the last. Of necessity then, the forms that remain are the
bases of the words inflected, and not the roots. This is still the rule
to a limited extent in German. Thus “sonne tag”, “Sun’s day”,
when compounded drops the mark of the genitive, and becomes
SONNTAG, “Sunday.” So denken wurdig, “Worthy to think of.”
when compounded, drops EN, the termination of the infinitive,
and makes denkwurdig, “memorable.”
Kachchayano makes the same divisions of compound words
that the Sanskrit grammarians do, but to whom exception is ta.
ken that they do not distinguish things that differ, the same com-
pound being sometimes referrible to two different divisions. Vari-
ous improved arrangements have been proposed, the last by Max
Muller, beihg the simplest and most logical, is here followed.
I («.) Governing Determinate Compounds.
§ 281. These are sometimes called dependant compounds, be-
cause the first word is dependant on the last, being governed by it
in some oblique case. The last word is often a participle, fre-
quently a noun, and occasionally an adjective. The following are
examples.
oooloo occoo 900I00 occoo
apdya gato % instead of apdyan gato .
“Hell- gone,’ ... “Gone to hell.”
U
Digitized by v^.ooQle
152
Determinate Compounds.
g0006q OOOO £50COCC^) OOCO
is8ara kathan . instead of issar&na kathan «
“Issarar-done.”
rdjapuriso ,
“King-men”,
G€>OG[ oocjq
cAora bhayan,
“Thief-fear.”
OOOOD^ ^Og°
samara dukkhan, ...
“World-misery,”
“Done by Issara.”
e^CgOD^^COOD
ranyopuriso.
“Men of the king.”
cooqcgo OOOQ
chorasmd bhayan .
“Fear from a thief.”
OOOODCq
sansare dukkhan.
“Misery in the world.”
I ( b .) Appositions! Determinate Compounds.
§ 282. In these compounds the first part stands usually as an
adjective qualifying the second, or, in other words, the first is ther
predicate and the last the subject, as:
ccoloBco e§$ ccolo8oo ©j$
lohita chandanan . ... lohitan chcmdanan,
“Red sandal-wood,”
OCQO OCOOcB ODD OOO
mahd 4 gahappati , ... malum gahappaU .
“Great house-master.”
§ 283. The first word in these compounds is sometimes an
indeclinable particle, as:
^o 8 ogt *>c 8 og[ ^*35^00 sd£}cooo
nabhikkJnij or abhikkhu NOT A PRIEST. naariya , or ariyo not an ARIYA.
8<^c©1
vimukho AN UGLY FACE.
0^9300$ OOCOOQ|
kuasancm , or katasanan bad food.
0}0©£)
mgandho good smell.
o^$ooo 000^000
hupwrisdy or kapursa bad men.
009300$ 0000$
kaasana, or katannan bad bice
cqslooo
kudasd worthless slaves^
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Collective Compounds*
153
I (c.) Numeral Determinate Compounds.
§ 284. When the first word is a numeral, these compounds
are classed a b numeral determinate compounds. They, often dif-
fer in gender from the Sanskrit. Max Muller says: u Tri-loki i
fern, the three worlds: here the Dvigu compound takes the fern,
termination to express an aggregate/* The following examples
show that the same thing is expressed in Pali by the neuter:
c 8 ccodoo ©cq §06
ti lohan THE THREE WORLDS. chatu d'Uan THE POUR PLACES.
& og 06
tinayanan the three eyes. panycha vavan five oxen.
So also the Sanskrit “ dvy-ahah znasc. a space of two days.”
is made neuter in Pali. Thus:
sattahan a space of seven days.
n. Collective Compounds,
§ 285. When two or more words are united by the Copulative
Conjunction and, the conjunction is often omitted, and the whole
is formed, into a collective compound, of which there are two kinds*
(a.) The last word is put in the plural number in the gen-
der of that word, as:
OOOOCOO @000000 00 WOOD @00003
samanacha brahmana cha, becomes somana brahmand .
“A Buddhist priest, and a brahmin/*
ooo^qggo colgocfi^o oooSjqgg coogcol^o
.edriputta cha moggalana cha, ... sdriputta moggaland
“Sariputta, and Moggalana.”
-©cog 06)000 cooqcBe ©co oqoo oqcBcooo
balanycha parakkacha mojuticha, . . . bala par ah ka majutiyo.
“Strength, and diligence, and power.**
(b.) The last word is put in the nenter gender and singu-
lar number, Some of these Pali neuter compounds would be put
in the masculine in Sanskrit.
<x>ggo gocooooo oog§s?oo 5
hatticha a88dcha . ... hatti assan .
“Elephants, and horses.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
154 Possessive, and Adverbial Compounds .
Many compounds may be put in either the masculine or neu
ter, as:
TOCOOO CgCOOOO SSCCbgOO 9DC(bgOO0
(yo cfta elko cha y
becomes ajdakan, or ajelahd
“A goat and a ram. 1
HL Possessive Compounds.
§ 286. Possessive compounds are epithets, or predicates, and
are sometimes denominated relative compounds, because they are
used relatively, and may be often rendered in English, by a rela-
tive pronoun, as:
a8c^o oocgQo d8^oocgg6
chhinno hatto , becomes chhirma hatio.
“[That which] has cut the hand”, or “The hand— cutting-”.
00g£5? 000005? OOggfl 0000005
sampanndni sassdni, ... sampanna sasso .
‘‘[Where] grain has abounded,” or “The grain abounding—”
90g[ OOC€|CB CJpCOCgO 8§|o8 £}g°COOO
ambun dhdreti bydlabpo binduhi chabpito Tcufo
cpcoggLosiSi^ooo^O
bydlabpampu dhara bindu chubpita kufo.
“He who holds water suspended by drops that have kiss-
ed the mountain summits,” becomes “The holding-suspended-
mountain-summit-kissed- wate r-drops- [ god of rain.]”
IV. Adverbial Compounds.
§ 287. Adverbial compounds are formed by prefixing an ad-
verb or preposition to a noun put in the neuter singular, as:
yatka vudhdhan according to old age.
yavajivcm as long as life.
upa Jcumbhan near the pot.
anantcvrapasddan between the spires.
tirapappaian beyond the mountains,
OOOOD 0[0°
ooOo &o
ctoos
OOCO
Digitized by v^.ooQle
CHAPTER XI.
SYNTAX, AND CHRESTOMATHY.
The syntax of the Pali language differs very little from that
of the Sanskrit, and beyond a chapter on the cases of nouns, Kach-
chayano is nearly silent on the subject. To supply his deficien-
ces in this, and some other parts of his work, extracts from the
Pali writings will now be given, and the principles of the lan-
guage deduced from them.
ARTICLES.
The native Pali grammarians know nothing of articles, yet
their existance in the language cannot be questioned.
Indefinite Article.
$ 288. The English indefinite article a, cm, French un , Ger-
man em is made in Pali by eko , ekd ekan, the numeral one, and
is probably the origin of the others.
GgooS occtjo c§ oqgc? q
eh) rpuriso gahno dwe padhummam dharitwd ra-
nyo hatte fhapesi.
“A black man brought two lotuses, and caused them to be put
into the hands of the king.”
Eko is the numeral “one”, masc. gen. nom. case § 118. but
here used for the indefinite article “a.” Puriso. “man,” noun 1st.
-decl. masc. gen. sing. nom. case § 89. Gahno , “black,” adjective a-
greeing in gender number and case with the preceding noun § 110.
Dwe is the numeral “two,” nom. case, agreeing with the follow-
ing noun § 114. Padhmmnani , “lotuses,” noun 1st decl. neut.
gen. plur. acc. case governed by the participle following § 90.
Aharitwa , “having brought,” indecL part, from hara , “to take,”
with prep, a, “to bring,” a verb of the first conjugation § 229.
Banyoy “of the king,” irr. noun, masc. sing. gen. case § 108.
JIatte , “in the hands, noun masc. plu. locative, case § 89.
Thapesi, “caused to be placed,” 3d. pers. sing, aorist of the root
a reduplicated verb § 204. ( h .) made causal by the insertion of pe.
§ 200. Though not noted by Kachchayano, the aorist of causa-
tive verbs is often made, as here, by affixing the aorist of a$a ,
“to be”, in the place of the personal terminations § 205,
35
<qx>o oocgQ gcoc8
Digitized by v^.ooQle
156
Article •
Definite Article.
§ 289. The definite article the , Greek to, is made in Pali froltt
the demonstrative ta , which is undoubtedly of common origin with
both the Greek, and English article. It is used like the in the
following sentence:
OOg§«fl8$ OOC§) OOOO 93 COCDc8» 9COO OCOD'
hatti ddini saddo mahd ahosi. atha makd
satto tan saddan sutwa.
“There was a great noise of the elephants, et cetera, and the
Great Satto having heard the noise.”
Hatti ddini , “the elephants and other things,” a possessive
compound, first part the masculine noun hatti in its uninflected
state, plural in signification, and the second part is ddi, “begm-
ing,” but used in this place to signify, beginning from the ele-
phants, and proceeding to other things not expressed. Here the
things implied from the preceding context, are “fourteen hundred
carriages et cetera. ” The word is here put in the neut. plu. nom.
Saddo , “sound, noise,” noun 1st. decl. masc. gend. nom. ease §89.
Mahd , “great,” adj. from mahan § 153. agreeing in gender num-
ber and case with the preceding noun. Ahosi, “was,” 3rd. sing,
aorist of root hu, anomalous verb § 205. Atha , “and, now,” conj,
§ 242. Mahd Satta , “Great Satta,” appositional determinate com-
pound § 282. The first member is maha , as above, the form*
which mahan always takes in these compounds. The second mem-'
ber is satta , “a rational being,” noun 1st. decl. masc. gen. nomv
case. It is here used as a proper name-THE great rational be-
ing, applied to the being that is destined to become a Buddha.
Tan , “the,” demonst. pron. neut. gen. sing. acc. case, agreeing,
in gender number and case with the following noun. Saddan,.
“ noise, “ the same noun as saddo above, but here put in the neu-
ter gender, and acc. case, governed by the participle following.
Sutwa , “having heard,” continuative participle from the root su
to hear, 4th. conjugation § 194.
Were the first sentence to occur on an inscription, it would
puzzle the antiquarians to understand it. Hatti ddini is in the
nominative plural without a verb, while the signification of the
context so clearly requires the genitive case, that the reputed trans-
lator of the Pali books into Burmese, Buddhaghosa, rendered'
it in the genitive without note or comment. This is an in-
structive example in decyphering inscriptions. A precisely parallel
case occurs on the second tablet at Girnar. Prof. Wilson says:
“The use of the nominative case offers a syntactical perplexity,
for there is not any verb through which to connect Antiochus :
with the rest of the sentence.” He proceeds to object to Mr^
Prinsep’s rendering in the genitive, but in which he is fully jus-
tified by the context, and the usage of the Pali books.
OOCQ0O CO 000° oqogo
Digitized by v^-ooQle
Nominative Case .
\bi
NOUNS.
Pali nouns have three cases more than the Greek, and two
fuore than the Latin.
Nominative Case.
§ 290. The usage of the nominative case, does not differ from
that of other languages of the Indu— European family, as:
0oo[ooOq oq^cpo e^8c6ooOo ^§oqco 9sc8$oo6
ukkusa cha, kururd cha, ravthansd cha, nadivardcha , abhiruta .
“Eagles, and ospreys, and sun-ducks* and comorants ring out
loudly their notes.”
JJkkusd , “eagles,” noun 1st. decl. masc. nom. case plur. §89.
Cha , “and,” conj. The three words that follow are parsed in the
same way. Abhiruta , “sound out exceedingly,” nom. case, plur.
masc. of the pass, past part, of the root ru with the preposition
ubhi, signifying excess . The verb is of the first conjugation, but the
participle is made by affixing the termination to the root without
changing u to v, and forming the base rava § 187. The partici-
ple agrees in gender, number, and case with the nouns, but is
here used as a finite verb*
93 OQ <300 0$ OoBcCOO ^jCOOO
ehan tesan jpahito duto .
“I [am] a messenger sent to them.”
Aban, -“I,” 1st. pers. pron. sing. nom. case § 120. Tesan ,
*‘to them,” 3rd. pers. pron. plur. masc, dat. ease § 122. Tahito,
Sent,” adj. nom, case sing. masc. agreeing with the noun follow-
ing § 110. Luto , “a messenger,” noun 1st. decl. masc. nom. sing.
O$C0000d8 *>
“Art thou a man?”
ALanusu, “a man,” noun 1st. decl. masc. nom. sing. Si, “art,”
anomalous verb asa , pres, tense 2nd. pers sing. § 205. Writ-
ten in full it is asi, but the a is elided by the rules of peimuta-*
tion on account of the preceding o § 53 (a.)
GCOO COO £G<gpCOO0
ko namo te ivpajjhdyo
“What [is] the name of thy teacher?”
Ko, “what?” inter, pron. masc. nom. sing, agreeing in gender,
number, and case With the following noun § 127. Namo, “name,”
and t* pajjbayo, “teacher,” nouns of the first declension parsed an
above. Te, “to thee,” 2nd. pers. pron. dative singular. § 121.
Hero used for the possessive pronoun “thy ”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
158
Accusative Oa$e»
Accusative Case.
§ 261. The accusative is not only used to mark the objects of
transitive verbs, but is also used where to would be found in
English, after verbs signifying to listen to y to offer to, to speak
to, to go &>, and others. Occasionally it is used with words mark-
ing time and space.
Ol6 cX)^d3 gdvan hanati , “He kills an ox.”
Qdvan, “an ox,” noun irr. masc. sing. acc. case. § 109.
Ranati, u he kills,” 3rd. pers. sing. pres, tense of the root hana ,
a verb of the 1st. conjugation § 178.
VOQ ODCCpcB ghatan karoti , “He makes a water jar.”
Ohafan , “a water jar,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. acc. §89.
Karoti , “he makes,” 3rd. sing. pres, tense of the root fear a, a
verb of the 7th conjugation § 197,
C^^rOOD o)q dl«OOc8 purisopdrisan gdman gdmayati
“A man causes a man to go to the village.”
Puriso , see § 288. Purisan accusative case of preceding noun §89
Odman , “a village,” noun 1st decl. masc. sing, accusative § 89.
Oamayati , “causes to go,” 3rd. pers, sing, of the root gama § 206.
made causative by ya § 200.
Qg° oqooD (& dhamman sundti “He listens to the law.”
Dhamman , “law,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. acc. case 5 89.
Sundti , 3rd. pers. sing. pres, tense of the root su, 4th, conjugation.
buddhau pujeti, “He offers to the Buddha.”
Buddhan, “Buddha,” noun 1st. decl. as above. Pujeti , “he
offers to,” 3rd. pers. pres, tense of root piija 8th. conj. § 198,
00003^^03 *|q san patanti dumd duman,
“They go together from tree to tree.”
Sanpatanti , “they go together,” 3rd. pers. plur. pres, tense
of the root pata to go with the prepostion 8 an together, a verb
of the 1st. conjugation § 178. Duma, “from tree,” noun 1st. decl.
masc. sing abl. case, md for hmd § 89. Duman , “to tree,” the
same noun as' the preceding, but in the accusative case.
COODOi^ §C€O0 OgCOOO y°) anan fy* 0 pappato-
“A mountain a yuzena high.”
Tojanan , (a measure of distance variously estimated at from 4
to 12 miles,) noun 1st. decl. neuter, sing. acc. case § 90. Dtgho y
“high,” adj. masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with the noun follow-
ing § 110. Pappato , “a mountain,” noun 1st. decl. a a above.
Digitized by
Google
Insbumentive Case.
159
Instrumentive Case.
§ 292. The instrumentive case marks the instrument by which
an act is performed. It is often used in Pali where the ablative
would supply its place in Latin.
808 * CV^Dcfi dattena whin lundti.
“He reaps paddy with a sickle.”
dattena , “with a sickle,” noun 1 st. decl. sing. inst. case § 89.
The noun is made from do to cut, and the affix tta , § 253.
Viliin , “paddy,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. acc. § 91. Lunati , “he
reaps,” 3rd. pers. sing. pres, of lu , a verb of the 5th. conjugation
§ 195.
0 I 080 CO 4 )Og vdsiya rukkkan tachchhati .
“He hews wood with an adze.”
Vdsiya, “with an adza,” noun 1st. decl. fern. sing. inst. case
§ 96. The noun is made from vasa to dwell, and the affix
§ 275 (a.) Bukkhan , * ‘wood,” noun 1 st. decl. masc. sing. acc. § 89.
Tachchhati , “he hews, ” 3rd. pers. sing, pres, tense. 1st. conj. § 178.
pharasuna rukkhan chhindati.
“He fells a tree with an ax.”
Parasuna , “with on ax,” noun 1st decl. masc. sing. inst. case
§93. Bukkhan , “a tree,” noun as above. Chhindati , “he cuts off,”
3rd. pers. sing. pres, tense of the root chhida , a verb of the 2nd.
conjugation § 189.
C^|CCO^ 0008 SCOOcB hudtalena patliavi khanati.
“He digs the earth with a hoe.”
Kudfalena, “with a hoe,” noun 1st. decl. mas. sing. inst. § 89.
This word is also written kudala, and kutala . Pathavi , “earth.”
noun 2nd. decl. fern. sing. acc. § 98. The accusative singular of
this word, as well as others of the the same final, often makes i
in the books, instead of in. Khanati , “digs,” 3rd. pers. sing. pres.
This verb is referred to both khann , and khamu , but it is con-
jugated like a verb of the first conjugation with final a.
OOOOCB chakkhund rupan pussati
“He sees the object with the eye.”
Chakkhund , 4 ‘with eye,” noun 1 st. decl. masc. sing, inst.
§93. Bupm , “the form,” noun 1st. decl. neut. sing. acc.. §90.
passati , “he sees” 3rd. pers. sing pres, tense of the root disa irr.
verb § 207.
GOODCOO^ 30 0 * oqorjOcB sotena saddan mndti
“He hears the sound with the ear.”
Sotena, “with the ear,” and sahdan, “the sound,” parsed as
above. Sunati , he hears,” parsed in § 261,
36
Digitized by
Google
160
Instrument ive Case.
COOCOO^ ODg COCCpcB Mye>n iamman karoti
“He does the deed with the body.”
Kdyena , “with the body,” and kamman , “the deed,” as above.
Karoti , “he does.” see § 291. Printed 261, on page 158.
OOO cB aunena vasati , “He lives by boiled rice.”
Aimena , “boiled rice,” nonn 1st. decl. common gender, sing,
inst. § 89. Vasati , “he lives,” 3rd. conj. sing. pres, tense of the
root vasa, a verb of the 1st. conjugation § 178.
^ ammena vasati^ “He lives by the law.”
Lhammena , “by the law,” nonn 1st. decl, masc. sing. inst. § 89*
8gOOO OOOCB vijjdya vasatti , “He jives by knowledge.”
Vijjdya , “by knowledge,” nonn 2nd. decl. fem. sing. inst. § 95.
SSoB^O 3? gD a}tln< * fott 110 naro
“A man is bitten by a snake.”
Ahind, “a snake,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. inst. § 91.
Do #7/o, also written dafhu, and daddo , “is bitten,” pass, past part*
masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with naro, The void is refer-
red to danta , bnt it is the same root as the Sanskrit dans. § 227.
Naro , “a man,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. nom. ease. § 89.
O^C^> ODC ODD fOCO) 9 *™ter,a hato ndgo
“A naga is killed by a garuda.”
Garufena , “a galung,” an enormous bird that keeps watch ih
the cotton trees on the sides of mount meru. — Parsed as above.
Hato , pass, past part. masc. nom. case, agreeing with ndgo , and
made from the root hana § 227, Ndgo, “a naga,” parsed as a-
bov.e. The nagas are dragons that inhabit the regions under Me-
ru. There are said to be four tribes, each with its chief, one of
whom is called king of snakes.
&CCOO OOCCp buddhma jito maro
“Mara was conquered by Buddha.”
Buddha , “Buddha,” noun parsed as above. Ji'no, “conquered”
pass, past part. masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with the noun fol-
lowing, from the root jt of 1st. conj. jayati § 226, 227. Maro i
“Mara,” death, but also, as here, a name of Kama god of love
«DQCp OQg.0 v !P aJcuttena md/ro bandll °
“Mara was bound hy Upakutta.”
Bandho, “was bound,” pass, past part. masc. sing. nom. case,
agreeing with maro. This word is referred to both badha, ana
bandha. The verb is irregular.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Instrtmentwe Cate.
161
OQCOg} OCGjO ydkkhena dinm varo
“ A gift was given by a Beeloo.”
Yakkhena , “by a Beeloo,” noun 1st. decl. inst. as above. The
Yakkhas, or Beeloos, in the Buddhist mythology, are the guardians
of sacred buildings, while the Hindus make them the guardians
of the treasures of Kuvera the god of wealth. Dinno , “was given”,
pass, past part. masc. nom. case, agreeing with the noun follow-
ing § 228. In Sanskrit this participle is made by t.
Varo , “a gift,” noun 1st. decl. nom. case as above.
Colcg^ COloOCol fCOOO gotfena gotarm ndtho
“The Lord by family [was called] Gotama ”
Oottena , “by family,” noun 1st. decl. inst. case as above.
Gotomo , “Gaudama,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. nom. case. § 89.
Natho , “Lord,” noun, parsed like the preceding.
ODGOOD tapasa uttamo “The best by asceticism.
Tapasa , “by asceticism,” noun 3rd. decl. neut. sing. inst. § 103.
Uttamo , “best,” adjective masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with a
noun understood § 1 1 0.
oqQcgjDj* scoSflcdl
suvarme abhirupo “Handsome by colour.”
Svvimpua, “by colour,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing, inst § 89.
Abhirupo , “handsome,” adjective masc. sing. nom. case § 110.
o1cSj> COoScCOD jpadena lakkhito khanyjo
‘‘A crooked footed man is noticed by the foot.”
Pddena , “by the foot,” noun inst. case, as above. Lakkhito,
“is noticed,” pass past. part, as before from the root lakkJta.
Khanyjp, “a crooked footed man,” noun 1st. decl. as before.
S^OCO CCoBcCOD Sj)C^O P lthl,jd lak ^ ato khujjo
“A crooked backed man is noticed by the back.”
Pithiya 9 “by the back,” noun 2nd. decl. fern. sing. inst. § 96.
Kujjo, a crooked backed man,” noun 1st. decl. as before.
93o wocoop cooqg^ ocgp
ada mdsena chetutta nagaran patio .
“He arrived at the Chetutta country by half a month.”
Ada mdsena, “by half a month,” i. e. “in half a month,” an
appositional determinate compound, the first member is the noun
ada , or adda , “half,” of the 1st. decl, both masculine and neuter ;
and the the second is the inst. case of mdsa, “a month,” a noun,
1st. decl* masc. § 282. Chetutta nagaran , “Chetutto country,” a
compound word like the preceding. The first member is chetutta,
a proper noun, and the second is the acc. case of nagara , a neuter
noun governed by the participle following. Patio , “arrived, “pass,
past part, from the root pada , used for a finite verb In Sanskrit
this participle is made by n.
Digitized by AjOOQle
162
Dative Cate.
Dative Case.
§ 293. The dative may be usually rendered in English by
to, or /or, but occasionally by at, against , and from. The Pali
usage does not appear to differ in any-wise from the Sanskrit.
ODg^OOgOaOCXX) Og* OOOgO
sabpanyuta nyd mssa pafhanan katwd.
“Having made prayer for infinite knowledge.
Sabpanyuta nyanassa, “foi infinite knowledge,” an appo3itional
determinate compouud, § 282. the first member is the adjective sab-
panyuta, “infinite;” and the second member is the dat. case of
the noun nydna, 1st. decl. neut. sing. § 90. Pafhnan, “prayer,”
noun 1st. decl. neut. acc. governed by the participle. Katwd,
“having made,” continuative participle of the root kara § 197.
CSO «$OOOD$ ccolcoo gog>cB
deva nianussanan budho loke uppajjati,
“For devas, [and] men buddha was bora into the world.”
Deva manmsdnan, “For devas, [and] men,” a collective com-
pound, § 285 (a.) the first member is deva, “devas,” noun 1st.
decl. The second member is manussana , “for men” noun 1st decl.
masc. plur. dative case § 89. Buddho, “buddha,” see § 291.
Loke, “in the world,” 1st. decl. maso. sing. loc. case § 89.
Uppajjati, ‘is bora.” 3rd. sing. pres, tense of the root jana, here
compounded with the preposition s. It is conjugated in the 1st.
conjugation, j being substituted for n, and the p doubled according
to the rules of permutation, § 75.
OOOOO OOOOCOOQ 2dG[OOQCOO 00 gO OOg[gOOD
namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammd sambuddhossa
‘‘Glory to this Lord, venerable, complete perfect in knowledge.”
Kamo, “glory,” indec. particle applied by the Hindus to their
gods, as here applied to Gaudama. Tassa, “to this” dem. pron.
masc. sing. dat. case, root ta § 122. Bhagavato, “Lord,” noun
3rd decl. masc. sing. dat. case § 102. Arahato, “venerable,”
adjective agreeing in gender number and case with the preceding
noun. § 111, Sammd sambuddhossa , “complete perfect in know-
ledge, appositional determinate compound § 282. the first mem*
ber is the adjective sammd, “complete,” the final vowel is length-
ened into d, according to § 74. The second member is sambud -
dhassa, “perfect in knowledge,” dat. case of the pass, past part,
of the root budha, compounded with the preposition san , imply-
ing perfection,§ 227. The final anuswara is changed to m before
b § 83. “Samma sambuddha” is often used as a proper name.
This sentence is written at the beginning of every Buddhist
book, and is said have been first uttered by an assembled universe,
when the first Buddha obtained omniscience.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
, Genitive Case. ICS
Genitive Case.
§ 294 The genitive case is well represented in English by
the preposition of, and though it may be often rendered by an o-
ther particle, the idea conveyed by of usually lies at the base.
<$$<?©! 9©oo oooco cqoooo 0000^8
Jcirmukho (than iassa sukhassa bhaydno.
“Why am I really afraid of this happiness?”
Kinnu, “why?” Kho, “really” adverbs. Ahan , “I,” 1st. pers*
pron. sing. nom. ca3e, § 120. Tassa, “this,” dem. pron. masc*
sing. gen. case, agreeing with the following noun § 1 22. Sukhassa^
“happiness,” noun of the same gender, number, and case as the
preceding dem. pron. Bhayami, “afraid.” 1st. pers. sing. pres, tense
of the root bhaya, 1st. conjugation, § 178.
cooogDcoooqooool coooocooo^ooooooqood
Ye dhamma hetu pabhavd Tetani hetun tathajato
TOOOO^ODOOg^CGp COO cool §OOODOO«rODD
Aha tesanycha nirodho Evan vddi maha sanvmo
“The laws which produce cause, the cause of these Tathagata
i has told. And the extinction of these, the great Samana, in like
j ‘ manner has declared.”
Assaji, one of Gautama’s disciples, gave as a synopsis of his
! master’s teaching, the above stanza ; which has been found in an old
character, engraven, on images dug up at Tagoung, and in Tirhut.
Ye, “which,” rel. pron. masc. plur. nom. case agreeing with-
the following noun 126. Dhamma , “laws,” see § 292. Hetu
! ibhava, “generators of cause,” determinate compound, § 281.
The first member is hetu , “causes,” noun 1st. decl. § 93. and the
second is pabhavd , “generating causes,” noun 1st. decl. masc. plur.
| nom. case, agreeing with the verb to be understood. Tesan , “of these
I [laws], dem. pron. masc. plur. gen. case, governed by the follow-
ing noun.. Hitun, “the cause,” noun, as above, ace. case govern-
J ed by aha . Talhagatho, proper name, nom. case to aha. Aha , ”has
told,” 3rd. per. sing. peif. tense of the irr. verb bru, § 209. Some
of the images have uvdoha , and the books give in paraphrase
dhaavocha. Tesanyeha, “and of these,” the conj cha, “and,” chan-
ges the final anuswara of the pron. to ny § 83. Nirodho,
“extinction,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. nom. case, with the verb
to be understood, as in the first line. The relative pronoun yo, ex-
pressed on the images, is also understood being omited to pre-
serve the measure. Evan, “so,” adverb, § 239. Vadi, “has declar-
ed.” 3rd. pers. sing, aorist of the root vai%, the augment omit-
ted, see § 213. Mahd samano, “the great Samana,” appositional de-
terminate compound, § 282, 293.
37
Digitized by v^-ooQle
164
Ablative Case.
Ablative C&e*
§ 295. The ablative case is expressed in English by thepre-
position from, but may be often rendered by on account of.
c8«0000 OOOO^J Og «ODD ^§COOO
hima/vatd pabhavanti panycha mahd nadtyo.
“From the Himalaya originate five large rivers.”
Himouoatd , “Himalaya,” noun 3rd. decl. masc. sing. abl. case
§ 102. Pabhavanti , “originate,” 3rd. pers. plur. pres, tense of the
root bhu with the preposition pa, § 205. |. Panycha mahd nadtyo ,
“five great rivers,” numeral determinate compound, § 284. The
first member is the numeral panycha, “five,” and the second mem-
ber is an appositional determinate compound, of which the first
member is maha, § 289. the other nadtyo , “rivers,” noun 2nd.
decl. fern. plur. nom. case, § 98.
goo coo d cqooccoo qcggo oo&ccoco SSccooo
ubhato sujato puto matito clta pifito cha
“The son is well bora from both father, and mother.”
Ubhato , “from both,” adj. pron. masc. sing. abl. case, agree-
ing with pitito, declined like sabpa § 110. In Sanskrit this word
is only dual. Sujdto. “is well bora,” passive past part. nom.
case of the root jana with the preposition su, and agreeing with
the noun following, § 227. (6.) Putto , “the son,” noun masc.
sing. nom. case, § 89, Mdtito — pittto , nouns abl. case governed by
the participle. Oha — cha, “both — and” conjunction: § 242.
OO COOO qcgp urasmd jdto putto
“The son was bora from the breast.”
Urasmd , “from the breast,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing abL
case & 89. Jdto, and putto as above.
oocgo g^coo qcjcbS oo8cooc8
Jcasmd idheva maranan bhamssaU
“On what account will death thus come into existance here?”
Kasmd , “on what account?” int. pron. masc. sing. abl. case,
§ 127. Idha , “here,” and “era, “thus,” adverbs, A follow-
ed by e is elided, and the anuswara is elided, § 77. Maranan,
“death/’ noun 1st, decl. neut. sing. nom. case § 89, BhamssaU,
“will come into existance,” 1st. pers. sing. pres, tense of the root
IU § 205.
oocood qoo
tato rajd “The king from that [time].
To,, from that time,” dem. pron. masc. sing. abl. case, §122.
Digitized by
Google
Locative Oase .
*65
Locative Cate.
§ 29$. The locative Case is not found in either Latin, Or Greek.
In English it is usually made by the preposition in, at y or on; but
it is often interchanged with other cases.
gocooO «$cpoo ooqoq coooc&c^o} ooooooS
ito madhwraya chatusu yqjcmesu eakassan nama nagarcm
atthi
“From this, Madhura, in four yojanas is Sakassa city by name.”
Ito , “from this place,” adverb. Madhurdya , “Madura,” noun
2nd. decl. fem. abl. case. § 95. Chatuw, “four,” num. adj. loc.
case agreeing in gender, number, and case with the noun foil ow-
ing, § 116. Sakassan , “Sakassa,” noun 1st. decl. neut. nomin-
ative case to the verb atthi y “is,” at the close of the sentence.
Nama , “by name”, adverb, equivalent to “which is called.”
30^>OOCOO SoOOslcODO
andgate pvyadaso ndma
oqoDcCp 3003 gOOOOCOOgS
kumdro chhattan ussdpetwd
93CODDCOOD OgCpOiD Co8oOOcB
asoko dhammarajd bhavissati
good co«c> oooqcooO 8ggp^ooO op%x>dc8
so ima dhdtuyo vittarita karissati
“In future time, Piyadasa by name, a prince, after he has
been induced to raise the umbrella, will become Asoka king of
the law. He will make the relic distribution.”
These verses are said to have been inscribed over Gaudama's
relics, as a prophecy of Asoka who would appear subsequently.
Two versions of the Burmese translation are before the
public, and are given below.
(1.) “In after time, the son of a king named Pya-da-tha will *
be created king ; Thcm-ka will be his name. He will cause these
reKcs to be spread over the face of the South island.”
(2.) “In after times, a young man, named Piadatha, shall
ascend the throne, and become a great and renowned monarch’
under the name of Athoka. Through him, the relics shall be
spread over the island of Dzampoodipa.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
166
Personal Pronouns.
Personal Pronouns.
§ 297. The following examples illustrate the use of the
personal pronouns.
oqogg* COO QOCjOOCOQ caiman te Sh&rayate
“He bears gold to thee.
Suvaman , “gold,” noun 1st decl. neut. acc. oase. Te, “to
thee,” 2nd. pers. pron. sing. dat. case § 121. Dharayate , “he bears”,
3rd. sing. pres, of the root dhdnra, 8th. conj. deponant § 198.
cooooo ssosloo
so tan dddya , “He having taken her.”
So , “he,” 3rd. pers. pron. masc. sing. nom. case, § 122.
Tan , “her,” pronoun as above, fern. acc. case, governed by the
participle following. Addya , “having taken her,” contin. part,
of the root dd, with the prep, d, § 234.
CODO COO} <j$CCO} OOg 0 OOCC^cB
so puriso tena purieena kamman kareti
“This man canses a deed done by that man.”
So , “this,” the same pronoun as above but used for the dera.
pron. this § 122. Tena, “by that,” inst. case of the same word,
but here used for that. Kareti , “causes-done.” 3rd. pers. sing,
pres, tense causative of the root karra, t § 197, 198.
coo ooooo oo$ oqogo soooo
$d tas8a vacharum sutwa aha
“After she had heard the words of him i. e. his words, she said.”
Sd y “she,” pron. as above, fern. nom. case. Tassa , “of him.
or his,” the same word, masc. gen. case, § 122. Sutwd, “after
[she] had heard,” § 289. As in Sanskrit, the continuative past
participle may be often rendered by after.
sic}} CO OC}0
danena me rammati mano
“By giving, the mind of me i. e. my mind is made happy.”
Danma, “by giving,” noun 1st decl. neut. sing. inst. case*
§ 90. Me “of me, or my,” 1st. pers. pron. sing. gen. case. § 120.
Bammatu “is made happy,” 3rd. pers. sing, passive with active ter-
minations from the root ramu , and agreeing with its nominative
case, the noun following, § 179, 183.
si} olc^S l^OOOcB
mahyan dana par ami purissati
“The giving virtue of me, i. e. my, will be perfected.”
Mahyan , “of me, or my,” 1st. pers,. pron. sing. gen. case
§ 120. Dana par ami, “giving virtue,” appositional determinate
compound § 282. Purissati , “will be perfected.” 3rd. pers. sing,
future tense of the root pur a, 1st conjugation, § 178.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Relative Pron&ttn.
isr
Relative £ro&0tuL
§ 298 The relative pronoun precede! tfoe noun to Wklcl it
refers, instead of following it as in English, and it is usually ibl-
lowed by a demonstrative pronoun in a correlative clause. It
is often used before a personal pronoun to make the latter em-
phatic.
cq <xBcoo 8 g° co ocBooo 8 oooo 8
yan dukkhan patisevihpan tan patisemssdmi
“Whdt affliction ought to be suffered, that I wiH suffer.”
Yan, ‘‘which,” 126. Patisevibpan , “what ought to be Suffered,”
future pass. part, of the root seva with the preposition pati, acc. case
governed by the verb following, § 235. Patisevissdmi . c £ will
suffer,” 1st. pers. sing. fat. tense of the root seva as before.
ooD°g oooc&oS 080 I 00 c 0 |° oqogJ^ gggcocgg
ydtwan pure vassanfdpi sigdya smdan sutwdna uttasatte
coo 3 og o$* coco oo£jooct 8
mahuu so twanvangan anupatto kathan karissati
“And, thou a person who, dwelling in the city, has, been
often frightened, when she beard the howl of the jackal, how
Will she do when she has followed to the SimaJlaya?”
Yd , “a person who” rel. pron fem. § 126. ! Twan thou, § 121.
Vart'mtd, “dwelling,” pres. part. fem. sing. nom. case, agreeing
with the the pronoun, from the root vassa. Pi, “and,” cotty. § 242.
‘Sugdya, “of the jackal,” noun, 2nd, dCcl. fem. sing. gen. case, § 95.
tSaddan sutivana, “when she heard the howl,” see § 289. Mafhtm ,
“often,” adverb. Uttasate, “has been frightened.” pass, past part,
of the root tmcL, with the particle Vita denoting intensity. So, “this
person.” Vangan, “himalaya,” the name of a mountain in the hima-
laya, acc. ca&e. Anupatto , ‘^when she has followed,” pass, past part.
Of the root pada with the preposition anu, masc. § 291 . Kathan.
“how,” adverb. Karissati , “will she do?,” § 291. This passage
is instructive in reading inscriptions. There is an utter disregard
Of gtender. It begins With the feminine, and ends With the mas-
culine, where it ought to be feminine throughout. The participle,
uttasatte , is in the locative case agreeing with pure , instead of be-
ing in the nominative and agreeing with yd ; but in some copies the
word is written utasate , changing the participle to the 3rd. pers.
sing. pres, of the passive voice. Then again the verbs are in the
third person agreeing with the relative, while they are sometimes
made to agree with the personal pronoun.
COO'JCfS o 88 £ OO^D <33^3000 CXp^S
yohan sivinati vachand a'lmakan p ippdjeml
“I who drove away the innocent from the words of the Sivi.”
In this example the verb agrees with the pers vail pronoun,
but it is sometimes made to agree winh the relative.
38
Digitized by v^.ooQle
168
Verbs and Participles.
Verbs and Participles.
§ 299. According to Kachchayano’s rules, when a verb has
nominatives of different persons, it is put in the first person plural.
Thus:
COOOO OgcB SQUOg OgoS
so cha pathati ahanycha pafhami
“He reads, and I read,” are expressed by
Ogg Ogc8 »OOg OgoS
twanycha pafhasi ahanycha patdmi
“Thou readest and I read
QCO OgOQ
may cm pafama
“We read.”
« a
COOOO OgcB Ogg Ogc8 QOOOgOgoS “ *
socha pathati twanycha pa tasi aham/chapathdmi
“He reads, and thou readest, and I read.”
COOOO OgcB COOO Og^ Ogg OgcB
socha pathati
sooog ogoS
te cha pafhanti twanycha pathasi
ahanycha pathdmi
ogoo
tuhme pafhatha
“He reads, and they read, and thou readest, and you read, .
and I read,” are referred to collectively by “We read.”
§ 300, Participles are of much more frequent occurrence in
Pali writings than verbs, and the passive past participle is often
used in the place of a finite verb. This past participle is also
nsed with the verb to be, to form, as in English, a perfect past,
and a perfect fixture tense. Thus:
0000 $
§cqo 90 cB
idani katun difho euri
“Now has been seen to work, thou art!”
Difo , “has been seen,” pass, past part, of the root disa, § 227.
Asi, “thou art,” 2nd. pers. sing. pres, tense of root asa 9 § 205.
oosl (jo>cooo 8 oooo oo8oooc8 cB
taddjujako pi idani modi aranycm gatd bhavissatiti
“Then Jujaka [thought], “Madi having gone to the forest will
be, i. e. will have gone.”
Tuda, “then,” idani 9 “now,” adverbs, § 238. Arawyan , “ to
the forest,” noun 1st. decl. neut. acc. case: § 90. Oata 9 “having
gone,” pass, past part, of the root gamu 9 fern. sing, nom case,
agreeing with the noun Madi § 206. Bliamssati , “will be,” 3rd.
pers. sing, future tense of the root bhu, § 205. The final i is leng-
thened by § 42 ( b .) Ti , for Hi, the initial i coalesing with the
final of the previous word. This particle is used at the close
of a sentence expressing the words or thoughts of another, where
inverted commas are used in English.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
169
Inscription on a gold Scroll.
Ancient inscription on a gold Scroll.
§ 301 When two old pagodas were taken down in Toun-
goo, in 1863, two gold scrolls were discovered with Pali inscrip-
tions, one five or six octavo pages in length ; and from a silver
plate with an inscription in Burmese, it appeared that they were
deposited there A. D. 1547. The inscriptions are almost exclusi~
vely confined to extracts from the Buddhist Scriptures. As it
would be difficult to find a palm leaf book one hundred years
old, the finding of these inscriptions is like finding a manuscript
two or three hundred years older than any extant, and possibly
much older, for it is not known when the. inscriptions were made.
The inscriptions instead of commencing with the sentence on
page 162, as they would if written now, begin with:
co>oocq 8$>oodoo£
Jeyatu Jinasdsanan
“Let the religion of the Jina overcome.” or,
“Let the religion of the Victor be victorious.”
Extracts from the Fitakapa follow, stating that the Buddha
discovered tl e precise constituents of mind and matter, enumerating
them, and tracing all things from nothing to nothing. One of
thrse extracts is here given.
9o8g>l ogooo ooSlepn ooSle| ogooo 8goocr>*
avijju pachchayd sangkhdrd sangkhara pachchayd mnyanan
“The effect of ignorance was existance, of existence knowledge,
8^000 OgOOO OgOOD OOS£DOGOOCE>°
mu yam pachchayd ndmarvpan ndmarupa pachchayd safdyatanan
of knowledge mind and matter, of mind and matter abodes,
00^00000000 OgOOO OCOXO
safayatana pachchayd phasso
of manifested abodes contact,
cosp OgOOO OOCBJO
vedand pachchayd tahnd ,
of sensation concupiscience,
golsl^) ogooo ooccfl
npddana pachchayd bhavo
of attachment state of being,
0300 OgOOD COSp
phassa pachchayd vedana
of contact sensation,
OOCKJO OgOOd
tahnd pachchayd updddnan
of concupiscience attachment,
OOO gOOOD OvOcB
bhava pachchayd jati
of state of being birth,
Digitized by v^.ooQle
170 Inscription on a gold Scroll.
<*<£ ogood o »«p «e\ceo cooooo O^c*o qog
joti pachctuvyd jara, marana, soka, pccrideva , dukkha
CSltt|)OOOLgloOOOQO <i ° mamsgu M , < i y d8d samlhavcmti
of birth, age, death, sorrow, weeping, Buffering, unhappy mind,
and exhaustion.”
Avijja pachckayd , “The effect of ignorance was existance ;
the construction makes these words a governing determinate com-
pound, § 281. The first member is <wij$a from vijja knowledge,
and a privative ; and is explained as synonymous with moha , “that
spiritual ignorance which leads men to believe in the reality of
worldly objects.” The second member is pachohayd noun, 1st. decl.
^masc. sing. ph*r. nom. case. But the first word, instead of being
in the genitive case, is put in the nominative plural, as if in ap-
position with the second. In the oilier clauses it has the nomina-
tive affix sometimes, and sometimes has not.
Sangkhdrd , “existance,” this word appears to be derived from
the root khara to drop, and wrth the preposition san to flow. The
noun seems to denote an inherent power in natters to act before
the existance of matter.
Safdyatona , “abodes,” from the root sofa, to manifest, and
the noun dyatcma , a house or abode Twelve are enumerated six
subjective, the perceptions of seeing, heating, smelling, basting,
touching, and thinking, and six objective, form, sound, odour,
flavour, tangibility, and objects of thought.
At the dose of the inscription occurs the following sentence,
added by the writer to the extracts from the Pitakapa:
! jikfl CD©<& sooiqgo ooocB °f u0
dhwd tafphati ddiehcho rattin taphttti chemdimd
“The sun is beautiful by day, the moon is beautiful by night,
g^g§cooo cokkB <a**oo8° doocB
ittkjo sanaddo taphati jdgin tcfphctM brtihmano
a woman is beautiful in modesty, and a Brahmin in telling beads ;
200© 0©g«COO3<3|fg§' ob©c8 oobcood
atha 8tibpaio6haratUii budffho taphati tejo
but the Buddha, a brilliant Kght, was beautiful through all the night.
Diva , “by day,” and rattin , “by night,” are cases of nouns
used adverbially. Tcjo , “ a brilliant light,” is a noun in apposition
with bnddfta) and agreeing With it in gender, number, and case.
The praise here given to Brahmins, which the Buddhists give fa
Samanas, proves that this inscription was made under Braminical
influences.
Digitized by LnOOQle
I7i
The longest Pali word.
The longest Pali word.
§ 302. Perhaps the longest word in the Pali books is the
following Possessive compound, complexly compounded.
COODOD^OO©e\COE> D
Pavarra , surasura, garuda, marmja , bujaga, gandhappa, mahufa , Tcuta
chumpita, sda , sanghafita , charano. “The foot on stones which
are placed on the summits of the crests of the most excellent of liv-
ing beings, the inhabitants of heaven, asshurs, griffons, men, dra-
gons, and celestial musicians.”
The base of this word is:
o^cpo 0^00 Q^ODO oqc&olo o^olo
Sura, cha asurd , cha garuda cha mamujd cha bujagd cha gcmdhcvp-
pd cha “Angels, and fallen-angels, and griffons, and men
and dragons, and celestial musicians.’’
It is made into a collective compound according to § 285
(a.) and written:
surasura , garuda , mxmuja , bujaga , gandhappd
“Angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”
An adjective, pavara , is prefixed, and an appositional determi-
nate compound is formed, § 282. thus:
ooqa^e^oajG|o^j^Q^c?>oqo>oo|j.g1
Pavara, surdsura , garuda , marmja , bujaga , gandhappd
“Excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celes-
tial musicians.”
A noun is affixed governing a genitive case, and a governing
determinate compound is formed § 281, Thus:
Pavara, surdsura , garuda , marmja , bujaga , gandhappanan maJcufdni.
“The crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men,
dragons, celestial musicians.”
Another noun is added and the compound is extended,
thus:
3.9
Digitized by v^.ooQle
173
The longest Pali toord.
Pavara, surdsura , garuda, manuja, bujaga, gandhappa, mafoifdnan,
kufdni “The summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels*
griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”
A passive past participle is next affixed governing the loca-
tive, and forming a possessive compound, thus:
Pavara , surdsura, garuda , manuja, bujaga, gandhappa, makufajeufesu,
chwmpitd, “Being placed on the summits of the crests of excellent
angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”
A noun agreeing with the participle is now added, thus:
cooooo
Pavara, surdsura, garuda , manuja , bujaga, gandhappa , tnakvja,
huja, ehumpita , sela. “Stones being placed on the summits of the
crests of excellent angels, falien-angels, griffons, men, dragons, ce-
lestial musicians.”
To this another passive past participle is affixed governing
the instrumentive case, thus:
ccooBooeo^ooo
Pavara, surdsura, garuda, manuja , bujaga, gandhappa, makufOj
Tcufa, ehumpita, sdehi sanghafild . “Are brought in contact with stones
placed on the summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-an-
gels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”
Another noun agreeing wth the last participle is added, and the
application of the clause is brought out by adding the relative pro-
noun and Tathagata in the genitive singular, thus:
oo€^cxjqoaj^ o( g^ Q^oqc^ 0 ° G 00
CODD?>D^OO€)€|OOODODOOOOOOOOOOOOOD
Pwoara, surdsura, garuia, mamvja, bujaga, gandhappa, mahufa,
hut a, ehumpita, sela , sanghafita, charand, yassa, tathagatassa. “The feet
Of one who is a Tathagata are brought in contact with stones
Placed on the summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels,
griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
i h/uctama, 9 * Sfermtn.
in
Gautama's Famous Sermon.
$ 303. The longest discourse of Gaudama’s on record, is one
Composed in the usual PhK verse of eight syllables. It is said to
have been preached at Gaya, in Magudha, on “a flat rock at the
top of a hill, which resembles the canopy of an elephant’s howdah.”
“The little mountain of the isolated rock,” mention by Fa Hian,
the Chinese traveller in the fourth century, was probably the same
place. It was addressed to one thousand mendicant friars, all of
whom were converted to Rahandas, at its close.
Bishop Bigandet says, in his exhaustive work on Buddha, and
Buddhism: “The philosophical discourse of Budha on the mountain
may be considered as the summary of his theory of morals. It is
confessedly very obscure, and much above the ordinary level of hu-
man understanding.” The original text with philological notes, and
ft literal translation are here given. They may remove some of its
obscurities, and make it more easily understood.
sapban bhikkhave ddittan hinycha bhikkhave sapban ddittan
“Mendicants ! All burn. What all burn ? Mendicants !
vhakuhu ddittan
The eye burns,
flol 900 §003
rupa ddittd
forms seen burn,
ocg[oogcoooD9DO§cggd
clmkh’hn mnydnan ddittan
perception burns;
chakkhu samphasso ddltto
impression of the eye bums,
ooSioc^^oogocoogoOo ggg;cBcoso8oo
yarn, id, an chakkhu samphassa pachcha yd uppajjati vedayitan
oqScfl ^o£>o1
93 qogQoqScfl 00 893
suklian vd dukkhan vd adukkh amasukhan vd tcun pi dddtcm
the effects of impressions of the eye, whether pleasure or pain,
painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produced, that also
burns ”
The passage might be rendered ad senswm thus: “The faculty of.
sight burns, objective vision bums, subjective vision bums, visual
impressions bum, and the effects of visual impressions whether,
the sensations be pleasant or painful, they also burn.”
Digitized by v^.ooQle
174
Qaudamcts Sermon.
COO^ ®D§0Q '
CpO§^> CSIOO^O
rdgaggmd dosaggind
kena ddittan
“By what do they bum?
coboo^S 9X)§g^*
mohaggind ddittcm
OtOcBooC) c?iC|ooo qc|Cc<Dj> cooOcoooB o£}cscoo8
jdtiyd jaraya maranena soJcehi paridevehi
qcogcB caly^ccoooB gdlooocoooB 9SO§gg J^oslS
dukkhehi domanassehi updyasehi ddittanti vaddmi
“By the fire of passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spiritual
ignorance they bum ; by birth, by age, by death, by sorrows, by
weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings, by exhaustion they bum’.
I say.”
Adlttan , “bum, pass, past part, of the root dapa , or tapa with
the preposition a, neut. sing, agreeing with sapban, but used like
a finite verb, § 226. (<?.). The word is used in the signification of
jnj tapa the corresponding Sanskrit word, which is defined by
Wilson: “To bum ; (hence figuratively,) to suffer mental or bodily
pain.” Kinycha , “and what,” inter, pron. neut. sing. nom. case § 127 ?
and the conjunction cha , which changes the anuswara to ny by
§ 83. Evpd , “forms,” noun 1st. decl. neut. plur. nom. case § 90.
Chakkliu vinyanan , “perception,” lit. “knowledge of the eye,” go-
verning determinate compound, the second member of which is vi-
nydnan governing the first in the genitive. This word has been a r
dopted into Burmese in the signification of “mind,” or “soul,” and
“mind of the eye,” is a very appropriate circumlocution for “per-
ception. Chakkhu sampkasso , “impression of, or on the eye,” go-
verning determinate compound, of which the second member is sam-
phasso from the root phmsa or phatsa, “to find, to feel, bring in
contact,” with the preposition san implying completion. As the
word is stated to produce se nsation, it must denote the impres-
sion made on the eye by rays of light proceeding from some object.
drwngo twekhyeng , is a Burmese definition of the
word, lit. “the feeling an external object of sense.” This corres-
ponds substantially with the definition given above. The noun is
in the masculine sing., and the participle agrees with it.
Tamidam, “whatever,” neuter singular of the pronouns yo,
ima, S 126, 124. agreeing with vedayitan. Anuswara is changed
to m by § 81.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
&a udamd's Semt/m .
M5
C00lo5 903^' 00§te§g^5
sotan ddittan saddhd ddittan
The ear burns* sounds bprn,
bearing burns, auricular impressions burn, the effects of auricular
impressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless,
.whatever sensation is produced, that also burns.
“By what do they burn ? By the fire of passion, by the fire
of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they bum ; by birth,
by age, by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental
sufferings, by exhaustion, they burn/ I say.”
.0*4 o&o
ghdnan ddittan gaiujldJiA ddittd
'“The nose burns, odors burn,
smelling burns, odoriferous impressions burn, the effects of odori-
ferous impressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasure-
less, whatever sensation is produced, that also burns.
“By what do they burn ? By the fire of passion, by the fire
of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they burn; by birth, by age,
by death, by sorrows, Jxy weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings
by exhaustion they burn/ I say.”
&cp. 9S>0§g£0‘ G[ OOO
jthvd ddpttd rasa ddUtd
“The tongue burns, objects of taste burn,
taste burns, impressions of taste burn, the effects of impressions of
taste, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasurelass, whatever
sensation is produced, that also bums.
“By what do they burn ? By the fire of passion, by the fire
of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they bum ; by birth, by
age, by death* by sorrows,, -by weepings, by pains, by paental suffer-
ings, by exhaustion they burn/ I say.”
OOO COOO 9OD§CQ0O COOggl 92D§£gO
kayo dditto phofhappA ddiiM
“The body burns, tangible objects burn,
feeling burns, tangible impressions burn, the effects of tangible im_
pressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, what-
ever sensation is .produced, that also burns.
“By what do they bum P By the fire of passion, by the fire
of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignoran.ee they burn ; by bi^h^jby agp
40
Digitized by v^,ooQle
176
Oaudama't Sermon .
by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings,
by exhaustion they burn/ I bay.”
300§Qfy>
memo dditto dhatnmd dditta
“The mind burns, objects of thought bum,
thinking bums, mental impressions burn, the effects of mental im-
pressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, what-
ever sensation is produced, that also bums.
“By what do they bum ? By the fire of passion, by the fire
of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance, they bum; by birth, by
age, by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental suf-
ferings, by exhaustion they bum/ I say.”
The original of the last five paragraphs differs only in the*
first lines, given above, excepting the occurrence of the first word
in the terms connected with “perception,” and “impression,” here
added, so that all the original is given while unnecessary repetition
is avoided.
COOOOO
8^0006
COODOO
oogcoooo
sola
vinydnan
sola
samphasso
Ear
perception.
ear
impression
OCO}
850006
eoo^>
oogcoooo
ghdna
vinydnan
ghdroa
samphasso
Nose
perception
nose
impression
850000
oogcoooo
jihvd
vinydnan
jihvd
samphasso
Tongue
perception
tongue
impression
OOOOO
8500000*
OOOOO
OOgCOOOD
kaya
vinydnan
kaya
samphasso
Body
perception
body
impression
850006
OOgCOOOD
mana
vinydnan
mana
samphasso
Mind
perception
mind
impression”
Mind, according to Gaudama’s system, holds the place of a
sixth sense, and no more of imm ortality is awarded it than the bo-
dy. Both are put in the same category.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Oaudama’s Sermon.
177
cooooS c8ogco
evanpassan bhikkhave
“Thus Mendicants ! the sanctified
8 ?§°| cB
ehakkhusmin pi nibbindati
puts restraint on the eye,
oqoocfl 30^00 OODOCOOO
mtavd ariya sdvako
disciple seeing, having heard,
flcoa} 8 ?§°|cB
rupasu pi nibbindati
and he puts restraint on forms,
oogi 8gocoo 8 ?§ c> |cB oog L oogcood 8 $g°§c8
cha'dchu vinyane pi nibbindati chakkhu samphassepi nibbindati
and he puts restraint on perception, and he puts restraint on visual
Cx>8s002[00^0000g000^ am ^ a/i c ^ ia ^ m samphassa pachchayd
impressions, and the effects of visual impressions, whether plea-
sure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produc-
ed, on that also he puts restraint.
“And he puts restraint on the ear, and he puts restraint on
sounds, and he puts restraint on hearing, and he puts restraint
on auricular impressions, and the effects of auricular impressions,
whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen-
sation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.
“And he pnts restraint on the nose, and he puts restraint on
odours, and he puts restraint on smelling, and he puts restraint on
odoriferous impressions, and the effects of odoriferous impressions,
whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen-
sation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.
“And he puts restraint on the tongue, and he puts restraint on
objects of taste, and he puts restraint on taste, and he puts restraint
on impressions of taste, and the effects of impressions of taste,
whe ther pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen-
sation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.
“And he puts restraint on the body, and he puts restraint on
tangible objects, and he puts restraint on feeling, and he puts res-
traint on tangible impressions, and the effects of tangible impres-
sions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever
sensation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.
“And he puts restraint on the mind, and he puts restraint
on objects of thought, and he puts restraint on thinking, and he
pnts restraint on mental impressions, and the effects of mental
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Gm&mticf* Sermon.
176
impramow, whether pleasure or pain, paiplasa Or plguawelaja,
whatever sensation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.
§8| 8qg><8 8<qodl 8<^dB
nibbindan vixajjati virdgd vimuchah #
‘ Having put on restraint, lie is exempt from desire; lie is liberated
8 h 83 °& S^ggScB £oco$ cooccB
vimuttwmin vimnttamiti nyanan hoti
through absence from passion. ‘Into liberation/ he is liber*
8 ODD & 0 & O l c8o5 ^OgQ^CJQ
hliindjdti vusitan brahmachariya/n
ated. There is knowledge. Birth is exhausted, religious duty is
oooo ooqciBoo sdo<^
hath an karunii/an aparan natthi
finished. That which ought to be done, has been done. Other
things there are none.”
Passan , ‘‘seeing,” pres. part. sing. nom. case of the root disa,
agreeing with the noun following, § 178, 207. Sutavd , “having
heard,” active past part, of the root sn, § 178. Nibbindati , “he
puts restraint on,” 3rd. pers. sing, of the root vida, 2nd. conj. with
the preposition ni, § 180. The v is changen to & by § 27, and the
b is doubled by § 75 This form of the verb is defined in Sanskrit
“To consider, to reason.” This illustrates the difference in the sig-
nification of the same root in Pali and Sanskrit.
Virojjati , “he is exempt from desire,” 3rd. pers. sing, of the
root ratty a with the preposition vi, 3rd. conj. § 103. In Sanskrit
the root in the corresponding conjugation signifies only “to dye,”
and when vi is prefixed, “to be averse to dislike,” but in Pali, it
signifies exemption from both likes and dislikes. Virdgd, “absence
from passion,” noun 1st. deel. masc. abl. case, but irregular § 80.
Vinvaokchati, “he is liberated,” 3rd, pers. sing of root mucha
with prep, vi prefixed, 3rd conj. § 108. Vusitan. is finished,” pass,
past part. neut. sing, of the root vusi § *226. (a.) Rarcmiyan, “that
which ought to be done, 1 ’ future pass. part, made by aniya , of the
root hara § 285 (c.) Katan, “has been done,” pass, past part #
neut. gender of the root hara, § 197.
For translations of this famous sermon from the Burmese, see
Journal VolTII page '56, and Bigandet’s Life of Gaudama.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
179
Ancient Inscription.
Asoka and Antiochus.
§ 303. The following inscription in which the name of Anti*
oahtis occur*, is given a3 a specinnn of what Pali was in the
third century before the Christian era. There are a few irregula-
rities for which it is not easy to account, but the marvel is that
there are not more. Pali has nob changed as much in two thou-
sanl years a3 Eiglish his in two or three hundred.
1 4 A AY A t 6~L 6 1 f0 b 1 !> 1 £ T
ODD CO 8§0OO§ C3o1$8oOOO 8j03c8cp CpCgO
savata vijitehmi devananpiyasa piijadasino ranyo
> A 8 0 b d "A <b 1 0- ^ b i 1 ' ( l A J Xb I
I I
Coy8od?oooq ooooo col olql oocBooqcooi)
evamipipachanteiu y.Uhd chrdd pddd satiyaputo
+ A -J b A H A° □ b° 1 H° A J JL + 11 r E
I
coo :o:oqoooo 35 odooctS oScBoo jooo cooo^ q<?»
ketalaoutu a tanhipanm antiyako yona rdja
1 A" b A 1 H A J 1 + 1 X 8° A" T f"±
COO oO 8 00 X) 35c8 JOOOOO OOIq^O Cp 300^0
ye vd pi tasa antiyakasa sumanta raj duo
<b A A > A 1 b 1 1 tf A > Aj £ I" *R
ooooo csoISSjooo SoosdSc^o qcjooo
savata devananpiyasa piyadasino ranyo
> d J + <6 + A" 8 I rbd + d> d brbd + ld
O I i
c§ 8cBaoo ooooo o$oo 8cBaoo o o:q 808200 o
dive chikichhd kata mannsa chihichhd cha pasu chikickhd cha
L rb D 1 d X 1 8 1 1 b A" 1 d b 1
I
(cqDOOoij) o oo? ypooo oo]^ pocool
osadlului cha jjani maamopcujdal cha paso
41
Digitized by v^.ooQle
189
Aficient Inscription.
b A 1 JLAvbAi^fOXAb-rbAXd
ool$ OCOOOOOO flog OOOOO OOD€|d8cOD^ ©>
pdgdni yata yata udstt savata hdrdpiidni cha-
f b b A" Id
cqoolSool^ o
ropdpitdni cha
8 -J'l d b -J'l d X A X A 1 rj d) H
n ^
qco o ocoof O OOOOOOOO flog OOOOO
hidldni cha phalani cha yata yata ndsti savata
trOAJ-dTCbAjLd
oolGjlSoolf O CCpdlSoGof o
lidrapitdni cha ropdpitdni cha
b-0 rb + IJ d T 1 b A' A £ d T b b J A' _L
I I
occooq o^ol o olflSooo oodi o cepdlScoo^
pathesu lupd cha llianapitd vachlid cha ropdpitdni
b f* if A Jb brb 8-LrCX
I 1
o^cooooloo ooq «^odl^
pairibogaya pasu manusdnan
Savata , “everywhere,” adv. § 238. The double letters of the
books are single on the inscription. Vijitehmi , “in the conquered,”
pass, past part, of the root ji with the preposition vi , sing.locative
case, agreeing with a noun masculine or neuter understood, § 89.
Devdnan , “of the Devas,” noun 1st. decl. mase. plur. gen. case,
§ 89. Tiyasa , “beloved of,” adj. masc. gen. case, agreeing with
the noun following. The genitive case is marked by sa instead of
ssa in the books, but Kachchayano gives sa for the original form
of the genitive singular, § 84. Piyadasino , noun 1st decl. sing,
gen. case, § 91. In the books this name instead of Piyada* t, as
here, is written Fiyadasa , § 296. JRanyo, “of king,” noun irf. sing,
gen. case, § 108. Evama t u so,” adv. from evan } the anuswara
Digitized by LnOOQle
Ml-
Amdetit Tmerijftf&ft.
becomes w before 0 , according to § 81. Apt, “alsio,” conj. £ 242.
tackantcsu , “m the barbarian countries,” noun 1st. decl. plur.
loc. case, § 89. Prof. Wilson wrote : “Also even in the bor-
dering countries, not as Prinsep proposes, ‘as well as the parts oc-
cupied by the faithful.” Still there is no reason to question the ren-
dering given above. The word found in books is pachchanta, ■which
by the regular mode of transliteration into the inscription charac-
ter, making the double letters single, would be pieciscly the word
as found on the stone; and it is defined, in the native Pali voco*
bularies, “Country of milakkhu,” the Sanskrit Mhchcfra, “barba-
rian, ” Yathd, “as,” adv. § 288. A , “to,” § 240.
Tcmbopannt , “Ceylon.” There can be no reasonable doubt, of
the identity of Cejlon, and since it is said, “As far as Ceylon,’*
the places previously mentioned were probably between ibe wurer
and Ceylon, and Choda must be Coromar.del, and Ketola, or Kertilat
Malabar. Antiyako , “Antiochus,” a Greek prince, standing appa-
rently for the Yona country, and hence is in the nominative case,
like the nouns which precede. Ye, “those who,” rel. pron. ma^c.
plur. nom. case. § 126, agreeing w'ith rajdno. Tasa , “of that.” dem.
pron. masc. sing. gen. case, § 122, agreeing with antiyakasa.
ChiljcJihd , “medical practices,” noun 2st. decl. plur. nom. case.
Prof Wilson wrote : “The term, ehikichha, is said by Mr. Prinsep
to be the Pali form of, chikitsa, the application of remedies, but
this is questionable. It would rather be, ehikichha, with a short,
not a long i ; but in fact, the Pali form as it appears in vocabu-
laries is, tikichha or tilrichichha. The word is more probably the
Prakrit form of, ch kirsha, the wish or will to co; and the edict
in fact announces that it has been the two-fold intention of the
Raja to provide, not physic, but food, water, and shade for ani-
mals and men”. This only proves the imperfection of existing
Pali vocabularies. Mr.Prinsep was beyond all doubt correct. The
word, as it is read on the stone, is regularly Derived from t! e
root Ki , taking optionally for its reduplication, ti, or chi. § 204,
272* Kata , “have been made,” pass, past part, of the root Aaru,
plur. nom. case, agreeing with ehikichha. § 197, 110.
Osadhaniy “medicines,” noun 1st. decl. neut. plur: § 90. Prof.
Wilson W’rote ; “Mendicaments cannot be meant by osadhani. It
is not in fact the Pali form of, aushadha, a mendicamer.t, but, o-
sbadbi, a deciduous plant” It is fatal to oshadki that it is feminine,
while osadhdni is neuter, agreeing w T ith omtan of the books, and-
since /, and dh are sometimes interchanged, § 22, the w ords are'
clearly identical, and Prinsep is conect. Hardpitani , “have been ;
carried” pass. past. part, of the root lara, causative, neut. plur.
nc-m. case. Prof. Wilson wrote* “This term is of an unusual form,
and doubtful purport.” It is the usual form in the Pali books,
where it signifies, as here, “to carry.” Further analysis is^
unnecessary, because the signification of the other w ords are
not questioned.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
182
Translation.
Everywhere in the conquered [country] of king Piyadisi, be-
loved of the devas, and also in the barbarian countries, as Co-
romandel, Pada, Safciyaputa, Malabar, even as far as Ceylon, the
Yona King Autiochus, and the monarch chieftains of that Antio-
chus.
Everywhere the two medical practices of king Piyadasi,
beloved of the devas, have been made, the medical practice for
men, and the medical practice for beasts.
And wherever there were no medicines suitable for men, and
suitable for beisfcs, thither they have beea carried, and planted.
Aul wherever there were no roots and fruits, thither they
have been carried, and planted.
And wells have been dug on the roads, and trees have been
planted, for the enjoyment of man, and beast.
Professor H. H. Wilson’s Translation.
“In all the subjugated (territories) of the King Priya Iasi, the
beloved of the gods, and also in the bordering countries, as
(Caodi), Palaya, (or Pira/i,) Satyaputra, Keraiaoutra, Tamba-
pmi, (it is proclaimed,) aid Autiochus by nane, the Yona (or
Yavana) Rija, and those princes who are near to, (or all ei with)
that monarch, universally (are apprised) that (two designs have
been cherished by Priya Iasi: one design) regarding men, and One
relating to animals ; and whatever herbs are useful to men or use-
ful to animals, wherever there are none, such have been every-
where ciused to be conveyed and planted, (and roots and fruits
wherever there are none, such have been everywhere conveyed and
planted ; aul on the road?) wells have been caused to be dug,
(and trees have been planted) for the respective enjoyment of
auiuials and men.”
Mr. Prinsep’s Translation .
“Everywhere within t ie cinque. e i province of raja Piyadasi
the beloved of the Gods, as well as in the parts occupied by the
faithful, such $ls Choi i, Pida, Satiyuputra , and Ketalaputra , even
as far a? Tauibapan/il (Ceylon) ; and moreover within the domi-
nions of ANfioCHUS, the Greek, (of which Antiochus’s generals
are the rulers,) — everywhere the heaven -beloved raja Piyadasi’s
double svstem of med ! cal aid is established ; — both medical aid for
men, and medical a: 1 for animals ; together with medicaments
of all sorts, which are suitable for men, and suitable for animals.
And wherever there is no. (such provision) — in all such places
they are to be prepared, and to be planted : both root drugs and
herbs, wheresoever there is not (a provision of them) in all such
places shall they be deposited and planned.”
“And in the public highways wells are to be dug, and trees
to be planned, for tiie accommod itioa of men and animals.”
Digitized by AnOOQle
INDEX AND VOCABULARY.
S3^8«l
980 <w»- 099 *- excellent. Fire 35
930 93 (?> acha > or “A go, move, 139. A goat 154
gag, 93g>cD^> a i ja - a JJ atani now, 136. Present tense 82
S3^ 9s8 ajjha, for adhi for adhi before a vowel 134, 157
32 ^| am y (l another 80, 135
afata a numeral, a Unit with 84 cyphers 75
gjg a(ha, numeral eight, half 71
o->Q athi, a bone 40
akkhara
a, or an. a negative prefix. 110
a letter 14
gj^ ga^j anomer 80, 135
a M a a numeral, a Unit with 84 cyphers 75
gjg a(ha, numeral eight, half 71
g^g athi, a bone 40
930 a 4 ha - half 161
ati, a particle denoting excess, mnnh 186, 137
932000 ato ' again, afterwards 27
92^0 gojog atta, atra, here 135, 136
attd self 79
92 gg attha, learned, signification 14
9200 atha, a contiuuative particle 138
9S>4 adun, see arrm, this, 57
930 adha > below, down 137
9200 adhama, low, vile 27
928 “**> above, superiority 137
anta ' end, final 28
92 ^ antara, Within, or Without 136, 138
£|
an outer garment 24
half 7i
932000
p |Qfj atta, atra,
attd
attha, learned,
atha,
adun,
adha ,
adhama ,
adhi ,
anta ,
antara ,
/Google
164
99
A
9 9ft
tfvna,
boiled rice
160
95*0000 aN * ata »
future
165
95*1 ol©
an anchorite
23
9550Cp«
^ andrdtan >
perpetually
136
4»
antika ,
near
79
anu,
after, alike
13?
950
apa,
off, from, away
137
appa,
small.
70
y •
9500
apapan , a numeral
a unit with 77 cipher*
TO
95o1qO
apdya.
state of punishment
15*
528 a l^» preposition and conj.
upon, (37; and, also
13&
m
abbha abhi
towards, upon
*811°*
amputan , a numeral,
a Unit with 56 ciphers
75
95<^
amu.
this, that
52
95g
ahma ,
See pronoun I
4&
9CCJQ
ayan ,
this
51
3500
aya.
to go; iron
140
95>«V°
aranya.
a forest
16
95qOO
araha ,
to be worthy
162
95^00
ariya.
a Bnddhist Saint
152
a CO
ala ,
to adorn
148
95COOO
alasa,
lazy
146
950
ava ,
away, down
137
GOO 61 SO Colo avac ^9 avocha
he said
126
9000
asa^
to be 115; to eat
145
9000C^]loq| aswnylthyeyyan
an innumerable number
75
9Q000
assa,
a horse
153
Digitized by v^.ooQle
ISS
ID &■
9903}
asana,
food
99Ci8c8
adti ,
eighty
7*
990000
ahahan , a numeral,
ft unit with 79 ciphers
»
9900
ahan ,
the pvoaoan I
99 08
ahi,
ft snake
lee
99 GOOD
aho
an exclamation
laa
an , the anuswara sometimes inserted between words
2 ft
95<?>
to desire
1*9
993 A
990
to
187
990000^
akdra,
ft sign
24
990^)
dkhya ,
to say
S90©%»
dchariya ,
ft teacher
iv
99jS
ddi,
beginning
66
«9D§g
ddichcha ,
the sun
ITtof
99DO
dma,
yes
isu
9900000}
dyatana,
an abode
169
ssfloq
dyu ,
age
49
99000
dha.
he said
125
930 c8^
alinta t
a terrace
22
$£ i
*t
n&
SJCOCf
to go
129
to wish
rao
itara ,
either, other
80
St'® St88
(them.
thus, so
IS#
Digitized by LnOOQLe
8fcs Sfc©
S^aO?
*r>
gooo
d 9
^d3
e ^
e^i°°
£g'°°
B88
B88 w
gSOOO
gs8
g8]OOC^<
b* 08
e°
£OOg«
BBS
itt i,
a woman
170
ida, idha.
here
20,
, 30
idani,
now
185
* indapath anag ara
1
Delhi
indri ,
a faculty
26
ima 9
this
51
i88ara t
the powerful-one
152
isu,
to desire
127,
141
iha ,
here
136
d r
(di,
isan,
like this
a little
u
149
136
u y Sanscrit ud,
up
137
ukkuscty
an eagle
157
uehchatei
is said
126
utta
spoken
142
ultamciy
best
70
udaka
water
22
udadhi
the sea
25
vMharana
wnndda
an example
!▼
to echo
182
upa
above, near.
187 154
v upaJckama
diligence
111
vppajja
born
183, 162
Digitized by v^.ooQle
187
e *
go©ooo
upajjhaya
a teacher
157
goocB
upapati ,
a paramour
127
B°?
upari,
over
13S
68 05
vppalan
a Unit with 98 ciphers
75
goloooooo
uppdyasd
infirmity 170,
174
B8 1sl *
uppddana
attachment
169
gpooo
ubhaya
both
23
6^
ura
breast
164
goooo
usabha
a measure
25
tusira
a root of khus-khus
25
c s
COO
eka
one
46
Coos'!
ekadd
at one time
135
Coo
eta
this, that
5.0
Cl
edi
like that
Ccvx>
eld
cardamom.
18
Co
evan ,
as, when
138
Coo
68*
fa wish
127
@ 0
(pq 900
o, for ava
away
137
pq<r>
oka
speaking
142
b3ooo
ormka
inferior
27
0^00
orasa
best, son
23
43
Digitized by v^.ooQle
188
K is often interchanged with /j, page 19, and conaetimes
with eh, page 139. Kkh often corresponds to ^ ksh in Sanskrit.
CTOgOD
knnyd
a virgin
37
ooooo
Jcana
small
70
oocjj
Jcahmx,
black
155
I n In vet
which?
80
OOOQG\
Jcaitu
a doer
64
°°88l
oooo
hatha
speak,
140
ooooo$
Jeathanan
a Unit with 126 ciphers
75
hantara
desirable
30
co8
kapi
an ape
3
CO
8
o
8
happilavata
a city on the Gogra
o
OOQ
kamma
a deed
66
(o'
moo
hay a
the body.
144
OQC\
hara
to do, 99, 128, 132, 133,
, 134
CONOID
karana
instrument of action
145
OO^
hart ham
a doer, an artificer
149
anc8&
halignga
Coromandel
coo
hava
to paint
148
ooc8c\
kasmira
Cashmere
OOOOOOOOOD kahapond
a coin
19
coo
kama ,
to desire
kdmini ,
willingly
136
ooloS
kasi
Benares
&
hi
to buy
94
S’
kin
who? which? what?
54
Sco
leita co$Q kncii chhd medicine 140, 109,
113
Digitized by LnOOQLe
oo
K
189
rB^csTI
c8c8oo k *' sa
ku
kvpa
k ufa
kute
k udfola
kubbha
k umudan
k uru,
kwura
k usa
kiAdha
ai
cr\&
«K
OCJ|CO
<W
0^00
O^OCB^ ^ kussinndnm
coooo keset
cooo8 kocA *
COOD^ ko ^
COOO^OCOOO^ kofippakoti
COol 00 ^ kc«a66 At
cool COCO kosala
What? 133
vicious 104
bad, a particle 145, 152, 185
tp be angry 93, 145
summit 172
ten milli ons
a hoe
a pot
a Unit with 105 ciphers
the vicinity of Dchli
the Osprey
to shine 150, 147
a city on the Gandak
hair
any
ten millions
ten trillions
Kanouj
Oude
75
159
247
75
157
148
80
75
75
°9
k wa
Where?
ii, 80
- Kh
0
Oocaiionally Kh is
represented in Sanskrit by ksh
T!
opg
k hanyja
crooked footed
161
QCDD
k handa -
a division
66
<V~
©08
khatti
a king, a prince
66
a®
khi da
to alarm
131
Digitized by v^.ooQle
190
9
Kh
©«
Mama
to be patient
31
©q
Uamu ^ ^ k hanu
to dig
131
8
Mi
to finish, end
25, 178
S8t
col
k hujja
crooked backed
162
Ma
indeed
32
Sometimes g is inserted between words, it often represents
k in the root, page 19, sometimes j, page 139, and occasionally,
y, page 140. O in Pali often stands for gr in Sanskrit.
o&oq
ccq
oq
09^
0000
000
oHo
gachehha
gandha
gandlidra ,
gahna
gandhappa ,
garmiy
garuta c <^
gavaya , qq^
gaha ,
gdma
go 91, 124
odour 1 75
Afghanistan
to take 98
a celestial musician 171
go 124
garuda » griffon 160,171
gavaja the gayal 20
to take, a house 32, 66, 131
a village 29
cDoocB 9 d 'J ati BctoocB W dti sings
to sing
a good attribute
to guard
an ox
00 Gh
8
9*
qctb
guna
qo
gupa
col
go
103, 111
111
44, 148
93
42, 158
Occasionally gh is interchanged with gi P»g® 124. In Sanskrit
it corresponds sometimes to ghr.
ghafa to Unite “» 172
K
Digitized by v^.ooQle
©O^
©OD£
gJiafd
a water jar •
158
ghdna
the nose
176
©000
ghcda CO^
h-ana
to kin
158
coog
ghtppa OOO
gdha
to take
§8
©oo
ghama
to go
124
«OC|
ghara
a house
70
©ooo
gha8a
0
to eat
Ch
107
Sometimes ch, is interchanged with fc, page 139, sometimes With
page 19, and ehckha may fep&sent ch , t, th , d , m, s, or /i,
page 139, 138, 142. Chch in Pali occasionally represents jjj
ty in Sanskrit, and chchh is sometimes ksh in Sanskrit.
O
^°8l
©CO
ecr±
©J^D
©q
©C|C0i
©1o
8
8cBgc8
8<?t
q©
CODCJ
cha
and
138
chdkkhu
the eye
173
changkamati qq
gama S06S
108, 1'4
chaja
to abandon
130
chala
to shake
lit
chain,
four
47, 71, a
chcmdimd
the moon
17$
cha/ra
to observe
14$
charana
the foot
17#
chdjpa
a bow
US'
chi
to assemble
104
chikichchhati
practises medicine 113
chiran
a long time
135
cKuba
to kiss
15#
chura
to steal
102, 152*
chora
a thief
1*9.
44
Digitized by v^.ooQle
193
30
i
•
30
qq chha
six
71
chhada
to cover
140
-g s cAAida
to cut
112, 131, 95
Sometimes j is
represented by g, page 149, by gng, by tti r
by ih, page 140, and occasionally it represents g, gh , page 113,
d,dA, page 140, 183, y, page 20, #, page 141, and h
, page 113.
<*C& **
birth
170, 2»
&G[ i wa
bear, be born
134
old, age
126, 174
OQCO ^
a net
143
OCO?8 3< danidhi
ocean
25
©>0 ’*
knows
125
©ooq ^ om -
to awaken
103
aoo8 ^
meditating
170
§ i*
to conquer
134, 19
old
70, 132
to grow old
126
Sol
tongue
j7S
J
c^aa •>«*»
to shine
qi n
106
|
1
•S
represents dh , page 59, 91.
qjo^
miraculous power 31
qjoo J^ a
a nsh
a cricket
Digitized byCjOO^IC
goo
nyd
to know
134, 125, 145, 178
q Th
Occasionally th, is interchanged with th, page 18, and some-
times with dh, page 19. When the second consonant of a
word, it often indicates the passive past participle, page 130.
In the following verb it is represented in Sanskrit by dh.
to place, stand 91, 103
JJOO daha
to burn
131
T is sometimes inserted between words, page *8, sometimes
it is interchanged with dh, page 19, sometimes it is changed to
chch, page 140, and occasionally it represents j, page, 140, and
n, page 141. Tt usually corresponds to rt in Sanskrit.
cooooBco
GO
tachchha
tahnd
°°2>
cp ago
C»m oog utra
cnSoo
ooooo tatha
oosl
coo
COOOO
COO tapha
tempapani
Taxilla
to hew
concupiscience
there
third
thus, besides
then
to burn
asceticism
to please
Ceylon
159
165
135
76
135, 23
139
130, 174
161
170
11
Digitized by v^.ooQle
194
CO<q
OOOO
iara
00 T
to aross, descend
132
tahan tahin
there
136
oMc&b
forty
78
CO COCO
%o ^ & & *
three
46, 71
cBc^
tira
btiyond
154
*0co
tOa
sesamum
143
Sod
tisa
thirty
72
oq
ink
hut
138
oqs
tudfr
to pain
140
oqajo
tunda
a snout
147
oqqo
furaga
a horse
142
cooo*
teja
a light
170
°8
twan oq^ tohman fh ou
48
s D
D is sometimes inserted between worlds, page 65.
It is
occasionally changed to chchh, to jj, to t, atad to ir,
page 140.
SCOO
danda
a stick
149
or-
sag
dandt
a pilgrim
35
SQ
damn
to tame
131, 144
L
3C l
S S
so
dark
to dread
144
date
to shine
108
dava duya
goes
104
SCO
dasa
ten
71
900
dusa
to be wicked
146'
si
dd
to give 91,
127,' 8 a
■93.
datta
a sickle
159
§0
diva
to play
9496 s
80 ]
divd
by day
Digitized by v^.ooQle
s
195
§33 <u*a, a place,
to see, speak 125 ,
129, 153
^ du
^<Boo dutiya
to pain, ill
150, 137
second
76
^OQ dulilcha
pain
174
^o8c8co daUtita
QSO deva
a daughter
65
a deva
13
CSol^SoO devananpiya tisea
a king of Ceylon
ii
CSIOOD dota ’
at night, sin
136, 174
glc^ AbAm
a door
143
0
Bh
Bh is interchanged with both th and fh t page 19, and is
sometimes changed to jh ,
page 91, 59.
Q o dhanya
paddy
31
©^> dhana
property
111, 148
gg dhama
to discipline
91
Qg dhamma
law
144
©q dhara
to hold
108
QO dha,
to bear
134, 150
8cBcO dhttita
daughter
65
OOC§ dhatu
a root
25
qq dhe
to drink
150
, N
N is sometimes inserted between words, page
28, some-
times it is interchanged with n, page 132, and is occasionally dwg-
ed to t , page 141. When the second consonant of
a wferd, it
is more often a formative
than
a radicle.
^ na ’ j>e8
nahi
no, not
45
136
Digitized by
Google
19 $
nacha
ndtha
nadt
nama
nara
j>ojc8
ioqoo
?$oqoo
^oc t
?
? C 18IL* nirahp * dan
$£} «iri
$;6p© WAa
$300
?
C^s neda
nafa
nava
navuH
nahuian
ninnahutan
ndnd
ndgara
ni
ntssa
nt
to danoe
130, 140
a lord
161
a river
38
to bow, glory
108, 162
a man
160
nine
71
ninety
74
a unit with 28 ciphers 75
a unit with 35 ciphers 75
variously
136
a city
143
to guide, in
137, 134
a unit with 63 ciphers 75
hell
66
extinction
163
to trust in
145
without
137
near
70
o
p
P is often interchanged with
presents pr in Sanskrit. Lp
6, page 19, and frequently re-
in Sanskrit is occasionally j >p
in Pali.
O * a H
ocr> 0 C[ cm
OCO P a9e
before
a book
in the morning
°8°9
oo
paggahya, q(jq gaha taken lip
pacha COOk
137
U
136
133
87, 129
Digitized by v^.ooQle
OgCOOD
OgOO
°0B
opoooo
eg
°^ n
01^05
coo
ocB o
0008
03
08
0^0
0^6
0300
0003
oepo
o^ 00
O €\0
<4
o^cso
ocepogo
ooc^
008 ^
0
p
197
pachchha
to ask
130
pachcliato
behind
135
pachchaya
effect
169
panycha
fire
47, 71
panydsa
fifty
73
party a
wisdom
68
pa(a
to surround
147
pa(hana
prayer
162
punfarikan
a unit with 119 ciphers 75
pata
to go
158
| pati, pati
imft
master, back
19, 137
pathflvi
the earth
65
pada
to go, a word
81
pati
a foot-path
25
paduma
a lotus
19
paduman
a unit with 112 ciphers 75
pana
to accumulate
pappata
a mountain
110
pamddo
carelessness
39
parahka
diligence
153
pard
another
81
para
back, excess
137
pari
around, very
137, 182
pandeva
lamentation
170
parokkhd
the perfect tense
82
pavara
excellent
171
pahvnd
abandoned
26
Digitized by v^.ooQle
188
O P
6)
pd
to drink, preserve 134 , 13
o)o
pdpa
wicked, sin
*9
olq
pdpu
to obtain
97, 104
o)8
pdU
a line
18, 18, 10
olocos ^
a spire, a temple
154.
8 p*
■»8 ^
and
138
8 §
p/f/ti ^
the back
161
8 coo
pm( a
a lump, boiled rice 30
8 oq
pitu
a father
41 67
8 oo
ptya
beloved
ii
^88
putta
a son
164
puna
again
134
qg
puppha
a flower
31
QOD
puma
a male
39, 67
qqoc'ooo P“ rato
before
135
puja
to offer
144
pxvra
a country, to fill
132
qS}DD
purisa
a man
34, 158
to
prichchhd
scorpio
16
Ph is sometimes interchanged with bh, page 19.
oqoq
t>cp
qoo6
CODgg
phaggune
pharasu
phassu
phothapp a
a lunar mansion
an ax
to finish, bear fruit
to find, feel
touch
19
159
91
17 *
Digitized by v^.oooLe
B
199
t>
O
B
B is often interchanged with w, page 19, sometimes with p,
and occasionally with bh, page 112, 131.
bafa firm 70
bandhn
Undu
bala
O OD baha
CJO
q°S
§8
@“8
budha
byalckha
bravi
brahma
«tqi
a kinsman €8
a drop, unit with 49 ciphers 154,75
Benares
strong, strength 68
to obtain 131
bujlia to know 59, 162, 130, 140
a tiger 10
to say 125
a Brahmin 66, 170
§0300
00
Bh
Bh is interchanged with ph , page 19, and is changed occa-
sionally to chchh, and ddh, page 141.
ooo bha3a
glory
148
ooool bhagavd
a lord
164
' O0(?» bha]a
to enjoy
96
0300 bhaya
to fear [
152
cococfi hala 9^ ni
030 bhava COOO^j
a lunar mansion
19
ihonta your Lordship
78
OD) bU
to shine
149
oolcq bUtu oo1oo€|
bhatara ^ brother
40
OD000 bUsa
to speak
. 129
bhikkhu
c8* hhida
a priest
36, 65
to distribute, divide 103 131
46
Digitized by v^.ooQle
200
00 Bh
oq<*
bhuja
to eat .
107
OOOtO
bhujaga
a snake
142
bhu
to be
93, 112, 117
ojS
bhumi
earth
eooo
bo
a term of address
133
M is sometimes inserted between words, page 28, and
when the second consonant of a root, it is occasionally inter*
changed with chchh , page 141, and w, page 131.
ocqqp
iwafaffd
wo
maga
WOO
magada
Q$CO
manggala
w<?>
maja
Q 3
mada
“8?
machchhd
oc^cB
majuti
wqp
majhama
too
mata
«c8
mati
woo
matha
madhura
man a
«8§
matti
Hr.
muni
W|
manu
w$<?>
manivja
a crest, tiara
171
to go
147
Maguda
143
fortunate
147
to squeeze in the hand 91
to madden
91, 148
intoxication
148
power
163
middle
V
knowledge
141
wisdom, death
37, 148
to nourish, box
92, 140
Madura on the Juinna 165
to mihd, know
148
knowledge
148
an ascetic
148
to know, think
134, 148
man
171
Digitized by v^-ooQle
uoq<S[
mayura
«€\
mara
cejdb
«88
mdruna
maUa
COO
masa
«%ooo
mantissa
coqtf^
masura
coo
maha
cooo
maha
coooooooo? ma}l
coBoo
mahinsa
coq.
mahun
qq ma prohibi
cooq
matn
co^
mdna
coq
mara
coco
mala
cooo
masa
8s
mida
co
mucha
09
muda
qoo
mudha
qoo
musa
(tfCO
mula
cco
medha
ccooo
moha
ccoag
mokkha
•coo
mansa
metti
a peacock
143
to die
141, 148
death
174
a boxer
140
to Weigfh
147
man
148, 150
a pea
147
to worship
92
great
152
a unit with 133 ciphers 75
ft
a buffalo
143
often
167
to love, measure
91, 136
a mother
41, 67
to love, respect
6Y
death, Kama
160
a flower
147
a month
161
love
140
to free
103, 17$
to enjoy
9$
in vain
136
to break
147
a root
25
understanding
69
folly
174, 132
to loose, free
flesh
Digitized by v^.ooQle
202
OO
r
oo
r
Y is sometimes inserted between words, page 29, it is some*
times interchanged with j, page 20, when the last of a com-
pound character, it often represents i, page 24, exceptionally it
is changed to i page 92, occasionally it stands for A, in the root r
and when added in conjugation is most usually changed to the
preceding consonant, thus doubling it, page 91, 133.
ya who, which, what
ydkkha a belOO
to worship
OO
<x>og
OCX?)
<»8f3
002000
00300
oosl
008
oocq
OOOQ
0030
oq<?>
00030 )^
yaja
yatta
yato
yathd
yada
yadi
yamu
ydcha
ydva
yuja
yrnnuna
yojana
OO
yatra where
wherefore
as
when
if, when
to restrain
ask
as mueh as
to join, unite
the Jumna
a yuzena
53
161
92
135
138
29, 135, 154
135
138
127
129
135, 154
139, 93, 130
158
E
E is sometimes inserted between words, page 29, when the
second radical of a root, it is changed occasionally to f, tt, or
mm, page 141, it is sometimes interchanged with l page 20, and
is occasionally rejected before the termination of the passive
past participle, page 131, 142.
rakkha to guard 129
rttcAa to Shine 93
«i°8
<t)0
Digitized by v^.ooQle
C)0>
raja
to possess passion 178
‘IS
ratha
desiring
140
«18§
ratU
night
170
Cjoo
ratha
a carriage
147
ramu
to enjoy
129, 160
€|8oDOO ravthansa
a sun-duck
157
<|CO
rasa
taste
175
e^oo
r&ga
passion, rage
174
cpoo
o
rdjd
ri
a king
42, 66
3
to injure
177
tfpogicx)
Rajagriha in Maguda
c|o
richa
to destroy
139
i}<?oo
rite
without
13®
ruja
to be sick
142
<0©
rudha
to hinder, obstruct 95,131
<go
rupa
to confuse
104
f)8J1
ruchimd
lustre
68
rupa
to form, an image 34, 67, 161
C^OBO[
renu
dust
149
CO*
L is sometimes inserted between words, page 29
, occasion -
all y it is interchanged with
r, page 20, and when the
last conso-
nantofa word, it sometimes represents the participial t,
pagelSl.
0009
lakkha
to mark, notice
161
<00§
cooo
laJchhan
a laok
75
labha
to obtain
91
COQOOO
Idvaka
a reaper
143
c8og
Ukkha
to write
47
Digitized by v^.ooQle
204
\
080
lijpa
to smear
130
lu
to cut, reap
143
ccoOoo
loka
the world
153
ccolc8oo Mita
red
152
0 r
V is
sometimes
inserted between words, page 29 f
it is uftes
changed to 5, page 19, when a second radicle it is occasionally chan-
ged to it , page 141, when the last consonant in a verl
>, it often
represents u, in the
root, page 93, and when the last of a com*
pound letter, it is often v, changed in Permutation, page 26.
°OQ
vadckha
to say
126
oeoop
vaghdnd
a porch
2 *
OQ
vacha
to speak 91,
126, m
00^
vachana qqqq vaohasa a Word
78, 144
0 $
vachchhd
dwelling
141
088
vatta
a garment
141
os
vada
to speak
144
Oft
vanda
to worship
132, 143
w
00
vadhu
a daughter in law 38
1L
00
vama qq
L
vamu to TOmit
131, 142
oei
vara
to preserve
141
varan
better
70
000
vasa
to dwell, live, iso, 141 , 160
000
vaha
to flow
92
61
vd
to go, blow, or
138, 145
oloo
vdta
wind
143
61 c8
vdsi
an ax
159
8
vi
a particle, ex-dis-un 137
Digitized by v^.ooQle
0
r
?05
8$
vijjd
knowledge
ICO
8poo<i6
vinyana
knowledge
173
8s
fsida
to know 104, 140, 147
8*
vina
to instruct
143, 145
8 yx>
vinaya
the Viniya
145
8so
vind
besides
138
1
8oo<^
vibhamu
to turn
131
8ooo
vimansa
to investigate
114
8<^®
vvmukha
an ugly face
152
8^88
vimutta
rtmcJia
to liberate
103, 176
8cpo
vvrdga Qqj,
virajja
unpassioned
178
88o
vivicha
to be solitary
133
8oo
visa
pre-eminent
69
8nee|
visara
to go
131
8c8
vihi
paddy
159
8o8co
vihita
adjudged
26
8 a*,
visa
twenty
72
°18§
vutti
a commentary
24
°18
vuddhi
increase
iv
0(0
V'odba
vudg,
to increase
9 a, i4i
O|00
VU8(l
be done, finished 178, 128
D[00
vuha
to increase, grow
92
CO
ve
to go, certainly
136, 149
CQCOL
venu
a bamboo
149
COS
veda
the Veda
147
CO 00008 ve *dli
a city on the Gandak
cos^d
vedand
sensation
169
Digitized by v^.ooQle
206 oo 8
00 s
8 when the second radical, is occasionally changed to chr
chhy to jjh, and dh, page 141
00 ** 000 * d CD tan
• nan he, the, it
49
oboo
saka
to be able, own
91, 79
0000 $£
sdkafa
Oude
10, 17
008
takhi 335]
sakhd
a friend
66 , 42
oo 5 j
sangkhya
a number
23
ooSl^
sangkhdra
existance
170
CXOg
sachcha
truth
140
°°s
sanycha
to quiet
140
8 a] j ana
the virtuous
92
O’ 1
00 ^
sofa
to manifest
169
safhi
sixty
73
ODCO
sata
to be true
140
00 00
Satan
one hundred
76
ocooooS
8aha88cm
a thousand
75
000000
satatan
1 sand
perpetually
136
a >83
satta
seven
71
CXDQOO
8attd
a teacher
156
^ ft
ooggcB ooooSj
8attari SOVOllty
74
00 |
sadda
sound, word
156
0030
8addhd
faith
22
°°&
santa
peace
111
00?!
sanadda
modesty
170
cog
sai P a OQO
8abba
all, every
43, 135
oo«cd 5
samana
a Buddhist priest
153
003000
samjphassa
impression
173
Digitized by v^.ooQle
ODg
sanya
perception
oocB
sail
circumspection, caution
ODg°*
saddhin
with
138
oooo
samma
near
136
oogi
earn ma
well, good, complete 1*2
OOG^
samu
to quiet
131
OD^g
samuddha
the ocean
HO
sayan
own
73
OQ«l
sara
to remember, a vowel 131
co8q
samra
the body
COCO
sola
to enter, go
00 c»
8alla
an arrow
20
00
0000
sasa
a hare
10
oooo
saha ooq mman with
138
oo
san
with
137, 139
o58oo
8ankhita
abridgment, epitome vi
002XD
sangha
a church, assembly 23
00003^
scvnsdra
world-misery
J32
oooo
sdkha
a branch
132
ooo§
sddi
equal to it, like
149
oooS
sdmi
a master, lord
OCO<^
sddhu OOOOCjJ
sdhu y68, good
26, 136
oooo
sddha
firm
3030 Q§
sdvatti
Ayodhya
136
ooooo
scrnd
golden
70
30000
sasa
to teach, mustard
29
08
si
to sleep
129
48
Digitized by v^.ooQle
c8o tich *
to pour
13©
08000
080O g sthak*
a disciple
Ceylon
iy
oq s “
oqciiocB
to hear, praise, well 137, 15©
he hears, praises
oqcoco * ukaian
a^e>% tugandha
O^j) svkha
doing well, merit
good smell
24
happiness
32, 163
Oqqo eugupa
to hide
130
oqcsO «***
a dog
10
oqo sucha
to grieve
142
Bimalcho,
a dog
132
00 op sutta
an aphorism
iv
cqo
to sleep
130
CqOO supava
a monkey
10
0^00 sub ha
to gore
96
CqO * uva
to injure
141
OqOgJg suvarna
oqogg oq8 8wva ^ a bMmi
oqq ™ ra 9oaq<^ amra
GOO CO feta
gold
Thatung, Pegu
146, 161
angel, fallen angel
white
171
OOOO *°
six
71
cooPoo ® oA:a
grieving
142
coooooq so/cara,
hog
143
^,Cy3 sokandhiJcan
a unit with 91, ciphers 75
cooooo " ota
the ear
22, 175
cooogoo solasa
sixteen
15, 72
Digitized by
Google
oo H 209
H in the formation of words is sometimes changed to chchh,
and occasionally to ?/> page 141, and in reduplication to page 113.
utti
an elephant
65
hana 0000 ghata
to kill 129,
134, 149
O0|
now
136
oaq lMra
to carry
80, 107
oooo
to rejoice
129
ooo M
to reject
146
c8oocB ***
is rejected
26, 92
c8 w
to go, if, certainly
136
c8c6
fit, proper
himavd
frost and snow
68
C^oo
to injure, kill
104
to be, sacrifice
121, 145
C^COOOcB jnhote
he offers
CJOg$ juhwati
he offers
131
oqocB huvati
he offers
coooq ^ <4 *
a cause
150
coo6 hevan
thus
620, 13
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Printed and puUieliad at ikt J£*ren Institute Press, by P. Maeoa.
Digitized by v^.ooQle
A Distinguished German scholar in London, who had seen in
sheets the first half of the “Pali Grammar based on Kachohayar
no”, has furnished the author the kind strictures and inquiries -that
follow. If other readers will confer like favours, Pali Grammar
will soon be better understood, for corrections where needed, will
be made, and misapprehensions, when they exist, will be removed..
“ Clough’s book, as you know best, ,y writes my correspondent,
“is full of blunders of every kind, and you have done wisely in us-
ing it with great caution.” The same judgment migh 1 } be pas-
sed on this book, and on some of the- most useful books ever pub-
lished in India. Roxburgh was the best botanist in India, and Dr.
Carey was second only to Roxbnrgh; yet Carey edited Roxburgh’s
“Flora Indica,” and produced a book notoriously “full of blunders
of every kind.” Nevertheless, Roxburgh’s “Flora Indica” with
all its “blunders”, has stood for half a century at the head of hooks
on Indian botany. The blunders are spots on the snn, a fed the
same may be said of Clough’s book.
It was necessary to print the covers of this work for the Bi-
bliotheca Indica in Calcutta* The superintendent of the. press is
one of the most accomplished European Sanskrit scholars in In-
dia, and the editor is a native gentleman not only an fait in San-
skrit, but familiar with all the alphabetic characters, ancient and
modern, in India; and yet a motto from the old Pali inscriptions,
consisting of eight words, has been printed off with half as manjT
errors changing the signification, though a correct printed copy was
sent up to insure accuracy. Compare “Introduction” page VI.
rbT l 1 sanlcliitena, the inst. sing, of sankhita. The same
word, in the same case, occurs in the language attributed to Gau?
dama, when appointing Kachchayano his grammarian, page 18,
coScg#
sankliittena , precisely the same form as that on the inr
scrip tion, excepting, as usual, the double letter. Like the dorresv
ponding Sanskrit word, it signifies “concise,” but, on the covers,
49
Digitized by v^-ooQle
412* Appendix.
the word has been altered, and divided into two, by a wide space,
•o that it now signifies, “0 friend by this !” ^ sakha
feeing the voc. sing, of sakhi, § 107. and ^ J_ terui, the inst. sin.
6f to, § 122. There is a discrepancy also in the name. For po-
pular use, it was deemed best to omit diacritical mirks, ami print
Kachchayano, which has been done throughout the work. In ma-
nuscripts, it is written Kachchayano, bat on the cover it is printed
Kichchdyano, with two long vowels, a form never met in Burmafc,
nor, so far as appears, in Ceylon either. It is a matter of little m(w
men t, but it helps to make confusion, and contributes to show how
easy it is to bring out a book “full of blunders of every kind.”
“On the other hand you liave given prominenca to forms, as
sanctioned by Burmese Pali usage, that I ha ee been inclined to
attribute to the negligence or carelessness of Burmese copyists t
because they are not warranted by the grammarians.” This re-
mark indicates that European scholars arj disposed to set up Sin-
galese Pali as the standard, and whatever deviates from it as irre-
gular.
To titis we must demur. It is claimed that the most ancient
Pali books are in Burmah, where they have existed from their first
introduction fourteen centuries ago, while Ceylon was nearly de-
nuded of Pali books within the last three hundred years. It
has been an object with the writer of this work to show what the
Pali books in Burmah contain, to bring out the forms as they
are here found, unmodified by any preconceived theory.
“In the same way I lay down the spelling of sabpo instead of
tabho , to the carelessness of the scribe.” Nothing could be more
•rroneus. Scribes are careful to write sabpo , but write sab bo > and
sap po , through carelessness, perhaps once in a hundred times.
The word was first Romanized by Bumouf and Lassen, and
as they drew from Singalese sources, they spelled it sabbo. They
had also the kammava from Burmah, in which bp is often met in
the gerund affix tabpa , but they read it by mistake tabba , and in
plate IV, they represent g erroneously, by bba, when it ought to
be bpa. 0 n the same plate is the similar error of making § mba
instead of mpa. These mistakes have contributed not a little to
the misunderstanding of the contents of the Pali books in Burmah*
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Appendix. 913
“And § 193. dibpami for diVbdmi The usage in Bur mob
is uniformly that given in the table of conjugation.
”Is it not, in § 196. ghebbdm and likewise in § 197. kubba -
mi ?” No. The reply is as above. Moreover gheppdmi is Singa-
lese, as well as Burmese, usage, for it is found in both Clough and
Alwis
“Is not the locati re termination smi for smin, likewise to be
attributed to the same source ?” Undoubtedly. Smi if alone is gi-
ven in the table of case termi nations, § 137. but it is added, § 138.
s min, smi, smi, and smia, most usually smi, are all found in ma-
nuscripts in Burmah.
“Either tth, or tth, but hardly ifh” In the tami jata, tfh
•ccurs repeatedly, though not in Kachcliayano.
“If dasan is written instead of dasan , it can only have b3en
through carelessness.” Since the two forms are found occasional-
ly written in books in Burmah, and since they are seen interchang-
ed in the inscriptions in India, the presumption is in favour of de-
sign.
“Read S^COOO Correct, and is so written where it first oc-
i
curs, but by an oversight, when repeated* it was printed
“ Settan , § 38,” * Yes, there is a / omitted in the text, and
is the correct reading in the Pali character.
*Assa, § 52. a. Gen. sing.” Right, and my renderings “those
persons,” is wrong. It ought to be “that person.”
‘•Read qqqo QQOQCO ^ necessary correction. The blun-
der of k for g .was discovered too late to correct the press.
“Uchd, § 40. should it not be vachd , for aeaeh , ( 3rd. sing,
aor. attanopadani, ) ?” I had some authority for making it 2ni.
sing, imperative, on the base uclict , § 210. the imperative affix o-
mitted, as often. When preceded by the 3rd. pers. pron. it may
be as parsed by my correspondent, or it may be 3rd. sing, imperf.
parassapadani, on the base vacha , as :
COOOQDOOO soma vachd. “May he not say.”
In Pali both the imperfect and aorist are thus u-.el fur the im-
perative mood with md, but in Sanskrit the aorist only is noted
by the grammarians in this usage.
Digitized by UjOOQle
214
Appendix .
. “Do not the words, § 24. represent two distinct verba
NT stha , and dha ?” These two Sanskrit verbs are represented
by one in Pali. Tlia signifying sometimes to stand, like the first,
and sometimes to place, like the second, but the latter usage is of
somewhat doubtful authority, for fhd is quoted as a neuter verb
in the grammar. Dhd appears occasionally as a synonyme, and
may be a remnant of an original distinct usage. As an independ-
ent verb, dha in Pali signifies to carry.
“Is not ichchddi the usual form?” The form in the text is the
one given by Kachchayano. § 44.
In “ § 45. b. Jalanijjhudadld ?” This form has not*been not-
ed. The one in the text was taken from the Pali dictionary.
kudh is the root, § 187. IV Conj. and forms correct-,
ly hijjhate .” So far as Sanskrit is concerned it is undoubtedly
so, but Sanskrit is not Pali, and Kachchayano ’s commentator refers
the form in this place to kuja. Other forms he refers to kudha ,
§ 256. and the two bases are given in the Vocabulary, page 189.
“The Pali word for Scorpio is vichchhiko , ( San. vriscliika ,) as
given in Subhuti’s very correct edition of the AbhidMnappadtpikd.
§ 8. * Subhuti may be very good authority for Singalese Pali,
Lub we must protest against his being of any authority in Burmese
Pali. All the books in Burmah, to which reference has been made,
spell the word uniformly as given in the text.
“Is not § 73. based on a faulty reading ?” No, Kachchaya-
no devotes a separate Aphorism to teach the rule, and gives seve-
ral examples, of which this in question is one. See Book I. Part
lVi Aphorism 8.
“Is there no hope of your bringing out the text of Kachchaya-
no ? If you hesitate only for the want of a publisher, I think I
could find a Moecenas here, who would print it at his own expense.
There is nothing in the way of my printing the text of Kach-
chayano, w’hich I should like much to do, but the res angusta do *
mi. Let the means come from any quarter, and<fl^l^repared
to print the text of Kachchayano, either,
(1.) In the Burmese character alone. -
(2.) Or in the Roman character alone.
(*3.) Or in both characters together.
(4.) Or either, or both, of the above texts, and a literal trans*
lation, wish or without notes.
Toungoo Moy y 186S.
P. Mason.
9 *»
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by v^.ooQle
Digitized by ^.ooQie
J
Pali Grammar by Francis Mason
Anónimo